Thailand Civil and Commercial Code

Thai Civil and Commercial Code

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

TITLE II
PERSONS
CHAPTER I
NATURAL PERSONS

Personality

Section 15. Beginning of Human Life

Personality begins with the full completion of birth as a living child and ends with death.

A child who is still inside the mother’s uterus is capable of rights provided that the child is thereafter born alive. (Personal Rights with the Birth of the Child)

Section 16. Calculating a Person’s Age

In calculating the age of a person, the birth day shall be counted. If only the month of birth is known, the first day of such month shall be counted as the birthday but if it is not possible to ascertain the date of birth of a person, his age is calculated from the first day of the official year during which such birth took place. (Official Birth Date)

Section 17. Assumption of Simultaneous Death

When several persons have perished in a common peril, and it is not possible to determine which of them perished first, they will be presumed to have died simultaneously.

Section 18. Right to Individual Names

If the right to use of a name by a person entitled to it is disputed by another, or if the interest of the person entitled is injured by the fact that another uses the same name without authority, then the person entitled may demand from the other abatement of the injury. If a continuance of the injury is to be apprehended, he may apply for an injunction.

Capacity

Section 19. Age of Majority – Adulthood

A person, on completion of twenty years of age ceases to be a minor and becomes sui juris.

Section 20. Minor becomes Adult upon Marriage

A minor becomes sui juris upon marriage, provided that the marriage is made in accordance with the provisions of Section 1448.

Section 21. Minors cannot consent to a Juristic Act

For the doing of a juristic act, a minor must obtain the consent of his legal representative. All acts done by him without such consent are voidable unless otherwise provided.

Section 22. Minors: No consent to accept a right or be release of a duty

A minor can do all acts by which he merely acquires a right or is freed from a duty.

Section 23. Minors: No consent needed for personal activities

A minor can do all strictly personal acts.

Section 24. Minors: No consent needed for basic life decisions

A minor can do all acts which are suitable to his condition in life, and required for his reasonable needs.

Section 25. A minor, after reaching fifteen years of age, can make a will.

Section 26. If a minor is given property, he can use it freely within the limited purpose provided.

When the legal representative permits a minor to dispose of property for a purpose specified by him, the minor may, within the limits of such purpose, dispose of it at his pleasure. He may do the same as to property which he has been permitted to dispose of without any purpose being specified.

Section 27. A minor can seek court permission to accept employment or start a business.

The legal representative may permit a minor to carry on a commercial business or other business, or to enter into a hire of services contract as an employee. In case of refusal by the former without reasonable ground, the minor may apply in the Court for granting permission.

The minor shall, in relation to the carrying on of business or the hire of services under paragraph one, have the same capacity as a person sui juris.

If the carrying on of a business of service is permitted under paragraph one causes a serious damage or injury to a minor, the legal representative may terminate the permission granted to the minor or may, in case of having been granted by the Court, apply to the Court for revocation of the permission granted.

If the permission is unreasonably terminated by the legal representative, the minor may apply to the Court for revoking the termination of permission of the legal representative.

The termination of permission may by the legal representative or the revocation of permission by the Court would make the minor’s capacity of a person sui juris cease to exist, but does not affect any acts done by the minor before the termination or revocation of the permission.

Section 28. Juristic Rights can be taken away if found incompetent or mentally unsound.

A person of unsound mind may be adjudged incompetent by the Court on the application of any spouse, ascendants, descendants, guardian or curator, a person taking care of the person or the Public Prosecutor.

The person adjudged incompetent under paragraph one must be placed under guardianship. The appointment of guardian, power and duties of guardian, and termination of guardianship shall be in accordance with provisions of Book V of this Code.

The order of the Court under this Section shall be published in the Government Gazette.

Section 29. Juristic Acts by a legally incompetent person is voidable.

Section 30. If the other party knows the person is incompetent, the juristic act is voidable.

An act done by a person of unsound mind but not adjudged incompetent is voidable only when the act was done at a time he was actually of unsound mind, and the other party had knowledge of such unsoundness.

Section 31. Adjudged incompetence can be revoked by a Court.

If the cause of the incompetence ceases to exist, the Court shall, on the application of the person himself or of any of the persons mentioned in Section 28, revoke the adjudication.

The order of the Court revoking the adjudication under the Section shall be published in the Government Gazette.

Section 32. A person who is incapable of managing his own affairs can be adjudged quasi incompetent.

A person who has physical or mental infirmity, habitual prodigality (wastefulness) or habitual intoxication or other similar causes that make him incapable of managing his own affairs, or whose management is likely to cause detriment to his own property or family, may be adjudged as quasi incompetent by the Court upon application by any of the persons specified in Section 28.

The person adjudged quasi-incompetent under paragraph one must be placed under curatorship.

The appointment of curator shall be in accordance with the provisions of Book V of the Code.

The order of the Court under the Section shall be published in the Government Gazette.

Section 33. Changing the designation of an incompetent or quasi-incompetent person if it is better suited.

If it is found by the Court in trial of the case for a person to be adjudged incompetent on account of unsound mind that he is not a person of unsound mind but has mental infirmity, he may, if is deemed suitable by the Court or upon the application of the party or the persons specified in Section 28, be adjudged as quasi-incompetent. The same shall apply if it is found by the Court in trial of the case for a person to be adjudged quasi-incompetent on account of mental infirmity that he is a person of unsound mind, he may, if it is deemed suitable by the Court or upon the application of the party or the person specified in Section 28, be adjudged as incompetent.

Section 34. A quasi incompetent person must obtain the consent of his curator for doing the following juristic acts:

  1. Investing his property.
  2. Accepting the return of the invested property, principal or other capital.
  3. Contracting a loan or lending money, borrowing or leasing value movable.
  4. Giving security by any means whatever that affects him to make a forced payment.
  5. Hiring or letting property longer than six months if the property is movable or three years if the property is immovable.
  6. Making a gift, except the gift made suitable for situation in his life, for philanthropy, social or moral obligations.
  7. Accepting a gift encumbered with a charge or refusing a gift.
  8. Doing any act whose object is the acquiring of, or parting with, a right in an immovable or a valuable movable.
  9. Constructing, modifying building or other structures, or making extensive repairs.
  10. Entering an action in Court or doing any legal proceedings except the application made under Section 35 and the application for removal of his curator.
  11. Making a compromise or submitting a dispute to arbitration

The curator can ask the court to add additional items to the list if it is detrimental to the quasi-incompetent persons’ property or family.

For acts other than those mentioned in paragraph one, the conduct of which by a quasi-incompetent may be detriment to his own property or family, the Court is empowered, in giving and order effecting any person to be quasi-incompetent or upon the application made subsequently by the curator, to instruct the quasi-incompetent to obtain consent of the curator prior to conduct of such acts.

The Court may allow the curator to act on behalf of a quasi-incompetent person. If the quasi-incompetent cannot do any act as mentioned in paragraph one or paragraph two by himself because of his physical or mental infirmity, the Court may give an order empowering the curator to act on behalf of the quasi incompetent, and the provisions relating to guardian shall apply necessary changes.

The order of the Court under this Section shall be published in the Government Gazette. Any act contrary to the provisions of this Section is voidable.

Section 35. A quasi-incompetent person can petition the court to act without consent of curator.

If the curator does not give consent to the quasi-incompetent for doing any acts under Section 34 with unreasonable ground, the Court may, upon the application of the quasi-incompetent, permit him to do the act without having to obtain consent of his curator, should the act will be beneficial to the quasi-incompetent.

Section 36. Court can make changes to the order as circumstances change.

If the cause for the Court adjustment of the quasi-incompetent ceases to exist, the provisions of Section 33 shall apply necessary changes.

(top)

 

Domicile

Section 37. Domicile is the permanent home.

The domicile of a natural person is the place where he has his principal residence.

Section 38. Domicile can be chosen among different residences if none is principal.

If a natural person has several residences where he lives alternately, or various centers of habitual occupation, either one shall be considered his domicile.

Section 39. If the domicile is not known, the place of residence is deemed to be his domicile.

Section 40. If person is homeless, the domicile is where the person is located.

The domicile of a natural person who has no habitual residence, or employs his life in voyages without a central place of business shall be held to be the place where is found.

Section 41. Changing Domiciles

The domicile is changed by transferring the residences with manifest intention of changing.

Section 42. A person can choose a special domicile for a specific action.

If a person selects any place with manifest intention of making it a special domicile for any act, which is deemed to be the domicile in respect to such act.

Section 43. Domicile for Married Couple

The domicile of husband and wife is the place where husband and wife cohabit as a couple unless either husband or wife expresses his/her intention to have a separate domicile.

Section 44. Domicile of a Minor

The domicile of a minor is that of his legal representative who is the person exercising parental power or the guardian. In the case where the minor is under parental power of his parents and the parents have separate domiciles, the minor shall have domicile of his father or mother with whom he lives.

Section 45. Domicile of an Incompetent Person

The domicile of an incompetent person is that of his guardian.

Section 46. Domicile of a Public Official

The domicile of a public official is the place where he exercises his function, provided that such function is not temporary, periodical or mere commission.

Section 47. Domicile of a Prisoner

The domicile of a convict by a final judgment of the court or by a lawful order is the prison or correctional institution where he is imprisoned until his release.

Disappearance

Section 48. Court Appointed Representatives if Party Disappears

If a person has left his domicile or residence without having appointed an agent with general authority and it is uncertain whether he is living or death, the Court may, on the application of any interested person or of the Public Prosecutor, order such provisional measures to be taken as may be necessary for the management of property of such person.

The Court may appoint a manager of the property after one year has elapsed from the day when he has left his domicile or residence if no news of him has ever been received, or from the day when he has last been seen or heard of.

Section 49. Changing Court Appointed Representatives

If an agent with general authority has been appointed by the absent person but his authority comes to an end, or it appears that his management is likely to cause injury to the absent person, the provisions of Section 48 shall make required changes to the authority.

Section 50. Court Ordered Inventory

The court may, on the application of any interested person or of the public prosecutor, order an inventory of the property to be made by the agent with general authority, in compliance with an injunction to be given by the court.

Section 51. Expanding Agent’s Authority with Court’s Permission

Subject to the provisions of Section 802, if it is necessary for the agent with general authority to do any act beyond the scope of his authority, he must apply for court’s permission and may do so on obtaining such permission.

Section 52. Inventory Required within Three Months

The manager who is appointed by the court must finish making the inventory of the property of the absent person within three months as from the day on which the appointment order of the court comes to his knowledge.

However, the manager may apply to the court for the extension of the time.

Section 53. Inventory must be signed and witnessed

The inventory under Section 50 and Section 52 must be made in the presence of, and signed by two witnesses. Such two witnesses must be a spouse or a relative being of age of the absent person. If neither spouse nor relatives is found, or the spouses and relative refuse to be witnesses, other persons being of age may act as witnesses.

Section 54. Expanding Scope of Authority with Court’s Permission

The manager has such power of an agent with general authority as provided in Section 801 and Section 802. If the manager deems it necessary to do any acts beyond the scope of his authority, he must apply for the court’s permission and may do so on obtaining such permission.

Section 55. Special Agent has greater powers than Manager

If the absent person has appointed an agent with special authority, the manager cannot interfere with such special agency, but he can apply to the court for an order removing the agent if it appears that his management is likely to cause injury to the absent person.

Section 56. Special Agent’s Powers

The court may, on the application of any interested person or of the public prosecutor or of its own motion;

  1. Require the manager to give proper management security and return of the property entrusted to him.
  2. Require him to give information as to the property condition of the absent person.
  3. Remove him and appoint another manager in his stead.

Section 57. Payment for Property Manager

The court may, in the order appointing the property manager, determine a remuneration to be paid to the manager out of the property of the absent person; in default of which the manager may afterwards applies to the court for determining such remuneration.

The court may, on the application of the manager or of an interested person or the public prosecutor, or of its own motion when it appears that circumstances on the property management have changed, give an order effecting the determination, suspension, decrease or increase of the remuneration, or a new remuneration payment to be made to the manager.

Section 58. End of Manager’s Authority

The authority of the manager comes to an end upon:

  1. The return of the absent person.
  2. No return of the absent person but the property having been managed or an agent for managing his property having been appointed.
  3. The death of the absent person or adjudication of disappearance having been given.
  4. The resignation or the death of the manager.
  5. The manager becoming an incompetent or quasi-incompetent person.
  6. The manager becoming bankrupt.
  7. Removal of the manager by the court.

Section 59. Notice Requirements of Manager

When the authority of the manager comes to an end under Section 58 (4) (5) or (6), the manager or his heir, administrator, guardian, curator, official receiver of the person charged with the duty to take care of the property manager, as the case may be, must inform the court without delay of such ending for the court will give an order concerning the property manager as it deems proper.

During such period of time, the said person must take all reasonable steps compatible with circumstances to protect the interest of the absent person until the property of the absent person is delivered to any person as to be ordered by the court.

Section 60. The provisions concerning Agency of this Code shall be applied to the property management of the absent person mutatis mutandis.

Section 61. Designations of Disappearance

If a person has left his domicile or residence and it has been uncertain for five years whether he is living or dead, the court may, on the application of any interested person or of the public prosecutor, adjudge that such person has disappeared. After five years, if a person is unknown whether he is living or dead, the court may rule that the person has disappeared.

The period of time under paragraph one shall be reduced to two years;

  1. As from the day when the battle or war comes to an end and the person who had been engaged in such battle or war has been disappeared therein;
  2. As from the day when the vehicle on which the person had been traveling was lost or destroyed;
  3. As from the day when any peril of his life other than those mentioned in (1) or (2) has passed and the person had been in such peril.

Section 62. Presumption of Death

A person against whom an adjudication of disappearance has been made is deemed to have died at the completion of the period specified in Section 61.

Section 63. Revocation of Death Order

If it is proved by the person adjudged disappearance, any interested person or of the public prosecutor that the person who disappeared is living, or that he died at a time different from that specified in Section 62, the court must, upon the application of the said person, revoke the adjudication; but this does not affect the validity of acts done in good faith between the adjudication and the revocation.

Section 64. Notice

The adjudication of disappearance and its revocation shall be published in the Government Gazette.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

TITLE II
PERSONS
CHAPTER II
JURISTIC PERSONS

General Provisions

Section 65. Law Created Person

A juristic person can come into existence only by virtue of this Code or of other law.

Section 66. Juristic Person’s Rights and Duties

A juristic person has rights and duties conformity with the provisions of this Code or of other law within the scope of its power and duties, or its object as provided by or defined in the law, regulation or constitutive act.

Section 67. Juristic Person has the same rights and duties as a natural person.

Subject to Section 66, a juristic person enjoys the same rights and is subject to the same duties as a natural person, by reason of their nature, may only be enjoyed or incurred only by a natural person.

Section 68. Domicile of Juristic Person

The domicile of a juristic person is the place where it has its principal office or establishment, or which has been selected as a special domicile in its regulation or constitutive.

Section 69. Branch of Juristic Person can be a Domicile

In the case where a juristic person has several establishments or has its branch office, the place of its branch office may also be considered its domicile as to acts there performed.

Section 70. Company Directors

A juristic person must have one or several representatives as prescribed by the law, regulations or its constitutive act, decisions as to the affairs of juristic persons are made by a majority of the representatives.

Section 71. If no Directors, then decisions made by voting shares.

In the case where a juristic person has several representatives, if it is not otherwise provided by the law, or defined in regulations or constitutive act, decisions as to the affairs of juristic person are made by a majority of representatives.

Section 72. Changes in Directors or Shareholders cannot impede the Rights of Third Parties

The change of representatives of juristic person or of any restriction, or modification of the power of representatives shall be effective after having complied with the law, regulations or its constitutive act, but cannot be set up against third person acting in good faith.

Section 73. Temporary Replacement Representative if there is a Vacancy

If a vacancy occurs among the representatives of juristic person, and there is reason to believe that damage might ensue from delay, the Court may, on the application of any interested person or of the Public Prosecutor, appoint a temporary representative.

Section 74. Representative must represent the interest of the Juristic Person

In a matter in which the interested of a juristic person conflict with those of the representative of juristic person, the latter has no representative power.

Section 75. Appointment of Special Representatives

If, in the case under Section 74, it causes a non-existence of the representatives of juristic person, or number of the remaining representatives cannot constitute quorum of the meeting or is sufficient to execute such matter, if it is not otherwise provided by the law, or defined in its regulations or constitutive act, the provisions of Section 73 shall apply to the appointment of special representatives, ‘mutatis mutandis’.

Section 76. Juristic Person responsible for actions of its Representatives

A juristic person is bound to make compensation for any damage done to other persons by its representatives or the person empowered to act on behalf of the juristic person in the exercise of their functions, saving its right of recourse against the causers of the damage.

If damage is done to other persons by an act which is not within the scope of the object or power and duties of the juristic person, all the persons as mentioned in paragraph one who agreed such act or executed it, are jointly liable to make compensation.

Section 77. Application of Agency

The provisions on Agency of this Code shall apply to the relationship between the juristic persons and its representatives, and between the juristic person or its representative and third persons, ‘mutatis mutandis’.

(top)

Association

Section 78. Associations

An association created for conducting any activity which, according to its nature, is to be done continuously and collectively by persons other than that of sharing profits or incomes earned, must have its regulations and must be registered according to the provisions of this Code.

Section 79. Association Requirements

The regulations must at least have the following particulars:

  1. The name of the association.
  2. Its object.
  3. Address of its principal office and all its branches.
  4. Rules for admission of its members and conclusion of membership.
  5. Rates and member-fee.
  6. Rules for the Committee of association, i.e. number of the directors, appointment of the directors, term of office of the directors, retirement of office of the directors and meetings of the Committee.
  7. Rules for the management of the association, the keeping of accounts and the property of the association.
  8. The association must have the word ‘association’ incorporated with its name.

Section 81. Registration of an Association

The application for registration of an association must be filed jointly in writing by at least three of the would-be members of the association with the Registrar of the area where the principal office of the association is situated, and regulations of the association, list of names, addresses and occupations of at least ten would-be members of the association are to be attached to the application.

Section 82. Application Process

When the application for registration together with the regulations are received by the Registrar and the application is found correct under Section 81 and the regulations are correct under Section 79, the object of the association is not contrary to the law or good moral or endangering public order or national security and all particulars contained in the application or in the regulations conform the object of the association, or the would-be directors of the association have status or conduct suitable for implementing the object of the association, the Registrar shall make registration and issue a certificate of registration to the association. The registration shall be published in the Government Gazette.

It is found that the application or the regulations are not in conformity with Section 81 or Section 79, the particulars contained in the application or in the regulations do not conform to the object of the association, or would-be directors of the association do not have the status and conduct suitable for implementing the object of the association, the Registrar shall instruct the applicant to make correction or alteration, and shall, after the correction or alteration having been made, make registration and issue a certificate of registration to the association.

If it is considered by the Registrar that the registration cannot be made because the object of the association is contrary to the law or good moral or likely to endanger public order or national security, or the applicant fails to make correction or alteration as such within thirty days from the day of which the instruction of the Registrar came to his knowledge, the Registrar shall give and order refusing the registration and inform the applicant without delay of reasons for such refusal.

The applicant is entitled to appeal in writing against the order of refusal for registration to the Minister of Interior through the Registrar within thirty days from the date of receipt of the refusal order.

The Minister of Interior shall decide the appeal and inform the appellant of the decision within thirty days from the date of receipt of the written appeal by the Registrar. The decision of the Minister of Interior shall be final.

Section 83. Juristic Person

The association is registered is a juristic person.

Section 84. Changes to Association Regulations can only be made in a General Meeting

No alterations of and additions to the regulations of an association may be made, except by a resolution of the general meeting. Such alterations and additions must be deposited for registration at the Registrar Office where the principal office of the association is situated within fourteen days from the date of the resolution, and the provisions of Section 82 shall apply, mutatis mutandis. It shall become effective after the registration thereof by the Registrar.

Section 85. Regulations control the Appointment of Directors

The appointment of new directors of the association of the alteration thereof shall be made in accordance with the regulations of the association and must be registered by the Registrar at the Registrar Office where the principal office of the association is situated within thirty days from the date of such appointment or alteration of the directors of the association.

If it is considered by the Registrar that any of the directors under paragraph one does not have status or conduct suitable for implementing the object of the association, the Registrar may refuse the registration of that director of the association. In case of refusal, the Registrar shall notify the association of reason for such refusal within sixty days from the date of application, and the provisions of Section 82 paragraph four and paragraph five shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

If the registration of new directors of the association has not yet been made, the old directors of the association shall further perform the functions of the directors of the association until the registration of the new directors of the association is made, unless otherwise provided in the regulations of the association.

Section 86. Association Directors

The directors of the association is to carry on the activities of the association under the law and the regulations of the association, and under supervision of the general meetings.

Section 87. Association Committee

An association is represented in its relations with third persons by its committee.

Section 88. Committee Actions

All activities performed by the Committee of the association are valid even though it appears afterwards that there is any fault concerning the appointment or qualification of the directors of the association.

Section 89. Association Member Rights

A member of an association is entitled during working hours of the association inspect the business and property of the association.

Section 90. Association Members Subscription

A member of the association has to pay total subscription on the day when he applies for being member or at the beginning of the period for payment of subscription, unless otherwise provided in the regulations.

Section 91. Withdrawing from Association

A member of the association is entitled to withdraw at any time from the association, unless otherwise provided in the regulations.

Section 92. Debt Liability of Member

Each Member of Association is Liable to the Debt up to the Amount of Subscription.

Each member of an association is liable to the debt of the association for not more than the amount of the subscription due by him.

Section 93. General Meeting Requirements

A general meeting shall be called by the directors of the association at least once a year.

Section 94. Extraordinary Meetings

The Committee of the association may summon extraordinary meetings as they think fit.

A requisition for summoning an extraordinary meeting may be made in writing by members of not less than one-fifth of the whole members of the association, or of not less than one hundred, or of not less than the number set forth in the regulations to the Committee of the association. The requisition must specify the object for which the meeting is required to be summoned.

When the Committee of the association has received the requisition for the summoning of an extraordinary meeting under paragraph two, they shall summon such meeting within thirty days from the date of receipt of the requisition.

If the meeting is not summoned within the period of time under paragraph three, the members who have made the requisition for summoning such extraordinary meeting or other members of not less that the number set forth in paragraph to may summon the meeting by themselves.

Section 95. Notice Requirements for General Meeting

In summoning a general meeting, a notice for the meeting shall be sent not later than seven days before the date fixed for the meeting to every member whose name appears in the register of the association, or may be published at least twice in a prevailing local paper, not less than seven days before the date of the meeting.

The notice must specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting as well as its agenda, and closely relevant details and documents shall also be sent. As for a summoning of the extraordinary meeting through a publication, the said details and documents must be provided and ready for distributing to the member who request therefore at the place fixed by the person summoning such meeting.

Section 96. Quorum

In a general meeting of the association, members present at the meeting of not less than one-half of the total number of members shall constitute a quorum, unless provisions on a quorum of the meeting in the regulations of the association are otherwise provided.

If the quorum so provided is not present, the general meeting, if summoned upon requisition of members, shall be dissolved. But if the general meeting had not been summoned upon the requisition of members, another general meeting shall be summoned by the Committee within fourteen days from the date of the first summoned meeting and at such later meeting no quorum shall be necessary.

Section 97. Decisions made by Majority

Decision of the meeting shall be by majority of votes, except in the case where a particular majority of votes is specially provided in the regulations of the association.

Each member shall have one vote. In case of an equally of votes, the chairman of the meeting shall have an additional vote as casting vote.

Section 98. Voting by Proxy

Any member may vote by proxy, unless otherwise provided in the regulations of the association.

Section 99. Conflict of Interest – Cannot Vote

Any director or any member of an association who has in a resolution an interest in conflict with an interest of the association cannot vote in such resolution.

Section 100. Court Ordered Cancellation of Resolution

In any general meeting has been summoned or held or a resolution passed contrary to the regulations of the association or the provisions of this Title, any such member or the public Prosecutor may apply to the Court for cancellation of the resolution of such general meeting, provided that the application is entered within one month after the date of the resolution.

Section 101. Dissolving an Association

An association is dissolve:

  1. In the cases provided in its regulations, or
  2. If formed for a definite period of time, by the expiration of such period, or
  3. If formed for any undertaking, by the termination of such undertaking, or
  4. By a resolution to dissolve passed in a general meeting, or
  5. By the association becoming bankrupt, or
  6. By having its name struck of the register by the Registrar under Section 102, or
  7. By an order of the Court under Section 104.

Section 102. Power to Close Association

 

The Registrar shall have the power to give an order to have the name of an association struck off the register in the following cases:

  1. If appears after registration that the object of the association is contrary to the law or public moral or is likely to endanger the public peace or national security and an order for alteration of such object has been given by the Registrar, but the association fails to comply therewith within period of time fixed by the Registrar.
  2. If appears that any activity conducted by the association is contrary to the law or public moral or is likely to endanger the public peace or national security.
  3. The association has stopped doing business for more than two consecutive years.
  4. It appears that the association allows or let other persons who are not members of the association to execute business of the association.
  5. The number of members of the association has been less than ten for more than two consecutive years.

Section 103. Notice of Dissolution of Association

After the name of any association has been struck off the register by the order of the Registrar under Section 102, the Registrar shall send to order together with its reason to the association without delay, and shall publish such dissolution in the Government Gazette.

Any director or member of the association of not less than three in number are entitled to appeal against the order of the Registrar given under paragraph one to the Minister of Interior. The appeal must be in writing and sent to the Registrar within thirty days from the date of being informed of the order, and provisions of Section 82 paragraph five shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

Section 104. Request to Dissolve Association

When a case under Section 102 happens, an interested person may request the Registrar to have the name of the association struck off the register. If the Registrar fails to comply with the request and does not inform the person who made the request of the reasons within a reasonable period of time, or the reason given by the Registrar are not satisfied by the person having made the request, he may apply to the Court for dissolution of the association.

Section 105. Procedures after Dissolution

When an association is to be dissolved under Section 101 (1) (2) (3) or (4), the Committee of the association that holds the office at the time of dissolution of the association shall inform the Registrar of the dissolution within fourteen days from the date of such dissolution.

In case where an association is declared bankrupt by a final judgment or order of the Court under Section 101 (5), or is dissolved by a final order under Section 104, the Court shall notify the Registrar of the said judgment or order.

The Registrar shall publish such dissolution in the Government Gazette.

Section 106. Liquidation of Association

Upon dissolution of an association, the liquidation of the association shall be made, and the provisions in Book III, Title 22 on Liquidation of Registered Partnerships, Limited Partnerships and Limited Companies shall apply to the liquidation of the association, mutatis mutandis.

Section 107. Distribution of Remaining Assets

After liquidation, the remaining assets, if any, cannot be distributed among the members of the association. They shall be transferred to such other association or foundation, or any juristic person whose object is of charity purposes as may be designated in the regulations, by the resolution of the association in general meeting. If no transferee of the said assets has been designated, by the regulations or by the resolution of association in general meeting, or if designated but it is unable to comply therewith, the remaining assets shall belong to the State.

Section 108. Right to Inspect Documents

Any person may, on application to the Registrar, inspect the documents relating to an association kept by the Registrar or request for certified copies of the said documents to be delivered to him by the Registrar, and Registrar, and the Registrar shall comply therewith after payment of such fee as may be prescribed by the Ministerial Regulations has been made.

Section 109. Registration Regulations

The Minister of Interior shall take charge and control of the execution of the provisions of this Part and have the power to appoint the Registrar and to issue Ministerial Regulations on:

  1. The application for registration and the making of registration.
  2. Fees for the registered, the inspection of documents and the copying of documents as well as the fee for any activities concerning the foundation to be performed by the Registrar, including the exemption of the said fees.
  3. The conduct of business of the association and its register.
  4. Any other matters for carrying out the provisions of this Title.

Such Ministerial Regulations shall become effective upon their publication in the Government Gazette.

(top)

Foundations

Section 110. Foundations – Non Profit

A foundation consists of property specially appropriated to public charity, religious, art, scientific, education or other purpose for the public benefit and not for sharing profit, and has been registered under the provisions of this Code.

The property of a foundation must be managed for implementing the objects of that foundation, and not for seeking interest for any person.

Section 111. Regulation and Committee

A foundation must have its regulations and must have a Committee, consisting of at least three persons, to conduct business of the foundation according to the law and regulations of the foundation.

Section 112. Regulation Requirements

The regulations must have at least the following particulars:

  1. The name of the association
  2. Its objects
  3. Addresses of its principal office and all its branch offices.
  4. Its property at the time of creation.
  5. Rules for the Committee of the foundation, i.e. number of the directors, appointment of the directors, term of office of the directors, retirement of office of the directors ad meetings of the Committee.
  6. Rules for management of the foundation, the management of the property and keeping of accounts of the foundation.

Section 113. Must have “Foundation” in its name

The foundation must have a word ‘foundation’ incorporated with its name.

Section 114. Applications filed with Local Registrar

The application for registration of a foundation must be filed in writing with the registrar of the area where the principal office of the foundation is situated, and it must at least specify the owner of the property and the list of the property appropriated for the foundation together with the list of names, addresses and occupation of all the would-be directors of the foundation, including the regulations of the foundation.

Section 115. Review and Decision of Application by Registrar

When the application for registration together with the regulations are received by the registrar, and the application is found correct under Section 114 and under Section 112, the objects of the foundation are not contrary to the law or good moral or endangering public order or national security and all particulars contained in the application or in the regulations conform to the objects of the foundation, or the would-be directors of the foundation have status or conduct suitable for implementing the objects of the foundation, the registrar shall make registration and issue a certificate of registration to the foundation. The registration shall be published in the Government Gazette.

If it is found that the application or the regulations are not in conformity with Section 114 or Section 112, the particulars contained in the application or in the regulations do not conform to the object of the foundation, or the would-be directors of the foundation do not have status and conduct suitable for implementing the object of the foundation, the registrar shall instruct the applicant to make correction or alteration, and shall, after the correction or alteration having be made, make registration and issue a certificate of registration to the foundation.

If it is considered by the registrar that the registration cannot be made because the objects of the foundation are contrary or the law or good moral or likely to endanger public order or national security, or the applicant fails to make correction or alteration as such within thirty Thailand Civil and Commercial Code days counting from the day on which the instruction of the registrar came to his knowledge, the registrar shall give an order refusing the registration and inform the applicant without delay of reasons for such refusal. The applicant is entitled to appeal in writing against the order of refusal for registration to the Minister of Interior through the registrar within thirty days from the date of receipt of the refusal order.

The Minister of Interior shall decide the appeal and inform the appellant of the decision within thirty days from the date of receipt of the written appeal by the registrar. The decision of the Minister of Interior shall be final.

Section 116. Prior to the Final Decision, the Foundation application may be withdrawn

Before the registration of the foundation being made by the registrar, the applicant for creating a foundation is entitled to withdraw the application by submitting a written notice to the registrar. The right to withdraw the application does not devolve on the heirs. In the case where the application for establishment of the foundation is made by many persons, if it is withdrawn by any applicant, it shall become extinguished.

Section 117. Death of Applicant Prior to the Approval of Foundation

If the applicant for creating the foundation dies before the registration by the registrar, and the deceased does not make a will revoking the application for creation of such foundation, the application shall be effective and be proceeded on with the creation of such foundation by the heirs or administrator, or the person entrusted by the deceased. If the said person fails to proceed with the matter within one hundred and twenty days from the death of the applicant for creation of the foundation, any interested person or the public prosecutor may proceed with the matter in the capacity of the applicant.

If the foundation cannot be created in accordance with the objects set by the deceased and no testamentary disposition is provided otherwise, the provisions of Section 1679 paragraph two shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

If proceeding under Section 1679 paragraph two cannot be made or the foundation cannot be created under Section 115, the appropriated property shall be vested in the estate of the deceased.

Section 118. Foundation Requested in Will

If there is a testamentary disposition to create a foundation under Section 1676, the person charged with the duty to create the foundation under Section 1677 paragraph one shall precede with the matter under Section 114 and under provisions of this Section.

If the person charged with the duty to create the foundation under paragraph one fails to apply for registration to effect the creation of the foundation within one hundred and twenty days from the date that the testamentary disposition to create the foundation came to or should have come to knowledge of the said person, any interested person or the public prosecutor may apply for such registration.

If the applicant for registration of the foundation fails to make modifications or alterations in compliance with the instruction, any interested person or the public prosecutor may apply for such registration again.

If a protest is made to the registrar on the ground that the will does not provide for creating the foundation, the registrar shall notify the protestor to make a request to the court within sixty days counting from the date he has been notified by the registrar, and the registrar shall not consider the registration but wait for the judgment or order of the court and comply therewith. If the protester fails to make the request to the court within the time limit, the registrar shall further consider the registration of the foundation.

Section 119. Testamentary Foundation not meeting requirements

If the will that contains the testamentary disposition does not have such particulars as provided in Section 112 (1) (3) (5) or (6), the applicant under Section 118 can stipulate the said particulars. If any interested person makes a protest against the applicant, the registrar shall give an order as he thinks fit and notify the applicant and the protester of the order, he can file a protest with the court within sixty days counting from the date of receipt of the notification from the registrar. The registrar shall not consider the registration but wait for the judgment or order of the court and comply therewith. If no protest is filed within the time limit, the registrar shall consider the registration according to the order given.

Section 120. Conflicting Testamentary Foundations

If there are many applicants for registration of the foundation under the will of the same deceased person, and the applications contradict each other, the registrar shall summon the applicants for making an agreement. If the applicants do not show up or cannot come to an agreement within a period of time fixed by the registrar, the registrar shall give an order as he thinks fit, and the provisions of Section 119 shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

Section 121. Date of Vesting

After registration of the foundation, if the applicant for creating the foundation is still alive, the properly appropriated therefore shall vest in the foundation from the date of registration of the foundation by the registrar.

If the applicant for creating a foundation dies before the registration of the foundation by the registrar, the property appropriated therefore shall vest in the foundation from the death of the applicant after the registration.

Section 122. Juristic Person

The foundation so registered is a juristic person.

Section 123. Committee Representation

A foundation is represented in its relations with third persons by its committee.

Section 124. Committee Actions Valid

All activities performed by the committee of the foundation are valid even though it appears afterwards that there is any fault concerning the appointment or qualification of directors of the foundation.

Section 125. Appointment of New Directors

The appointment of new directors of the foundation or the alteration thereof shall made in accordance with the regulations of the foundation and must be registered within thirty days counting from the date of such appointment or alteration of the directors of the foundation.

If it is considered by the registrar that any of the directors under paragraph one does not have status or conduct suitable for implementing the objects of the foundation, the registrar may refuse the registration of the director.

In case of refusal, the registrar shall notify reasons of the foundation for such refusal within sixty days counting from the date of application, and the provisions of Section 115 paragraph four and paragraph five shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

In the case where the directors of the foundation vacate their office and no director is remaining or the remaining directors are unable to perform their function, the director who has vacated his office shall, if no regulations of the foundation provides, perform further the function of director until the foundation is notified by the registrar of the registration of the new director.

The director who has vacated his office on dismissing account by the order of the court under Section 129 cannot perform his function under paragraph three.

Section 126. Committee Can Amend Bylaws of Foundation

Subject to Section 127, the committee of the foundation is empowered to amend the regulations of the foundation.>

If the rules and manners for the amendment have been provided in the regulations of the foundations, the amendment must be made according to those provided in the regulations and it shall be deposited for registration at the registrar office within thirty days counting from the date of amendment by the committee of the foundation, and the provision of Section 115 shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

Section 127. Purpose of Amendments

The amendment of any particulars in the regulations of the foundation under Section 112 (2) can be made only for the following purposes:

  1. To make the implementation of the object of the foundation possible; or
  2. The change of circumstance makes the object of the foundation become less benefit or makes it unable to carry on the activities to fulfill the object of the foundation, and the object of the foundation so amended are close to the original objects.

Section 128. Registrar Right to Inspect Foundation

The registrar shall has the power to inspect, control and supervise the carrying on of activities of the foundation to be in conformity with the law and the regulations of the foundation. For this purpose, the registrar or any competent officials entrusted by the registrar in writing shall have power;

  1. To give and order in writing to a director, officer, employee or agent of the foundation for giving explanation and presenting facts concerning the business of the foundation, or to summon the said person for enquiry or to instruct him to send or produce accounting books and other documents of the foundation for inspection.
  2. To enter the office of the foundation between sunrise and sunset for inspecting the business of the foundation.

In performing the duty under paragraph one, the registrar shall produce his identity card while the entrusted competent officials have to produce to any concerned person their identity cards and a letter of power of the registrar.

Section 129. Dismissal of Director for Injury to Foundation

Any director who causes an injury to the foundation through his wrongful performance of activities or performs the activities contrary to the law or the regulations of the foundation, may application of the registrar, the public prosecutor or of any interested person, be dismissed from being director of the foundation by the court.

If the performance of activities under paragraph one is of the committee of the foundation or the objects of the foundation are not implement without reasonable causes by the committee, the court may, on application of the registrar, the public prosecutor or of any interested person, give an order dismissing the committee from the office.

In case of dismissal of any director or of the committee of the foundation by the court under paragraph one or paragraph two, the court may appoint order or a committee in place of a director or the committee of the foundation so dismissed and registrar shall make registration of the person who has been appointed as director of the foundation by the court.

Section 130. How to Dissolve the Foundation

A foundation is dissolved;

  1. Upon such cause as provided in the regulations, or If formed for definite period of time, by the expiration of such period, or
  2. If formed for any object, upon its object being fulfilled or becoming impossible, or
  3. Upon the foundation becoming bankrupt, or
  4. By an order of the court to dissolve the foundation under Section 131.

Section 131. Court Ordered Dissolution

On the application of the registrar, the public prosecutors or of any interested person, the court may order a foundation to be dissolved in the following cases;

  1. It appears that the objects of the foundation are contrary to the law.
  2. It appears that the foundation has done the business contrary to the law and good moral, or may endanger the public peace or national security.
  3. It appears that the foundation cannot proceed on its activities by any cause whatsoever or has stopped doing business for more than two years.

Section 132. Notice of Dissolution

When a case under Section 130 (1) (2) or (3) happens, the committee of the foundation that holds the office at the time of dissolution of the foundation shall notify the registrar of the dissolution within forty days counting from the date of its dissolution. If the court passes a final judgment or gives a final order to effect to foundation to become bankrupt under Section 130 (4), or gives a final order to dissolve the foundation under Section 131, the court shall also notify the registrar of the said judgment or order. The registrar shall publish the dissolution of the foundation in the Government Gazette.

Section 133. Liquidation

Upon dissolution of the foundation, the liquidation of the foundation shall be made, and the provisions in Book III, Title 22 on Liquidation of Registered Partnerships, Limited Partnerships and Limited Companies shall be applied to the liquidation of the foundation mutatis mutandis.

To this effect, the report on the liquidation shall be submitted to the registrar by the liquidator and it shall be approved by the registrar.

Section 134. Disbursement of Assets

After liquidation, the remaining assets shall be transferred to such foundation or juristic person whose object is in conformity with Section 110 as specified in the regulations, the public prosecutor, the liquidator or any interested person may apply to the court for appropriating the assets to other foundation or juristic person whose object is closely similar to that of such foundation.

If the foundation is dissolved by the order of the court under Section 131 (1) or (2) or the appropriation of the assets under paragraph one cannot be made, the assets of the foundation shall vest in the State.

Section 135. Accessing Foundation Documents

On the application to the registrar, any person may access to the documents relating to a foundation kept by the registrar or request for certified copies of the said documents and the registrar shall comply therewith after payment of such fee as prescribed by the Ministerial Regulations.

Section 136. Minister Right to Issue Regulations

The Minister of Interior shall take charge and control of the execution of the provisions of this Part and have the power to appoint the registrar and issue Ministerial Regulations on;

  1. The application for registration and the making of registration.
  2. Fees for the registered, the inspection of documents and the copying of documents as well as the fee for any activities concerning the foundation to be performed by the Registrar, including the exemption of the said fees.
  3. The conduct of business of the association and its register.
  4. Any other matters for carrying out the provisions of this Title.

Such Ministerial Regulations shall become effective upon their publication in the Government Gazette.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

TITLE III
THINGS

Section 137. Things

Things are physical objects.

Section 138. Property includes non-physical objects also

Property includes things as well as incorporeal objects, susceptible of having a value and of being appropriated.

Section 139. Immovable Property

Immovable property denotes land and things fixed permanently to land or forming a body therewith. It includes real rights connected with the land or things fixed to or forming a body with land.

Section 140. Movable Property

Movable property denotes things other than immovable property. It includes rights connected therewith.

Section 141. Divisible Property

Divisible things are those which can be separated into real and distinct portions, each forming a perfect whole.

Section 142. Indivisible Property

Indivisible things are those which cannot be separated without alteration in its substance as well as those which are considered indivisible by law.

Section 143. Private Property

Things outside of commerce are things incapable of appropriation, and those legally inalienable.

Section 144. Essential Components

A component part of a thing is that which, according to its nature or local custom, is essential to its existence and cannot be separated without destroying, damaging or altering its form or nature.

The owner of a thing has ownership in all its component parts.

Section 145. Trees

Trees when planted for an unlimited period of time are deemed to be component parts of the land on which they stand.

Trees which grow only for a limited period of time and crops which may be harvested one or more times a year are not component parts of the land.

Section 146. Buildings or Artificial Structures is not a part of the Land

Things temporarily fixed to land or to a building do not become component parts of the land or building. The same rule applies to a building or other structure which, in the exercise of a right over another person’s land, has been fixed to the land by the person who has such right.

Section 147. Accessories

Accessories are movable things, which are, according to the usual local conception or clear intention of the owner of the principal thing, attached to such thing permanently for its management, use or preservation, and, by connection, adjustment or otherwise, brought by the owner into the relation with the principal thing, in which it must serve the principal thing.

Even though an accessory is temporarily served from the principal thing, it does not cease to be an accessory. Saving special disposition to the contrary, the accessory follows the principal thing.

Section 148. Fruit

By fruit of a thing is a natural fruit and legal fruit. Natural fruit denotes that which is a natural offspring of and is obtained from a thing in the normal possession or in the use thereof; and it is capable of acquisition at the time when it is severed from the thing.

Legal fruit denotes a thing or other interest obtained periodically by the owner from another person for the use of the thing; it is calculated and may be acquired day by day or according to a period of time fixed.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

TITLE IV
JURISTIC ACTS

General Provisions

Section 149. Juristic Acts

Juristic act are voluntary lawful acts, the immediate purpose of which is to establish between persons relations, to create, modify, transfer, preserve or extinguish rights.

Section 150. Void Acts

An act is void if its object is expressly prohibited by law or is impossible, or is contrary to public order or good morals.

Section 151. Not Automatically Voidable if not against Public Order or Good Morals

An act is not void on account of its differing from a provision of any law if such law does not relate to public order or good moral.

Section 152. Wrong Form – Act Void

An act which is not in the form prescribed by law is void.

Section 153. Act by a Person without Capacity to Act

An act which does not comply with the requirements concerning capacity of person is voidable.

Declaration of Intention

Section 154. Hidden Intention

A declaration of intention is not void on the ground that the declarant in the recesses of his mind does not intended to be bound by his expressed intention, unless this hidden intention was known to the other party.

Section 155. Fictitious Intent cannot be used against Innocent Third Party

A declaration of intention made with the connivance (wrongdoing) of the other party which is fictitious is void; but its invalidity cannot be set up against third persons injured by the fictitious declaration of intention and acting in good faith.

If a declaration of fictitious intention under paragraph one is made to conceal another juristic act, the provisions of law relating to the concealed act shall apply.

Section 156. Intention based on Mistake

A declaration of intention is void if made under a mistake as to an essential element of the juristic act.

The mistake as to an essential element of the juristic act under paragraph one are for instance a mistake as to a character of the juristic act, a mistake as to a person to be a partner of the juristic act and a mistake as to a property being an object of the juristic act.

Section 157. Intent based on a Mistake on the Quality of a Person

A declaration of intention is voidable if made under a mistake as to a quality of the person.

Mistake under paragraph one must be a mistake as to the quality of the person which is considered as essential in the ordinary dealings, and without which such juristic act would have not been made.

Section 158. Mistake based on Gross Negligence

If the mistake under Section 156 or Section 157 was due to the gross negligence of the person making such declaration, he cannot avail himself of such invalidity.

Section 159. Intent Produced by Fraud

A declaration of intention produced by fraud is voidable.

An act under paragraph one is voidable on account of fraud only when it is such that without which such juristic act would not have been made.

When a party has made a declaration of intention owing to a fraud committed by a third person, the act is voidable only if the other party knew or ought to have known of the fraud.

Section 160. Avoiding Declaring Intention

The avoidance of a declaration of intention produced by fraud cannot be set up against a third person acting in good faith.

Section 161. Incidental Fraud

If the fraud is only incidental that is to say it has merely induced a party to accept more onerous terms than would otherwise have done, such party can only claim compensation for damage resulting from such fraud.

Section 162. Hiding Material Information

In bilateral juristic acts, the intentional silence of one of the parties in respect to a fact or quality of which the other party is ignorant, is deemed to be a fraud if it is proved that, without it, the act would not have been made.

Section 163. Both Parties Acted with Fraud

If both parties acted with fraud, neither of them can allege it to void the act or to claim compensation.

Section 164. Declaration Made Under Distress

Duress, in order to make an act voidable, must be imminent and so severe that makes him fear and without it, the act would not have been made.

Section 165. Threat of a use of a right is not duress

The threat of the normal exercise of a right is not considered duress. Any act made owning to reverential fear is not considered an act made under duress.

Section 166. Duress spoils a Juristic Act

Duress vitiates the juristic act, even when it is exercised by a third person.

Section 167. Determining the True Intent

In determining a case of mistake, fraud or duress, the sex, age, position health, temperament of the person made the intention and all other circumstances and environment which may relate to that act shall be taken into consideration.

Section 168. Declaration is Active when Received

A declaration of intention made to a person in his presence takes effect from the time when it becomes known to the receiver of the intention. This also apply to the declaration of intention made by one person to the other through telephone, other communication devices, or other means through which similar communication can be made.

Section 169. Declaration is active after it reaches the receiver, not previously or simultaneously

A declaration of intention made to a person not in his presence takes effect from the time when it reached the receiver of the intention. If does not become effective if a revocation reaches him previously or simultaneously.

Even though the person who made a declaration of intention dies, becomes incompetent or quasi-incompetent by an order of the Court after it has been sent, the validity of declaration is not impaired thereby.

Section 170. A Declaration of Intention made to a person without capacity is not legally binding

If the declaration of intention is made to a minor or a person adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent, it cannot be set up against him unless his legal representative, guardian or curator, as the case may be, has knowledge of it or has given prior consent to it.

The provisions of paragraph one do not apply to the declaration of intention concerning any matter that the minor or the incompetent is required by law to make by himself.

Section 171. True Intention is more important words

In the interpretation of a declaration of intention, the true intention is to be sought rather than the literal meaning of the words or expressions.

(top)

TITLE IV
JURISTIC ACTS

TITLE V
PERIODS OF TIME

Void and Voidable Acts

Section 172. Void Acts

A void act cannot be ratified, and its nullity may be alleged at any time by any interested person.

The return of a property arising from a void act shall be governed by the provisions on Undue Enrichment of the Code.

Section 173. If any part of an act is void, the whole act is void

If any part of an act is void the whole act is void, unless it may be assumed under the circumstances of the case that the parties intended the valid part of the act to be separable from the invalid part.

Section 174. A void act which that complies with another non-void act is not voidable

If a void act complies with the requirements of another act which is not void, it is valid as the other act, if it may be assumed that such validity would have been intended by the parties, had they known of the invalidity of the intended act.

Section 175. Voidable Acts can be Avoided

A voidable act may be avoided by:

  1. The legal representative or the minor after becoming sui juris, but the avoidance can be made by the minor before his becoming sui juris if a consent has been given by his legal representative, or
  2. The person adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent after he has recovered his capacity, or by the guardian or curator, as the case may be, but the avoidance can be made by the quasi-incompetent before recovery of his capacity if a consent thereto has been given by his curator, or
  3. The person who has made the declaration of intention owning to mistake, fraud or duress, or
  4. The person of unsound mind who did the voidable juristic act under Section 30 after he has recovered his capacity.

If the person who did the voidable juristic act dies before making the avoidance, it may be avoided by his heir.

Section 176. Voidable Acts which have been Voided

When a voidable act is voided, it is deemed to have been void from the beginning; and the parties shall be restored to the condition in which they were previously, and if it is not possible to so restore them, they be indemnified with an equivalent.

If any person knew or ought to have known that an act is voidable, he, after making the avoidance, is deemed to have known that the act is void since the voidable act became known or ought to become known to him.

The claim resulting from restoring them to the previous condition under paragraph one cannot be exercised later than one year from the date of avoidance of the voidable act.

Section 177. Ratified Voidable Acts are valid from the Beginning

If any person entitled to avoid a voidable act under Section 175 ratifies a voidable act, it is deemed to have been valid from the beginning; but the right of third persons cannot be affected thereby.

Section 178. Declaration of Intention to Ratify a Voidable Act

The avoidance of/or ratification to a voidable act could be made by a declaration of intention made to the other party who is a determinate person.

Section 179. Ratified Voidable Acts are no longer Voidable

A ratification is valid only if it is made after the state of facts forming the ground of voidability has ceased to exist.

When a person adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent or a person of unsound mind who did a voidable juristic act under Section 30 acquires knowledge of such act after he has recovered his capacity, he can ratify it only after acquiring knowledge.

The heir of the person having done the voidable juristic act can ratify such act after the death of such person unless the right to avoid the voidable juristic act of the deceased has extinguished.

The provisions of paragraph one and paragraph two shall not apply to a ratification to the voidable juristic act made by the legal representative, guardian or curator.

Section 180. Ratification of Voidable Act

If after the time when ratification according to Section 179 could be made, any of the following facts takes place in regard to a voidable act by an act of the person entitled to avoid the voidable act under Section 175, it is deemed to be ratified, unless a reservation is expresses, such as:

  1. The obligation has been fully or partially performed.
  2. The performance of the obligation has been demanded.
  3. A novation (substitution of a new obligation for an old one) of the obligation has been effected.
  4. Security has given for the obligation.
  5. The whole or part of the right or liability has been transferred.
  6. Any other acts done which indicate the ratification.

Section 181. Statute of Limitations for Voidable Acts is 1 year

A voidable act cannot be voided later than one year from the time when ratification could have been made, or later than ten years since the act was done.

Conditions and Time

Section 182. Conditions

A clause which subordinates the effect or the end of the effect of a juristic act to a future and uncertain event, is considered a condition.

Section 183. Condition Precedent/Subsequent

A juristic act subject to a condition precedent takes effect when the condition is fulfilled.

A juristic act subject to a condition subsequent ceases to have effect when the condition in fulfilled.

If the parties to the act have declared an intention that the effect of the fulfillment of a condition shall relate back to a time before it was fulfilled, such intention is to govern.

Section 184. Must not impair benefits prior to fulfillment of condition

Any party to a juristic act subject to a condition must not, while the condition is pending, do anything by which the benefit which the other party might derive from the fulfillment of the condition impaired.

Section 185. Rights and Duties can be Transferred

The rights and duties which the parties have, while the condition is pending, may be disposed of, inherited, protected or secured according to law.

Section 186. Bad Faith Actions

If the fulfillment of a condition is prevented not in good faith by the party to whose disadvantage it would operate, the condition is deemed to have been fulfilled.

If the fulfillment of a condition is brought about in bad faith by the party to whose advantage it would operate, the condition is deemed not to have been fulfilled.

Section 187. Time for Action

When the condition is already fulfilled at the time of the juristic act, the latter is unconditionally valid, if the condition is precedent, and is void, if the condition is subsequent.

When it is already certain at the time of the juristic act that the condition cannot be fulfilled, the act is void, if the condition is precedent, and unconditional valid, if the condition is subsequent.

The parties still have rights and duties according to Section 184 and Section 185 so long as they do not know whether the condition is fulfilled under paragraph one or cannot be fulfilled under paragraph two.

Section 188. Void Acts if Contrary to Public Order or Good Morals

A juristic act is void if it is subject to an unlawful condition, or a condition contrary to public order or good morals.

Section 189. Impossibility

A juristic act upon a condition precedent which is impossible is void.

A juristic act upon a condition subsequent which is impossible is unconditionally valid.

Section 190. Ability to Choose is not a Condition

A juristic act upon a condition precedent which depends upon the will of the debtor is void

Section 191. Time for Commencement

If a time of commencement is annexed to a juristic act, its performance cannot demanded before such time arrives.

If a time of ending is annexed to a juristic act, its effect ceases when such time arrives.

Section 192. Presumption of Fix Time for Action

It is presumed that a time of commencement or ending is fixed for the benefit of the debtor, unless it appears from the tenor of the instrument or from the circumstances of the case that it was intended for the benefit of the creditor, or of both parties.

The benefit of such a time may be waived, but this will not affect any benefit which would accrue there from to the other party.

Section 193. Cannot Take Action

In the following cases the debtor cannot take advantage of a time of commencement or ending:

  1. If he has been ordered by the Court to place his assets under final custody and control according to the law on bankruptcy.
  2. If he has not given security when he was bound to give it.
  3. If he has destroyed or diminished any security given.
  4. If the debtor has produced as security a property of other person without the latter’s consent.

Periods of Time

Section 193/1. Computing Time

The manner of computing all periods of time is governed by the provisions of this Title, unless it is otherwise provided by law, by juridical order, by rules and regulations or by a juristic act.

Section 193/2. Day

A period of time is calculated by day. But if it is determined shorter than a day, it shall calculated as such.

Section 193/3. Less than a Day

If the period of time is determined shorter than a day, it begins to run at once.

When a period of time is determined days, weeks, months or years, the first day of the period is not included in the calculation, unless the period begins to run on that day from the time which is customary to commence business.

Section 193/4. A Business a Day is a Working Day

As far as the legal proceedings, official business or commercial and industrial business are concerned, a day means working hours determined by law, by a judicial order or by rules and regulations, or usual working hours of that business, as the case may be.

Section 193/5. The period determined in weeks, months or year are calculated according to the calendar.

If the period is not computed from the beginning of a week, month or year, it ends on the day preceding that day of the last week, month or year which corresponds to that on which it began. If a period measured in months or years there is no corresponding day in the last month, the last day of such month shall be the day of ending.

Section 193/6. Year then Month then Day

If a period of time is determined in months and days, or in months and a part of a month, a full month shall be first measured and then a number of days or a part of a month measured in days.

If a period of time is determined in a part of a year, the part of a year shall be first measured in months and a part of a month, if any, shall be measured in days.

In calculating a part of a month under paragraph one and paragraph two, thirty days is regarded one month.

Section 193/7. Extension begins on the last day of original period

If a period of time is extended and no beginning day of the extension is determined, the first day of the extension is the day following the last day of the original period.

Section 193/ 8. If the last day is a holiday, the period begins on the next working day.

If the last day of a period is a holiday according to an official notification or a custom on which no business is done, the period includes the next working day.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

TITLE VI
PRESCRIPTION

General Provisions

Section 193/9. Prescription – Statute of Limitations

A claim is barred by prescription if it has not been enforced within the period of time fixed by law.

Section 193/10. After Prescription Period Lapses, Debtor does not have to pay

After the lapse of the period of prescription for claims, the debtor is entitled to refuse performance.

Section 193/11. Prescription Periods Fixed

The periods for prescription fixed by law cannot be extended or reduced.

Section 193/12. Beginning of Prescription

Prescription begins and run from the moment when the claim can be enforced. If the claim is to a forbearance, prescription begins to run from the moment when the right is first infringed.

Section 193/13. Debt Prescription Begins when Notice Given

If the creditor may not demand performance until he has given notice to the debtor, prescription begins to run from the moment when notice can be first given. If the debtor is not bound to perform until a given period has elapsed since the notice, prescription begins to run from the expiration of this period.

Section 193/14. Interruption of Prescription

Prescription is interrupted if:

  1. The debtor has acknowledged the claim towards the creditor by written acknowledgement, by part payment, payment of interest, giving security, or by any unequivocal act which implies the acknowledgment of the claim.
  2. The creditor enters an action for the establishment of the claim or for requiring performance.
  3. The creditor applies for receiving a debt to arbitration.
  4. The creditor submits the dispute to arbitration.
  5. The creditor does any act which brings an effect equivalent to entering an action.

Section 193/15. When Prescription is Interrupted, New Prescription Starts

When prescription is interrupted, the period of time which has elapsed before interruption does not count for prescription.

A fresh period of prescription begins to run from the time when the interruption ceases.

Section 193/16. Acknowledgment of a Debt renews the Prescription Period

The creditor of an obligation for the payment of money periodically is entitled to require from the debtor, at any time before the completion of the period of prescription, a written acknowledgment of the obligation in order to obtain evidence of the interruption of prescription.

Section 193/17. Court Actions and Prescriptions

In the case where prescription is interrupted due to the case under Section 193/ 14 (2), if the Court has passed a final judgment to dismiss the action, or the action has terminated and has been disposed of on the ground of being withdrawn or abandoned, the prescription shall be deemed to have never been interrupted.

In the case where the Court refuses to accept, return or dismisses the action on the ground of want of jurisdiction, or the action is dismissed with the right to re-enter the action in Court and the period of prescription expired pending proceedings, or would have expired within sixty days from the date of final judgment or order, the creditor shall be entitled to enter an action in Court for establishing his claim or for requiring performance of the obligation within sixty days from the date of final judgment or order.

Section 193/18. Court Rulings Changes

The provisions of Section 193/17 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to interruption of prescription due to the case under Section 193/14 (3), (4) and (5).

Section 193/19. Force Majeure Extensions

If at any time when the prescription would end, the creditor is prevented by force majeure from effecting a interruption, the prescription is not completed until thirty days after the time when such force majeure has ceased to exist.

Section 193/20. Minors and Persons of Unsound Mind

If prescription of claim of a minor, or a person of unsound mind whether adjudged incompetent or not, would have expired while the said person does not acquire full capacity, or within one year from the day when the said person is without a legal representative or a guardian, if is not completed until the expiration of one year after he has acquired full capacity or has a legal representative or guardian, as the case may be. If the period of prescription of the claim is shorter than one year, the shorter period of time shall apply in place of the said period of one year.

Section 193/21. Prescription of Minors or Incapacitated Person against Legal Representative, guardian, or Curator

If prescription of claim of a minor, an incompetent or a quasi-incompetent against his legal representative, guardian or curator would have expired while the said person does not acquire full capacity, or within one year from the day when the said person is without legal representative, guardian or curator, if is not completed until the expiration of one year after he has acquired full capacity or has a legal representative, guardian or curator, as the case may be. If the period of prescription of the claim is shorter than one year, the shorter period of time shall apply in place of the said period of one year.

Section 193/22. Prescription between Spouses

If prescription of claims between spouses would have expired before within one year after dissolution of marriage, it is not completed until the expiration of one year after dissolution of marriage.

Section 193/23. Prescription for Deceased

If prescription of a claim existing in favor of or against a deceased would have expired within one year after the date of the death, the period of prescription is not completed until the expiration of one year after death.

Section 193/24. Waiver of Prescription cannot effect Third Party

The benefit of prescription can be waived only after it has been completed, but such waiver does not prejudice the right of third persons, or the surety.

Section 193/25. Completion of Prescription

When prescription is completed, its effect relates back to the day when it began to run.

Section 193/26. Accessory Acts of a the Principal Claim is also barred by Prescription Lapse

With the principal claim the claims for accessory acts of performance dependent upon it are also barred by prescription, even if the particular prescription applying to the accessory claim is not yet complete.

Section 193/27. Barring of Principal Claim does not prevent someone with a superior claim from exercising their rights

The barring of the principal claim by prescription does not prevent a mortgagee, a pledge, holder of a right of retention or a creditor who has preferential right on property of the debtor detained by him, to enforce his right out of the mortgaged, pledged or detained property. But in exercising the right the creditor cannot obtain more than five years for arrears of interest.

Section 193/28. Performance of the Claim ends the Prescription

If any act of performance is done in satisfaction of a claim barred by prescription, the value of such performance may not be demanded back, even if the performance has been effected in ignorance of the prescription.

The provisions of paragraph one shall apply to a contractual acknowledgment of liability in writing and to the giving of security by the debtor, but it cannot be referred against the former surety.

Section 193/29. Must use the lapse of a prescription in court to use it as a defense

When prescription has not been set up as a defense, the Court cannot dismiss the claim on the ground of prescription.

(top)

Period of Prescription

Section 193/30. 10 Years Default

The period of prescription for which no other period is provided by law is ten years.

Section 193/31. Taxes 10 Years

The period of prescription for claims of the Government for taxes and rates is ten years. As to other claims of the Government relating to obligations, the provisions of this title shall apply.

Section 193/32. Enforcement of Judgment 10 Years

The period of prescription for a claim established by a final judgment, or by a contract of compromise is ten years, even if the claim itself is subject to any period of prescription.

Section 193/33. 5 Year Prescriptions

The period of prescription is five years for the following claims:

  1. Arrears of interest
  2. Sums payable for the purpose of paying off the principal by installments.
  3. Arrears of rent or hire of property except the rent of movables under Section 193/34 (6).
  4. Arrears of salaries, annuities, pensions, allowances for maintenance and all other periodical payments.
  5. Claims under Section 193/34 (1) (2) and (5), so far as they are not subject to the period of two years.

Section 193/34. 2 Year Prescriptions

The period of prescription is two years for the following claims:

    1. Arrears of interest
    2. Sums payable for the purpose of paying off the principal by installments.
    3. Arrears of rent or hire of property except the rent of movables under Section 193/34 (6).
    4. Arrears of salaries, annuities, pensions, allowances for maintenance and all other periodical payments.
    5. Claims under Section 193/34 (1) (2) and (5), so far as they are not subject to the period of two years.

Section 193/34. 2 Year Prescriptions

The period of prescription is two years for the following claims:

      1. Claims of merchants, industrialists, manufactures, artisans and those who practice industrial arts, for delivery of goods, performance of work and care of others’ affairs, including disbursements, unless the service was rendered for the business of the debtor.
      2. Claims of those who engage to agriculture or forestry, for delivery of agricultural or forest products, so far as the delivery is for the domestic use of the debtor
      3. Claims of carriers for passengers or goods, or if messengers, for fare, freight, hire and fees, including disbursements.
      4. Claims of innkeepers or hostel keepers and those who make a business of providing food and drink, or those who make a business of rendering entertainment service according to the law on places of entertainment services, for supplying lodging and food or other services rendered to the guests, including disbursements.
      5. Claims of those who sell lottery tickets, racket or similar tickets for the sale of the tickets, unless the tickets are delivered for further sale.
      6. Claims of those who make a business of letting movables, for the rent.
      7. Claims of those who, without belonging to the classes specified in (1), make business of the care of others’ affairs or the rendering of service, for the remuneration due to them from the business, including disbursements.
      8. Claims of those who are in private service, for the wages, or other remuneration for services, including disbursements; also claims of the employers for advances made upon such claims.
      9. Claims of employees, whether they be permanent, temporary or day laborers, and apprentices, for the wages or other remuneration, including disbursements, or claims of the employers for advances made upon such claims.
      10. Claims o masters of apprentices, for the premium and other expenses agreed upon in the contract of apprenticeship and disbursements.
      11. Claims of owners of educational institutions or nursing home, for instruction fees and other fees, or medical fees other expenses, including disbursements.
      12. Claims of those who receive persons to be maintained or educated, for services including disbursements.
      13. Claims of those who receive animals to be maintained or trained, for services, including disbursements.
      14. Claims of teachers, for their fees.
      15. Claims of practitioners in medicine, dentist, nurses, midwives, veterinary surgeons or those who practice in other related fields of medicine, for their services, including disbursements.
      16. Claims of lawyers or those engaged in legal profession including expert witnesses for their services, including disbursements, or claims of the parties for advances made upon such claims.
      17. Claims of engineers, architects, auditors or those engaged in other independent professions, for services including disbursements, or claims of the employers for advances made upon such claims.

Section 193 /35. Debts – 2 Years from Notice

Subject to Section 193/27, prescription of claims arising from the acknowledgment of liabilities by the debtor in writing or in giving of security under Section 193/28 paragraph two is two year from the date of acknowledgment of liabilities or of giving of security.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER I

Subject of Obligations

Section 194. Obligations give rise to Claims

By virtue of an obligation the creditor is entitled to claim performance from the debtor. The performance may consist in a forbearance.

Section 195. Medium Quality Default

When the thing which forms the subject of an obligation is described only in kind, if its quality cannot be determined by the nature of the juristic act or the intention of the parties, the debtor must deliver a thing of medium quality.

If the debtor has done everything required on his part for the delivery of such thing, or if he on obtaining the consent of the creditor has designated a thing for delivery, such thing becomes from that time the subject of the obligation.

Section 196. Thai Currency Default

If a money debt is expressed in a foreign currency, payment may be made in Thai currency.

The commutation is made according to the rate of exchange current in the place of payment at the time of payment.

Section 197. Thai Currency if Currency is no longer available

If a money debt is payable in a specific kind of money which is no longer current at the time of payment, the payment shall be as if the kind of money were not specified.

Section 198. Debtor gets to choose if there are multiple options

If several acts of performance are due in such manner that only one of them is to be done, the right to elect belongs to the debtor unless otherwise stipulated.

Section 199. Election by Declaration

The election is made by a declaration of intention to the other party. The performance elected is deemed to be the only one due from the beginning.

Section 200. Non-election within election period

If the election is to be made within a period of time, and the party who has the right of election does not exercise it within such period, the right of election passes to the other party.

If no period of time was fixed, when the obligation becomes due, the party who has not the right of election can notify the other party to exercise his right of election within a reasonable time to be fixed in such notice.

Section 201. Third Party Election

If a third person is to make the election, it is done by a declaration of intention made to the debtor, who must inform the creditor.

If such third person cannot make the election or is unwilling to do so, the right of election passes to the debtor.

Section 202. Impossibility of Performance

If one of the acts of performance is impossible from the beginning, or if it subsequently becomes impossible, the obligation is limited to the other act of performance. This limitation does not arise if the performance becomes impossible in consequence of a circumstance for which the party not entitled to elect is responsible.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER II
EFFECT OF OBLIGATIONS

Part 1: Non-Performance

Section 203. Time for Performance

If a time for performance is neither fixed nor to be inferred from the circumstances, the creditor may demand the performance forthwith, and the debtor may perform his part forthwith.

If a time is fixed, it is to be presumed, in case of doubt, that the creditor may not demand the performance before that time; the debtor, however, may perform earlier.

Section 204. Default for Non-Performance

If the debtor does not perform after warning given by the creditor after maturity, he is in default through the warning.

If a time by calendar is fixed for the performance, the debtor is in default without warning if he does not perform at the fixed time. The same rule applies if a notice is required to precede the performance, and the time is fixed in such manner that it may be reckoned by the calendar from the time of notice.

Section 205. No Default if Debtor not responsible for Non-Performance

The debtor is not in default so long as the performance is not effected in consequence of a circumstance for which he is not responsible.

Section 206. Unlawful Acts

In obligations arising from an unlawful act, the debtor is in default from the time when he committed it.

Section 207. Refusal to Perform

A creditor is in default if, without legal ground, he does not accept the performance tendered to him.

Section 208. Effort to Tender Performance

The performance must be actually tendered to the creditor in the manner which it is to be effected.

But if the creditor has declared to the debtor that he will not accept performance, or if for effecting the performance an act of the creditor is necessary, it is sufficient for the debtor to give him notice that all preparations for performance have been made and that it is for him to accept it. In such cases the notice by the debtor is equivalent to a tender.

Section 209. Fixed Time for Performance

If a time certain is fixed for the act to be done by the creditor, tender is required only if the creditor does the act in due time.

Section 210. Counter-Performance by Creditor

If the debtor is bound to perform his part only upon counter performance by the creditor, the creditor is in default if, though prepared to accept the performance tendered, he does not offer the required counter-performance.

Section 211. If Debtor cannot perform after Counter-Performance

A creditor is not in default if the debtor is not in a position to effect the performance at the time of tender, or, in the case provided by Section 209, at the time fixed for the act of the creditor.

Section 212. Debtor’s Time to Perform

If the time of performance is not fixed, or if the debtor is entitled to perform before the fixed time, the creditor is not in default by reason of the fact that he is temporarily prevented from accepting the tendered performance, unless the debtor has given him notice of this intended performance a reasonable time beforehand.

Section 213. Court may order Debtor’s Performance unless impossible

If a debtor fails to perform his obligation, the creditor may make a demand to the Court for compulsory performance, except where the nature of the obligation does not permit it.

When the nature of an obligation does not permit of compulsory performance, if the subject of the obligation is the doing of an act, the creditor may apply to the court to have it done by a third person at the debtor’s expense; but if the subject of the obligation is doing of a juristic act, a judgment may be substituted for a declaration of intention by the debtor.

As to an obligation whose subject is the performance from an act, the creditor may demand the removal of what has been done at the expense of the debtor and have proper measures adopted for the future.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraphs do not affect the right to claim damages.

Section 214. Right to Debtor’s Property

Subject to the provisions of Section 733, the creditor is entitled to have his obligation performed out of the whole of the property of his debtor including any money and other property due to the debtor by third person.

Section 215. Creditor Claim’s for Compensation for Improper Performance

When the debtor does not perform the obligation in accordance with the true intent and purpose of the same, the creditor may claim compensation for any damages caused thereby.

Section 216. Creditor has a right to accept default and sue for compensation

If by a reason of default, the performance becomes useless to the creditor, he may refuse to accept it and claim compensation for non-performance.

Section 217. Debtor responsible for negligence and injury as result of default

A debtor is responsible for all negligence during his default. He is also responsible for impossibility of performance arising accidentally during the default, unless the injury would have arises even if he had performed in due time.

Section 218. Responsibility for Non-Performance

When the performance becomes impossible in consequence of a circumstance for which the debtor is responsible, the debtor shall compensate the creditor for any damage arising from the non-performance.

In case of partial impossibility the creditor may, by declining the still possible part of the performance, demand compensation for non-performance of the entire obligation, if the still possible part of performance is useless to him.

Section 219. Impossible Performance relieves obligation

The debtor is relieved from his obligation to perform if the performance becomes impossible in consequence of a circumstance, for which he is not responsible, occurring after the creation of the obligation.

If the debtor, after the creation of the obligation, becomes unable to perform, it is equivalent to a circumstance rendering the performance impossible.

Section 220. Debtor responsible for actions of his Agent

A debtor is responsible for the fault of his agent, and of person whom he employs in performing his obligation, to the same extent as for his own fault. In such case the provisions of Section 373 have no application.

Section 221. Interest Ceases upon Creditor’s Default

A money debt bearing interest ceases to bear interest during the default of the creditor.

Section 222. Claims for Damages

The claim of damages is for compensation for all such damage as usually arises from nonperformance.

The creditor may demand compensation even for such damage as has arisen from special circumstances, if the party concerned foresaw or ought to have foreseen such circumstances.

Section 223. Contributory Negligence

If any fault of the injured party has continued in causing the injury, the obligation to compensate the injured party and the extent of the compensation to be made depends upon the circumstances, especially upon how far the injury has been caused chiefly by the one or the other party.

This applies also even if the fault of the injured party consisted only in an omission to call the attention of the debtor to the danger of an unusually serious injury which the debtor neither knew not ought to have known, or in an omission to avert or mitigate the injury. The provisions of Section 220 apply mutatis mtandis.

Section 224. Interest During Default

A money dent bears interest during default seven and half percent per annum. If the creditor can demand higher interest on any other legitimate ground, this shall continue to be paid.

Interest for default shall not be paid upon interest.

Proof of further damage is admissible.

Section 225. Interest on Compensation based on Value of Lost Object

If the debtor is bound to make compensation for the value of an object which has perished during the default, or which cannot be delivered for a reason which has arisen during the default, the creditor may demand interest on the amount to be paid as compensation, from the time which serves as the basis for the estimate of the value. The same rule applies if the debtor is bound to make compensation for the diminution in value of an object which has deteriorated during the default.

(top)

Part 2: Subrogation

Section 226. Subrogation

A person is subrogated to the rights of a creditor is entitled to exercise in his own name all the rights which the creditor had in respect of the obligation including any security for it.

By real subrogation, a property is substituted for another property in the same juristic position as the previous one.

Section 227. Debtor turns into Creditor if original Creditor received compensation

When a creditor has received as compensation for damage the full value of the thing or right which is the subject of the obligation, the debtor is, by operation of law, subrogated into the position of the creditor with regard to such thing or right.

Section 228. Demand for a Substitute or Compensation

If, in consequence of the circumstance which makes the performance impossible, the debtor acquires a substitute or a claim for compensation for the object owed, the creditor may demand delivery of the substitute received or may claim for compensation by himself.

If the creditor has a claim for compensation on account of non-performance, the compensation to be made to him is diminished, if he exercises the right specified in the foregoing paragraph, by the value of the substitute received or of the claim for compensation.

Section 229. Subrogation Preference

Subrogation takes place by operation of law and ensues to the benefit of the following persons:

    1. The person who, being himself a creditor, pays another creditor who has priority to him owing to such other creditor having a preferential right, pledge or mortgage.
    2. When acquires an immovable property, the person who uses the purchase price in paying off the persons who have mortgages thereon.
    3. The person who, being bound with other or for others to pay a debt and was interested in paying the same, has paid it.

Section 230. Substitution of Court Ordered Possession

If the creditor levies compulsory execution upon an object belonging to the debtor, any person who through the execution incurs danger of losing a right in the object is entitled to satisfying the creditor. The same right belongs to the possessor of a thing if he incurs danger of losing possession through the execution.

If a third person satisfies the creditor he is subrogated of the claim of the latter. Such claim may not be enforced to the detriment of the creditor.

Section 231. Mortgaged Property

If properties mortgaged, pledged or otherwise subject to a preferential right, are insured, the mortgage, pledge or other preferential right extends to the claim against the insurer.

In case of immovable property, the insurer shall not pay the indemnity to the assured until he has given notice of his intention to do so to the mortgagee or other preferred creditor, and has not within one month from such notice received any objection to the payment, provided always that the insurer knew or ought to have known of the mortgage or other preferential right; however, any right registered in the Land Registry is deemed to be known to the insurer.

The same rule shall apply to mortgage of movables allowed by law. In case of movable property, the insurer may pay the indemnity to the assured directly, unless he knew or ought to have known of the pledge or other preferential right.

The insurer is not liable to the creditor if the insured property is restored or a substitute for it is provided.

The same rule shall be applied mutatis mutandis in case of expropriation as well as in case of indemnity due to the owner of the property for destruction or damage.

Section 232. Escrow of Debt

If under the foregoing section a sum of money is being substituted for the property destroyed or damaged, such sum shall in no case be delivered to the mortgage, pledge or other preferred creditor before the obligation secured is due, and if the parties cannot come to an agreement with the debtor, each of them is entitled to demand that the said sum be deposited at the Deposit Office their common benefit unless the debtor gives proper security.

(top)

Part 3: Exercising Debtor’s Claims

Section 233. Creditor Subrogation of Debtor’s Rights

If, to the prejudice of the creditor, the debtor refuses or neglects to exercise a claim the creditor may, in order to protect his obligation, exercise such claim in his own name of behalf of the debtor, except those which are purely personal to the debtor.

Section 234. Notification of Subrogation

The creditor who exercises a claim belonging to his debtor must summon the debtor to appear in the action.

Section 235. Debtor’s Debtor may satisfy the Creditor’s Claim Directly

A creditor may exercise a claim belonging to the debtor for the whole amount due to the debtor, without regard to the amount due to him. But the defendant may satisfy the creditor by paying the amount due to him alone, provided that if the original debtor has joined as a plaintiff he may proceed to judgment for the balance.

In any case the creditor cannot obtain more than what is due to him.

Section 236. Debtor’s Debtor may use defenses against the Creditor’s Claim

The defendant may set up against the creditor all defenses which he may have against the debtor, excepting those which arose after the entry of the action.

Part 4: Cancellation of fraudulent acts

Section 237. Creditor has a Right to Prevent the Cancellation of Debtor’s Claims

The creditor is entitled to claim cancellation by the Court of any juristic act done by the debtor with knowledge that it would prejudice his creditor; but this does not apply if the person enriched by such act did not know, at the time of the act, or the facts which could make it prejudicial to the creditor, provided, however, that in case of gratuitous act the knowledge on the part of the debtor alone is sufficient.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph do not apply to a juristic act whose subject is not a property right.

Section 238. Cancellation cannot prejudice the rights of third party

The cancellation under the foregoing section cannot affect the right of a third person acquired in good faith.

The foregoing paragraph does not apply if the right is acquired gratuitously.

Section 239. Cancellation is only allowed to favor creditors

Cancellation operates in favor of all the creditors.

Section 240. Statute of Limitations for Wrongful Cancellation is 1 Year

A claim for cancellation cannot be brought later than one year from the time when the creditor knew of the cause of cancellation, or later than ten years since the act was done.

(top)

Part 5: Right of Retention

Section 241. No Right to Retention until Obligation is due

If the possessor of a property belonging to another has an obligation in his favor relating to the property possessed, he may retain the property until the obligation is performed; but this does not apply, if the obligation is not yet due.

The provisions of the forgoing paragraph do not apply, if the possession begins by an unlawful act.

Section 242. Right of Retention must be Compatible with Obligation and Public Order

The right of retention does not exist if it is incompatible with the obligation assumed by the creditor, or with the instructions given by the debtor before or at the time of delivery of the property or if it is against public order.

Section 243. Debtor Insolvency

In case of insolvency of the debtor, the creditor has the right of retention even if his claim is not yet due. If the insolvency has occurred or become known to the creditor after the delivery of the property, he can exercise the right of retention even if an obligation previously assumed by him or the instruction given by the debtor, opposes it.

Section 244. Right of Retention until Obligation Performed

The holder of a right of retention may exercise his right against the whole of the property retained until the obligation is wholly performed.

Section 245. Rights of Retention include Right to take Fruits of Property

The holder of a right of retention may take the fruits of the property retained and appropriate them to the performance of the obligation in preference to other creditors.

Such fruits must first be appropriated to the interest on the obligation, and if there is any surplus must be appropriated to the principal.

Section 246. Holder of property must take care of retained property

The holder of a right of retention is bound to take such appropriate care of the property retained as might be expected from him in his situation.

The holder of a right of retention cannot use or let the property retained or give it as security, without the consent of the debtor; but this does not apply to such use as is necessary for the preservation of the property.

If the holder of a right of retention acts contrary to any provision of the foregoing paragraphs, the debtor may claim the extinction of the right.

Section 247. Holder may request reimbursement for retaining property

If the holder of a right of retention incurs necessary expenses in respect to the property retained he may require the owner to reimburse him.

Section 248. Retaining Property does not stop Statute of Limitations

Subject to the provisions of Section 193/27, the exercise f a right of retention does not prevent the running of prescription against the obligation.

Section 249. Debtor can substitute the right of retention with other security

The debtor may claim the extinction of the right of retention on giving proper security.

Section 250. Right to Retention is extinguished by the Loss of the Possession of Property

A right of retention is extinguished by the loss of possession of the property; but this does not apply to the case where the property retained is let or pledged with the consent of the debtor.

(top)

Part 6: Preferential Rights

Section 251. Preferential Rights

A holder of a preferential right has, according to the provisions of this Code or other laws, a right as to the property of his debtor to receive therefrom performance of an obligation due to him in preference to other creditors.

Section 252. The provisions of Section 244 apply correspondingly to preferential rights.

1. General Preferential Rights

Section 253. Creditor’s Rights

A person in whose favor an obligation exist based upon any of the following grounds has a preferential right in the whole property of the debtor:

  1. Expenses for the common benefit
  2. Funeral expenses
  3. Taxes and duties, and money to which an employee entitled for the service rendered to the debtor who is his employer.
  4. Supplies of daily necessaries.

Section 254. Common Benefit

The preferential right on account of expenses for the common benefit is for expenses incurred for the common benefit of all the creditors in regard to preservation, liquidation or distribution of the debtor’s property.

If any such expense was not incurred for the benefit of all the creditors, the preferential right only exist against those creditors for whose benefit it was incurred.

Section 255. Funeral Expenses

The preferential right on account of funeral expenses is for such funeral expenses as are accordant to the station in life of the debtor.

Section 256. Taxes

The preferential right on account of taxes and rates is for all land, property or other taxes or local rates due from the debtor for the current year and the preceding year.

Section 257. Employees

The preferential right on account of money, to which an employee is entitled for services rendered to the debtor who is his employer, is for basic pay, overtime pay, holiday pay, holiday overtime pay, severance pay, special severance pay, and other money to which the employee is entitled for services rendered to, for four months back not exceeding one hundred thousand baht for each employee.

Section 258. Necessities

The preferential right on account of supplies of the daily necessaries is for supplies for six months back of food, drink, light, firewood and charcoal, necessary for the living of the debtor, of members of his family, who live with him and whom he is bound to support, and of his servants.

2. Special Preferential Rights

(a) PREFERENTIAL RIGHTS IN MOVABLES

Section 259. Special Preferential Rights

A person in whose favor an obligation exists based upon any of the following grounds has a preferential right in particular movables of the debtor:

  1. Hiring of an immovable.
  2. Lodging in an inn.
  3. Carriage of passengers of goods.
  4. Preservation of movables.
  5. Sale of movables.
  6. Supply of seeds, young plants or manure.
  7. Agricultural or industrial services.

Section 260. Hiring of an Immovable

The preferential right on account of the hiring of an immovable is for the hire of the immovable and for other obligations of the hired arising from the relation of hiring, and is in the movables of the hirer which are in or on the immovable.

Section 261. Lodging

The preferential right of the letter of land is in such movables as have been brought by the hirer upon the land hired or into buildings subservient to the use of such land, in such movables as are destined for the use of such land and in such fruits of the land as are in the possession of the hirer.

The preferential right of the letter or a building is in such movables as have been brought into the building by the hirer.

Section 262. Transfer of Immovable Property

If a hirer of immovable property is transferred or sublet, the preferential right of the original letter extends to the movables brought by the transferee or sub-hirer into the property. The same applies to the money which the transferor or the sub-letter is to receive from the transferee or sub-hirer.

Section 263. Liquidation of Property

In case of a general liquidation of the property of the hirer, the preferential right of the letter is only for the rent and other obligations of the last preceding, the current and the next following rent period and for such damages as have arisen during the last preceding and the current rent period.

Section 264. Security Deposits are not covered

If the letter has received security money, he has a preferential right only with regard to that part of his claim which is not covered by the security money.

Section 265. Lodging

The preferential right on account of lodging in an inn is for what is due to the proprietor for lodging and other services afforded to the traveler or guest in satisfaction of his needs, including disbursements, and is in the luggage or other property of the traveler or guest which is in the inn, hotel or other such place.

Section 266. Same as Pledgee

The letter of an immovable property or the proprietor of an inn, hotel or other such place may enforce his preferential right in the same manner as a pledgee. The provisions of this Code concerning Enforcement of Pledge apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 267. Carriers

The preferential right on account of carriage is for charges for the carriage of a passenger or goods and for accessory expenses, and is in all goods and luggage in the hands of the carrier.

Section 268. Enforcement against 3rd Parties

The letter of an immovable, the proprietor of an inn, or the carrier may enforce his preferential right against movables belonging to a third person in the case contemplated in the preceding eight sections, unless he knew in due time that they belong to the third person.

If such movables have been stolen or lost the provisions of the law concerning recovery of possession shall apply.

Sections 269. Preservation of a Movable

The preferential right on account of the preservation of a movable is for the expense of the preservation of movable, and is in such movable.

The preferential right exists also for necessary expenses incurred for the purpose of having a right relating to a movable preserved, acknowledged or enforced.

Section 270. Price and Interest

The preferential right on account of the sale of a movable is for the price and interest thereon, and is in such movable.

Section 271. Seeds, Plants, and Manure

The preferential right on account of the supply of seeds, young plants or manure is for the price of seeds, young plants or manure and interest thereon, and is in the fruits which have grown on the land for which those things have been used within one year after their use.

Section 272. Agricultural and Industrial Services

The preferential right on account of agricultural and industrial services is as to the person who rendered agricultural service for wages for one year back, and as to a person who rendered industrial services for wages for three months back, and is in the fruits or manufactured things produced by his service.

(b) PREFERENTIAL RIGHTS IN IMMOVABLES

Section 273. Immovables

A person in whose favor an obligation exists based upon any of the following grounds has a preferential right in a particular immovable of the debtor:

  1. Preservation of an immovable
  2. Work done upon an immovable
  3. Sale of an immovable

Section 274. Preservation of an Immovable

The preferential right on account of the preservation of an immovable is for the expense of preservation of an immovable, and is in such immovable.

In case of the foregoing paragraph the provisions of Section 269 paragraph 2 apply correspondingly.

Section 275. Employee Preferential Rights

The preferential right on account of work done upon an immovable is for charges for the work done upon an immovable of the debtor by a builder an architect or a contractor, and is in such immovable.

This preferential right exist only if there is a present increase of the value of such immovable due to such work, and is only in such increased value.

Section 276. Right to Sell Immovable

The preferential right on account of the sale of an immovable is for the price and interest thereon, and is in such immovable.

(top)

Part 6: Preferential Rights

3. Rank of Preferential Rights

Section 277. Rank

When general preferential rights conflict, the rank of their precedence is according to the order in Section 253.

When a preferential right conflicts with a special preferential right, the latter takes precedence, but the preferential rights on account of expenses for the common benefit takes precedence as against all creditors who are benefited thereby.

Section 278. Preference Ranks of Movables

When preferential rights in the same movable conflict, the rank of their precedence is as follows:

  1. The preferential right on account of the hiring of an immovable, of lodging in an inn and of carriage.
  2. The preferential right on account of the preservation of a movable, but if there are several persons entitled as preserves, a later preserves takes precedence of an earlier one.
  3. The preferential right on account of the sale of a movable, of the supply of seeds, young plants or manure, and of agriculture and industrial services.

If a person who has a preferential right of the first rank knew at the time when he acquired his obligation that other persons have preferential rights of the second or third rank, he cannot exercise his right of precedence against them. The same applies as against a person who has preserved a thing for the benefit of a person having a preferential right of the first rank.

As to fruits, a person who rendered agricultural services has the first rank, a supplier of seeds, young plants or manure the second, and the letter of the land third.

Section 279. Preference Rank of Immovable

When special preferential rights in the same immovable conflict, the rank of their precedence is according to the order in Section 273.

In successive sales have been made of the same immovable, the rank of precedence of the seller as between themselves is according to the priority of the sales.

Section 280. Equal Rank Conflict

When several persons have preferential rights of the same rank in the same thing, each is to receive performance in proportion to the amount of his obligation.

4. Effect of Preferential rights

Section 281. Debtor Delivery of Movable to 3rd Party

A preferential right in a movable cannot be exercised after the debtor has delivered the thing to a third person who has acquired it from him.

Section 282. Pledgee has same rights as First Rank Preference

When a preferential right conflicts with a pledge of a movable, the pledgee has the same rights as the holder of a preferential right of the first rank mentioned in Section 278.

Section 283. Movables first than Immovables

A person who has a general preferential right must receive performance first out of the movable property of the debtor, and only in case that is insufficient he can receive performance out of immovables.

As to immovables, he must receive performance first out of such immovables as are not subject to a special security.

If a person who has a general preferential right negligently omits to intervene in a distribution according to the provisions of the foregoing two paragraphs, he cannot exercise his preferential right against a third person whose right is registered, to the extent of what he would have received through such intervention.

The provisions of the foregoing three paragraphs do not apply, if the proceeds of an immovable are to be distributed before those of other property, or if the proceeds of an immovable which is the subject of a special security are to be distributed before the proceeds of other immovables.

Section 284. General Preference Rights

A general preferential right, even though not registered in respect to an immovable, may be set up against any creditor who has no special security, but this does not apply against a third person who made registration.

Section 285. Registration of Preference for Immovable

A preferential right on account of the preservation of an immovable retains its effect by being registered immediately after the act of preservation is completed.

Section 286. Preference on Completed Work

A preferential right on account of work done upon an immovable retains its effect by a provisional estimate of the cost being registered before the work has begun. If the costs of the work exceeds the provisional estimate, there is no preferential right for the excess.

The increase of value of an immovable arising from the work done upon it is to be estimated by experts appointed by the Court at the time of the intervention in the distribution.

Section 287. Preference Rights over Mortgage

A preferential right registered in accordance with the provisions of the preceding two sections can be exercised in preference to a mortgage.

Section 288. Preferential Right on the sale of an Immovable

A preferential right on account of the sale of an immovable retains its effect by registering at the same time with the contract of sale the fact that the price or the interest thereon has not been paid.

Section 289. Mortgages

As to the effect of a preferential right, in addition to provisions of Sections 281 to 288 inclusive, the provisions as to Mortgage apply correspondingly.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER III

Plurality of Debtors and Creditors

Section 290. Multiple Debtors

If several persons owe a divisible performance, or if a divisible performance is owed to several persons, each debtor is, in case of doubt liable only for an equal share, and each creditor is entitled to an equal share.

Section 291. Joint Debtors

If several persons owe an act of performance in such manner that each is bound to effect the whole performance, though the creditor is entitled to obtain the whole performance only once (i.e. joint debtors), the creditor may demand the performance at his option from any one of the debtors, in the whole or in part. Until the whole performance has been effected all of the debtors remain bound.

Section 292. Performance of a Joint Debtor benefits all Debtors

Performance of the obligation by one joint debtors operates in favor of the other debtors. The same rule applies to any act in lieu of performance, to the deposit of lieu of performance and to set off.

A claim belonging to one of the joint debtors may not be set off by the other debtors.

Section 293. Release of Obligation to one Joint Debtor

A release of the obligation granted to one of the joint debtors avails for the benefit of the other debtors only in respect of the share of the debtor who has been released unless otherwise agreed.

Section 294. Default of Creditor toward one Joint Debtor

The default of the creditor towards one joint debtor avails also in favor of the other debtors.

Section 295

Facts other than those specified in Sections 292 to 294 avail, unless the contrary appears from the nature of the obligation, in favour of and as against only the joint debtor to whom they particularly refer.

This applies, in particular, to the giving of notice, default, imputability of fault, impossibility of performance on the part of one joint debtor, prescription or its interruption, and merger of the claim in debt.

Section 296

As between themselves joint debtors are liable in equal shares, unless it is otherwise provided. If from one of the joint debtors the contribution due from him cannot be obtained, the deficiency shall be borne by the other debtors who are bound to make contribution; provided that one of the joint debtors has been released from joint obligation, the creditor takes upon himself that share which the debtor released by him ought to have born.

Section 297

If in a contract several persons bind themselves in common to effect a performance, they are liable, in case of doubt, as joint debtors even in the case of a divisible performance.

Section 298

If several persons are entitled to demand an act of performance in such manner that each can demand the whole performance, though the debtor is bound to effect the whole performance only once (i.e. joint creditors), the debtor may at his option perform in favour of any one of the creditors. This applies even if one of the creditors has already brought an action for the performance.

Section 299. Default on the part of one joint creditor avails also against the other creditors.

If a claim and a debt become merged in one joint creditor, the rights of the other creditors against the debtor are extinguished.

For the rest the provisions of Sections 292, 293 and 295 apply mutatis mutandis. In particular, if one joint creditor transfers his claim to another person, the rights of the other creditors remain unaffected.

Section 300. Shares between Joint Debtors

Joint creditors are, as between themselves, entitled to equal shares, unless it is otherwise provided.

Section 301. Joint Debtors of Indivisible Performance

If several person owe an indivisible performance, they are liable as joint debtors.

Section 302. Indivisible Performance owed to Several Persons

If an indivisible performance is owed to several persons, and if they are not joint creditors, the debtor may only perform in favor of all in common, and each creditor may only demand the performance in favor of all. Each creditor may demand that the debtor deposits the thing owed for the benefit of all the creditors, or if the thing is not suitable to be deposited, that it be consigned to a custodian appointed by the Court.

For the rest a fact which refers only to one creditor does not avail in favor of nor as against the other creditors.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER IV

Transfer of Claims

Section 303. Transfer of a Claim

A claim may be transferred, unless its nature does not admit of it.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph do not apply, if the parties have declared a contrary intention. Such declaration of intention, however, cannot be set up against a third person acting in good faith.

Section 304. Judicial Attachment

A claim is not transferable if it is not subject to judicial attachment.

Section 305. Enforcing a Transferred Claim

With the transferred claim the rights of mortgage or pledge existing on its account and the rights, arising from a suretyship established for it, pass to the transferee.

The transferee may also enforce any preferential right connected with the claim in case of compulsory execution or bankruptcy.

Section 306. Transfers Need to be in Writing

The transfer of an obligation performable to a specific creditor is not valid unless it is made in writing. It can be set up against the debtor or third person only if a notice thereof has been given to the debtor, or if the debtor has consented to the transfer. Such notice or consent be in writing.

The debtor is discharged if he satisfies the transferor by way of payment or otherwise before he has received notice of, or has agreed to, the transfer.

Section 307. Multiple Transfers, First Transfer gets Preference

If a right is claimed under different transfers, the first transfer notified, or agreed to, shall be preferred.

Section 308. Transfers without Reservations

If a debtor has given the consent mentioned in Section 306 without reservation, he cannot set up against the transferee a defense which he might have made against the transferor. If, however, in order to extinguish the obligation, the debtor has made any payment to the transferor, he may recover it, or if for such purpose he has assumed an obligation to the transferor, he may treat it as if it did not exist.

If the debtor has only received a notice of the transfer, he may set up against the transferee any defense which he had against the transferor before he received such notice. If the debtor had against the transferor a claim not yet due at the time of the notice, he can set off such claim provided that the same would become due not later than the claim transferred.

Section 309. Obligation for Performance against Third Party

The transfer of an obligation performable to order can be set up against the debtor or other third person only if the transfer is indorsed on the instrument, and the instrument itself is delivered to the transferee.

Section 310. No Obligation to inform Debtor of Transferee

The debtor of an obligation performable to order has the right, but is not bound, to verify the identity of the holder of the instrument or the genuineness of his signature or seal; but if the debtor acts in bad faith or with gross negligence, his performance is invalid.

Section 311. Creditors and Holders of the Debt

The provisions of the foregoing section apply correspondingly, if a creditor is designated in the instrument, but it is added that performance shall be made to the holder of such instrument.

Section 312. Rights Transferred

The debtor of an obligation performable to order cannot set up against any transferee in good faith defenses which he might have set up against the original creditor, except such as appear on the face of the instrument or result naturally from its character.

Section 313. The provisions of the foregoing section apply correspondingly to obligations performance to bearer.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER V
EXTINCTION OF OBLIGATION

Performance

Section 314. Third Party Performance only with approval of Debtor

Performance of an obligation may be made by any third person, unless its nature does not admit of it, or the parties concerned have declared a contrary intention.

A person who has no interest in the performance, cannot make performance against the will of the debtor.

Section 315. Receiving Performance

Performance must be made to the creditor or a person having authority to receive performance on his behalf. A performance made to a person who has no authority to receive is valid if the creditor ratifies it.

Section 316. Good Faith Performance to Wrong Person

If performance is made to the apparent possessor of an obligation, it is valid only if the person making performance acted in good faith.

Section 317. Wrongful Performance – Creditor Enrichment

Except in the case mentioned in the foregoing section, a performance made to a person who is not entitled to receive it, is valid only to the extent to which the creditor has been enriched thereby.

Section 318. Right to Received Performance

A person who holds a receipt is deemed to have a right to receive performance; but this does not apply, if the person making performance knows that such right does not exist or is ignorant thereof by reason of his negligence.

Section 319. Demand for another Performance

When a third debtor who has been ordered by a Court to refrain from making performance, has made the same to his own creditor, the seizing creditor may, in so far as he has sustained damage, demand another performance from the third debtor.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph do not prevent the third debtor from exercising the right to recourse against his own creditor.

Section 320. Creditor does not have to accept substitute performance

The creditor cannot be compelled to receive part performance or any other performance than that which due to him.

Section 321. Acceptance of Substitute Performance

An obligation is extinguished if the creditor accepts in lieu of performance another performance than agreed upon.

If the debtor, for the purpose of satisfying the creditor, assumes a new obligation towards him, is not to be presumed, in case of doubt, that he assumes the obligation in lieu of performance.

If performance is made by making, transferring, or endorsing a bull or warrant, the obligation is extinguished only if such bill or warrant is paid.

Section 322. Debtor liable for defect in substitute performance

If a thing, a claim against a third person or any other right is given in lieu of performance, the debtor shall be liable for defect and for eviction in the same manner as the seller.

Section 323. No Substitute for Specific Performance

If the subject of an obligation is the delivery of a specific thing, the person making performance must deliver the thing in connection in which it is at the same time when delivery is to be made.

The debtor must, until he delivers it, keep the thing with such care as a person of ordinary prudence would take of his own property.

Section 324. Default Place of Performance

When there is no special declaration of intention as to the place of performance, if a specific thing is to be delivered, the delivery is to be made at the place where the thing was at the time when the obligation arose; other kinds of performance must be made at the place of the creditor’s present domicile.

Section 325. Default Bearing Cost of Performance

When there is no declaration of intention as to the expenses of performance, such expenses are to be borne by the debtor; if, however, because of the creditor’s transfer of his domicile or any other act of his the expenses are increased, such increase must be borne by the creditor.

Section 326. Receipt for Performance

The person making performance is entitled to a receipt from the person who receives performance, and if the performance is wholly performed, he is entitled to have the document embodying the obligation surrendered to him or cancelled. If such document is declared to be lost, he is entitled to have the extinction of the obligation mentioned in the receipt or in a separate document.

If the obligation is partly performed or if the document gives the creditor any other right, the debtor is only entitled to a receipt and to have the performance noted in the document.

Section 327. Issuance of Receipt is Presumption of Performance

In case of interest or other periodical performance, if the creditor gives a receipt for one term without any reservation, it is presumed that he has received performance for the previous terms.

If he gives receipt for the capital, it is presumed that he has received the interest.

If the document embodying the obligation has been surrendered, it is presumed that the obligation has been extinguished.

Section 328. Specification of Performance vs Unspecified Performance

If a debtor is bound to the creditor to do similar acts of performance by virtue of several obligations, and if the performance effected by him is insufficient for the discharge of all debts, that debt is discharged which he specifies on effecting the performance.

If the debtor makes no specification, then that debt which is due is first discharged; among several debts due that one is first discharged which affords the creditor least security; among several equal secured debts the one most burdensome to the debtor; among several equally burdensome debts the oldest debt; and where several are equally old every debt proportionately.

Section 329. Discharge of Interest Prior to Principal

If the debtor, besides the principal performance, has to pay interest and costs, the value of an act of performance sufficient to discharge the whole debt is applied first to the costs, then to the interest, and lastly to the principal performance.

Section 330. Discharge after Performance

By proper tender of performance a discharge is effected, from the time of the tender, from all responsibilities arising out of non-performance.

Section 331. Discharge of Obligation by Depositing Creditor’s Performance

If the creditor refuses or is unable to accept performance, the person performing may be discharged from the obligation by depositing for the creditor’s benefit the thing forming the subject of the obligation. The same applies, if the person performing without fault on his part, cannot ascertain the right or identity of the creditor.

Section 332. Depositing Performance prior to Counter Performance

If the debtor is bound to perform only after the counter-performance has been effected by the creditor, he may make the right of the creditor to receive the thing deposited dependent upon counter-performance by the creditor.

Section 333. Place of Deposit

A deposit must be made to the deposit office or the place where the obligation is to be performed.

If there are no special provisions by law or regulations as to the deposit offices, the Court must, on application of the person performing, designate a deposit office and appoint a custodian of the thing deposited.

The depositor must without delay give notice of the deposit to the creditor.

Section 334. Withdraw of Deposit

The debtor has the right to withdraw the thing deposited. If he withdraws it, the deposit is deemed never to have been made.

The right of withdrawal is barred:

  1. If the debtor declares to the deposit office that he waives his right of withdrawal.
  2. If the creditor declares his acceptance to the deposit office.
  3. If the deposit has been ordered or confirmed by the Court and the fact is notified to the deposit office.

Section 335. No Right to Withdraw During Bankruptcy Proceedings

The right of withdrawal is not subject to judicial attachment.

If bankruptcy proceedings are instituted against the property of the debtor, the right of withdrawal cannot be exercised during the bankruptcy proceedings.

Section 336. Sale of Perishable Deposit

If the thing forming the subject of performance is not suitable for deposit, or if in regard to the thing there is an apprehension that it may perish or be destroyed or damaged, the person performing may, with the permission of the Court, sell it at auction and deposit the proceeds. The same applies, if the keeping of the thing would be unreasonably expensive.

Section 337. Auction of Deposit

The auction is not permissible until after the creditor has been warned of it. The warning may be dispensed with if the thing is liable to deterioration, and there is danger in delaying the auction.

The debtor shall without delay notify the creditor of the auction; if the debtor fails to do so, he is liable for compensation.

The warning and the notice may be dispensed with if they are impracticable.

The time and place of the auction, with a general description of the thing, shall be publicly advertised.

Section 338. Cost of Auction

The cost of the deposit or of the auction shall be borne by the creditor, unless the deposit be withdrawn by the debtor.

Section 339. Ten Year Limitation for Receipt Notice of Deposit

The right of the creditor to the deposit is extinguished after the lapse of ten years since receipt of notice of the deposit.

After the right of the creditor is extinguished the debtor is entitled to withdraw even if he has waived the right of withdrawal.

(top)

Release

Section 340. Release of Obligation

If the creditor declares to the debtor an intention to release the obligation, it is extinguished.

When an obligation has been evidenced by writing, the release must also be in writing or the document embodying the obligation be surrendered to the debtor or cancelled.

Set-off

Section 341. Discharge by Set-Off

If two persons are bound to each other by obligations whose subject is of the same kind and both of which are due, either debtor may be discharged from his obligation by set-off to the extent to which the amounts of the obligations correspond, unless the nature of one of the obligations does not admit of it.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph do not apply, if the parties have declared a contrary intention; but such intention cannot be set up against a third person acting in good faith.

Section 342. Set-Off Declaration

Set-off is made by a declaration of intention by one party to another. A condition or time commencement or ending cannot be added to such declaration.

The declaration of intention mentioned in the foregoing paragraph relates back in its effect to the time when both obligations could first have been set-off.

Section 343. Set-Offs and Indemnification

A set-off may be made even though the place of performance of the two obligations is different; but the party who makes the set-off must indemnify the other party for any damage caused thereby.

Section 344. Statute of Limitations does not exclude Set-Off

A claim against which there is a defense may not be set-off. Prescription does not exclude set-off, if the claim barred by prescription was not barred at the time at which it could have been set-off against the other claim.

Section 345. No Set-offs from Unlawful Act

If an obligation arises from an unlawful act, the debtor cannot avail himself of a set-off against the creditor.

Section 346. Set-Off must be subject to Judicial Attachment

If a claim is not subject to judicial attachment, it is not subject to set-off.

Section 347. Third Debtor

A third debtor who has received from the Court an order of prohibition of payment cannot set up against the seizing creditor an obligation subsequently acquired by him.

Section 348. Priority of Set-offs

If either party has several claims suitable for set-off, the party making the set-off may specify the claims which are to be set-off against each other. If the set-off is declared without such specification, or if the other party objects without delay, provisions of Section 328 paragraph 2 apply mutatis mutandis.

If the party making the set-off owes the other party interest and costs in addition to the principal performance, the provisions of Section 329 apply mutatis mutandis.

Novation

Section 349. Novation

When the parties concerned have concluded a contract changing the essential elements of an obligation, such obligation is extinguished by novation.

If a conditional obligation is made unconditional, or a condition is added to an unconditional obligation, or if a condition is changed, it is regarded as a change of an essential element of such obligation.

A novation by a change of the creditor is governed by the provisions of this Code concerning transfer of claims.

Section 350. Agreed Change of Terms

A novation by a change of the debtor may be effected by a contract between the creditor and the new debtor, but this cannot be done against the will of the original debtor.

Section 351. No Obligation then Contract is Annulled

If the obligation resulting from a novation does not come into existence, or is annulled, because of an illegality in its ground or because of some reason unknown to the parties, the original obligation is not extinguished.

Section 352. Rights or Pledges can be transferred to new obligation of Novation

The parties to a novation may, to the extent of the subject of the original obligation, transfer a right of pledge or mortgage given as security for it to the new obligation; but if such security was given by a third person, his consent is necessary.

Merger

Section 353. Merger of Obligation

If rights and liabilities in an obligation become vested in the same person, the obligation is extinguished, except when it has become the subject of the right of a third person, or when a bill has been re-indorsed according Section 917 paragraph 3.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE II
CONTRACT
CHAPTER I

Formation of Contract

Section 354. Time Period for Acceptance Cannot be withdrawn

An offer to make a contract in which a period for acceptance is specified cannot be withdrawn within such period.

Section 355. Reason period of acceptance must be allowed

A person who, without specifying a period for acceptance, makes an offer to another at a distance cannot withdraw his offer within a time which notice of acceptance might reasonably be expected.

Section 356. In-Person Offer, Acceptance must be made at that time

An offer made to a person who is present without specifying a period for acceptance may be accepted only there and then. This applies also to an offer made by one person to another on the telephone.

Section 357. Cessation of Offer

An offer ceases to be binding if it is refused to the offeror, or if it is not accepted in due time according to the three foregoing sections.

Section 358. Notice of Delayed Acceptance must be provided or offer ceases

If the notice of acceptance arrives out of time, but it is apparent that it was sent in such manner that in the ordinary course of things it ought to have arrived in due time, the offeror, unless he has already done so, must without delay give notice to the other party of the delayed arrival.

If the offeror fails to give notice mentioned in the foregoing paragraph, the notice of the acceptance is deemed not to have been out of time.

Section 359. Offer Our of Time

If the acceptance of an offer arrives out of time, it is deemed to be a new offer.

An acceptance with additions, restrictions or other modifications is deemed to be a refusal coupled with a new offer.

Section 360. Offeror has Declared Contrary Intention or Loss Capacity

The provisions of Section 169 paragraph 2 do not apply, if the offeror has declared a contrary intention, or if before accepting the other party had notice of the fact of his death or loss of capacity.

Section 361. Contract between Persons at a Distance

A contract between persons at a distance comes into existence at the time when the notice of acceptance reaches the offeror.

In accordance to the declared intention of the offeror or to ordinary usage no notice of acceptance is necessary, the contract comes into existence at the time of the occurrence of fact which is considered as a declaration to accept.

Section 362. Contract by Advertisement

A person who by advertisement promises that he will give a reward to whoever shall be a certain act is bound to give such reward to any person who does the act, even if such person did not act with a view to the reward.

Section 363. Withdraw offer by Advertisement

In the case of the foregoing section the promisor may so long as there is no person who has completed the specific act, withdraw his promise by the same means which used for advertising, unless he declared in the advertisement that he would not withdraw it.

If a promise cannot be withdrawn by the means of the aforesaid, withdraw may be made by other means, but in such case it is valid only against those persons who know of it.

If the promisor has fixed a period within which the specified act must be done, he is presumed to have renounced his right of withdrawal.

Section 364. Obligation after several persons completes act

If there are several persons who have done the act specified in the advertisement, only that one who does it first has a right to receive an equal share of the reward.

If several persons do such act at the same time, each one has a right to receive an equal share of the reward. But if the reward is in its nature indivisible, or if by the terms of the promise only one person is to receive the reward, it is decided by lot.

The provisions of the foregoing two paragraphs do not apply, if in the advertisement a different intention is declared.

Section 365. Promise of Reward

A promise of reward which has a prize competition is valid only if a period of time is fixed in the advertisement.

The decision whether any competitor fulfils the conditions of the promise within the period, or which one among several competitors deserves the preference, shall be made by the umpire named in the advertisement, or in the absence of any such, by the promisor of the reward. The decision is binding upon the parties concerned.

In case of equality of merit the provisions of Section 364 paragraph 3 apply correspondingly.

The transfer of ownership of the thing produced may be demanded by the promisor only of he has specified in the advertisement that such transfer shall be made.

Section 366. When Parties have not agreed to all points of a contract

So long as the parties have not agreed upon all points of a contract upon which, according to the declaration of even one party, agreement is essential, the contract is, in case of doubt, not concluded. An understanding concerning particular points is not binding, even if they have been noted down.

If it is agreed that the contemplated contract shall be put into writing, in case of doubt, the contract is not concluded until it is put in writing.

Section 367. If parties have agreed to most points of a contract

If the parties to a contract, which they regarded as concluded, have in fact not agreed as to one point upon which an agreement was to be settled, those parts which were agreed upon are valid in so far as it may be inferred that the contract would have been concluded even without a settlement of this point.

Section 368. Interpretation by Good Faith, Ordinary Usage

Contracts shall be interpreted according to the requirements of good faith, ordinary usage being taken into consideration.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE II
CONTRACT
CHAPTER II

Effect of Contract

Section 369. Refusal to Perform Reciprocal Contract

A party to a reciprocal contract may refuse to perform his obligation until the other party performs or tenders performance of his obligation. But this does not apply, if the other party’s obligation is not yet due.

Section 370. Damage of Goods while Transfer

If the object of a reciprocal contract is the creation or transfer of a real right in a specific thing, and such thing is lost or damaged by a cause which is not attributable to the debtor, the loss or damage fails upon the creditor.

To a non-specific thing the provisions of the foregoing paragraph apply from the time when the thing has become specific in accordance with the provisions of Section 195 paragraph 2.

Section 371. Damage of a Reciprocal Contract

The provision of the foregoing section do not apply, if the thing which forms the subject of a reciprocal contract depending upon a condition precedent is lost or destroyed while the condition is pending.

If the thing is damaged by a cause not attributable to the creditor, the latter, when the condition is fulfilled, may at his option either demand performance with reduction of his counter performance or rescind the contract, provided that in the case where the cause of the damage is attributable to the debtor, the creditor’s right to compensate is not affected thereby.

Section 372. Obligation Made Impossible

Except in the cases mentioned in the two foregoing sections, if an obligation becomes impossible of performance by a cause not attributable to either party, the debtor has no right to receive the counter performance.

If performance becomes impossible by a cause attributable to the creditor, the debtor does not lose his right to the counter performance. He must however, deduct what he saves in consequence of release from the performance, or what he acquires or maliciously omits to acquire by a different application of his faculties. The same rule applies in the performance due from one party becomes impossible, in consequence of a circumstance for which he is not responsible, at the time when the other party is in default to acceptance.

Section 373. Agreement through Fraud or Gross Negligence

An agreement made in advance exonerating a debtor from his own fraud or gross negligence is void.

Section 374. Performance to a Third Person

If a party by a contract agrees to make a performance to a third person, the latter has a right to claim such performance directly from the debtor.

In the case of the foregoing paragraph the right of the third person comes into existence at the time when he declares to the debtor his intention to take the benefit of the contract.

Section 375. Existence of a Third Person’s Rights Under the Contract

After the right of the third person has come into existence in accordance with the provisions of the foregoing section, it cannot be charged or extinguished by the parties to the contract.

Section 376. Defenses to Third Person Benefit

Defenses arising from the contract mentioned in Section 374 can be set up by the debtor against the third person who received the benefit of the contract.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE II
CONTRACT
CHAPTER III

Earnest and Stipulated Penalty

Section 377. Earnest

If, on entering into a contract, something is given as earnest, this is deemed to be proof of the conclusion of the contract. It also serves as a security that the contract shall be performed.

Section 378. In the absence of agreement to the contrary, earnest is:

  1. To be returned or treated as part-payment upon performance
  2. To be forfeited, if the party giving it fails to perform, or if the performance becomes impossible in consequence of the circumstance for which he is responsible or if the rescission of the contract is due to his fault.
  3. To be returned, if the party receiving it fails to perform, or, if the performance becomes impossible in consequence of a circumstance for which he is responsible.

Section 379. Penalty for Improper Performance

If the debtor promises the creditor the payment of a sum of money as penalty in case he does not perform it in the proper manner, the penalty is forfeited if he is in default. If the performance due consist in a forbearance, the penalty is forfeited as soon as any act in contravention of the obligation is committed.

Section 380. Penalty for Non-Performance

If the debtor has promised the penalty for the case of his not performing his obligation, his creditor may demand the forfeited penalty in lieu of performance. If the creditor declares to the debtor that he demands the penalty, the claim for performance is barred.

If the creditor has a claim for compensation for non-performance, he may demand the forfeited penalty as the minimum amount of the damage. Proof of further damage is admissible.

Section 381. Non-Performance in a Proper Manner

If the debtor has promised the penalty in case of not performing the obligation in the proper manner, such as, not at the fixed time, the creditor may demand the forfeited penalty in addition to the performance.

If the creditor has a claim for compensation on account of improper performance, the Section 380 paragraph 2 apply.

If the creditor accepts the performance he may demand the penalty only if on acceptance he reserves the right to do so.

Section 382. Performance instead of Money as Penalty

If another performance than the payment of a sum of money is promised as penalty, the provisions of Sections 379 to 381 apply; the claim for compensation is barred if the creditor demands the penalty.

Section 383. Unreasonable Penalty

If a forfeited penalty is disproportionately high, it may be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Court. In determination of reasonableness every legitimate interest of the creditor, not merely his property interest, shall be taken into consideration. After payment of the penalty the claim for reduction is barred.

The same rule applies also, apart from the cases provided for by Sections 379 and 382, if a person promises a penalty for the case of his doing or forbearing to do some act.

Section 384. Invalid Agreement

If the promises performance is invalid, an agreement made for a penalty for non-performance of the promise is also invalid, even if the parties knew of the invalidity of the promise.

Section 385. Contesting Forfeiture – Must Prove Penalty

If the debtor contests the forfeiture of the penalty on the ground of having performed his obligation, he must prove the performance, unless the performance due from him consisted in a forbearance.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE II
CONTRACT
CHAPTER IV

Rescission of Contract

Section 386. Declaration of Rescission

If by contract or by the provisions of law one party has the right of rescission, such rescission is made by a declaration of intention to the other party.

The declaration of intention in the foregoing paragraph cannot be revoked.

Section 387. Reasonable Period for Performance

If one part does not perform the obligation, the other party may fix a reasonable period and notify him to perform within that period. If he does not perform within that period, the other party may rescind the contract.

Section 388. Fixed Time for Performance

If the object of a contract according to its nature or to an intention declared by the parties can be accomplished only by performance at a fixed time or within a fixed period, and such time or period has passed without one of the parties having performed, the other party may rescind the contract without the notification mentioned in the foregoing section.

Section 389. Impossibility of Performance

If performance becomes wholly or party impossible by a cause attributable to the debtor, the creditor may rescind the contract.

Section 390. All Persons of One Side of a Contract must agree

If in a contract there are several persons on the one or the other side, the right of rescission may be exercised only by all and against all. If the right of rescission is extinguished in respect of one of those persons entitled, also in respect of the others.

Section 391. Restoration after Rescission

If one party has exercised his right of rescission, each party is bound to restore the other to his former condition; but the rights of third persons cannot be impaired.

To money which is to be repaid in the case of the foregoing paragraph interest is to be paid from the time when it was received.

For services rendered and for allowing the use of a thing the restitution shall be made by paying the value, or, if in the contract a counter-payment in money is stipulated for, this shall be paid.

The exercise of the right of rescission does not affect a claim for damages.

Section 392. Obligations Resulting from Rescission

The obligations of the parties resulting from rescission shall be performed according to the provisions of Section 369.

Section 393. If no period for rescission, other party may fix reasonable period with notice

If no period is fixed for the exercise of the right of rescission, the other party may fix a reasonable period and notify the party having a right of rescission to declare within such period whether he will rescind or not. If notice of rescission is not received within such period, the right of rescission is extinguished.

Section 394. Right of Rescission Extinguished by Impossibility

The right of rescission is extinguished when the person entitled has, by his own act or fault, essentially damaged the thing which is the subject of a contract or has rendered the restitution thereof impossible or has charged into a thing of a different kind by working it up or remodeling it.

If without the act or fault of the person who has the right of rescission the thing which is the subject of the contract of the contract has been lost or damaged, the right of rescission is not extinguished.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE III

Management of Affairs Without Mandate

Section 395. Management of Affairs without Mandate

A person who takes charge of an affair for another without having received mandate from him or being otherwise entitled to do so in respect of him, shall manage the affair in such manner as the interest of the principal requires, having regard to his actual or presumptive wishes.

Section 396. If the Principal opposed Management

If the undertaking of the management of the affair is opposed to the actual or presumptive wishes of the principal, and if the manager must have recognized this, he is bound to compensate the principal for any damages arising from his management of the affair, even if no fault otherwise imputable to him.

Section 397. Duty to the Public Interest

The fact that the management of the affair is opposed to the wishes of the principal is not taken into consideration if, without the management of the affair, a duty of the principal the fulfillment of which is of public interest or a legal duty to furnish maintenance to others by the principal would not be fulfilled in due time.

Section 398. Averting Imminent Danger

If the management of the affair has for its object the averting of an imminent danger which threatens the person, reputation or property of the principal, the manager is responsible only for willful default and gross negligence.

Section 399. Notification to the Principal

The manager shall notify to the principal, as soon as practicable, the undertaking of the management of the affair, and await his decision, unless there is danger in delay. For the rest the provisions of Sections 809 to 811 applicable to an agent apply mutatis mutandis to the obligation of the manager.

Section 400. Incapacitated Manager

If the manager is incapacitated, he is responsible only under the provisions relating to compensation for wrongful acts, and relating for the return for undue enrichment.

Section 401. Right to Reimbursement by Manager

If the undertaking of management of the affair is in accordance with the interest and the actual or presumptive wishes of the principal, the manager may demand reimbursement of his outlay as an agent. The provisions of Section 816 paragraph 2 apply mutatis mutandis.

In the case provided for by Section 397 this claim belongs to the manager even if the undertaking of the management of the affair is opposed to the wishes of the principal.

Section 402. Undue Enrichment

If the conditions of the foregoing section do not exist, the principal is bound to return to the manager all that he acquires through the management of the affair under the provisions relating to the return for undue enrichment.

If the principal ratifies the management of the affair, the provisions of this Code concerning Agency apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 403. Intention for Reimbursement

The manager has no claim if he had not the intention to demand reimbursement from the principal.

If parents or grandparents furnish maintenance to their descendants, or vice versa, it is to be presumed, in case of doubt, that there is no intention to demand reimbursement from the recipient.

Section 404. Third Party Management

If the manager acts for one person, believing that he is acting for another person, only the former has the right and duties arising out of the management.

Section 405. Management of Affair in the Belief that it is his Own Property

The provisions of the ten foregoing sections do not apply, if a person takes charge of the affair of another in the belief that it is his own.

If a person treats the affair of another as his own, although knowing that he is not entitled to do so, the principal may enforce the claims based on Sections 395, 396, 399 and 400. If he does enforce them, he is liable to the manager as provided for in Section 402 paragraph 1.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE IV

Undue Enrichment

Section 406. Undue Enrichment

Any person who, through an act of performance made by another person or in any other manner, obtains something to the prejudice of such other person without legal ground, must return it to the latter. The acknowledgment of the existence or non-existence of a debt is deemed to be an act of performance.

The same provision shall apply if something has been obtained on account of a cause which has not been realized or of a ceased to exist.

Section 407. Freely Done knowing it won’t effect Performance

A person who has freely done an act as if in performance of an obligation, knowing that he was not bound to effect the performance, is not entitled to restitution.

Section 408. The following persons are not entitled to restitution:

  • A person who performs an obligation subject to a time clause before the time has arrived
  • A person who performs an obligation which has been barred by prescription
  • A person who performs an obligation in compliance with a moral duty or with the requirements of social propriety.

Section 409. Non-Debtor Performs Obligation

When a person who is not a debtor has performed an obligation by mistake and the creditor, in consequence thereof, has in good faith destroyed or obliterated the documentary evidence of the obligation or given up any security or lost his right by prescription, the creditor is not bound to make restitution.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph do not prevent the person who has performed from exercising a right of recourse against the debtor and his surety, if any.

Section 410. Knowledge that Performance would not Produce Results

A person who had made a performance for an intended result which is not produced is not entitled to restitution, if, from the beginning, it was known to him that the production of the result was impossible or if he was prevented the result in violation of good faith.

Section 411. Legal Prohibition for Performance

A person who has made an act of performance, the purpose of which is contrary to legal prohibition or good morals, cannot claim restitution.

Section 412. Restitution

If the property which was unduly received is a sum of money, restitution must be made in full, unless the person who received it was in good faith in which case he is only bound to return such part of his enrichment as still exists at the time when restitution is demanded.

Section 413. Receiving Property in Good Faith

When the property which must be returned is other than a sum of money and the person who received it was in good faith, such person is only bound to return it in such condition as it is and is not responsible for less or damage to such thing, but he must return whatever he has acquired as compensation for such loss or damage. If the person who received the property was in bad faith he is fully responsible for the loss or damage even caused by force majeur, unless he proves that the loss or damage would have happened in any case.

Section 414. Impossibility of Returning Property

If restitution is impossible on account of the nature of the property received or for any other reason, and the person who received the property was in good faith, such person is bound only to return such part of his enrichment as still exists at the time when restitution is demanded. If a person who received the property was in bad faith, he is bound to pay the full value of the property.

Section 415. Fruits of Property

A person who has received the property in good faith acquires the fruits thereon as long as such good faith continues.

In case where he has to return such thing, he is deemed to be in bad faith from the time when restitution is demanded.

Section 416. Expenses to Preserve Property

Expenses which were necessary for the preservation of the property or for its maintenance or repair must be reimbursed in full to the person who returns such property.

However such person cannot claim reimbursement of the ordinary expenses for maintenance, repairs or charges made within the time during which he has acquired the fruits.

Section 417. Increase in Value after Returning Property

For expenses other than those provided in paragraph 1 of the foregoing section the person who returns the property can claim reimbursement only if they were made while he was in good faith and if the value of the property is increased by such expenses at the time of restitution, and only to the extent of such increase.

The provisions of Section 415 paragraph 2 apply correspondingly.

Section 418. Restoration of Alterations Made to Property

If the person who has in bad faith unduly received a property has made alternations in, or additions to it, he must return the property after having put it in its former condition at his own expense, unless the owner of the property chooses to have it returned in its present condition, in which case the owner must pay at his option either the cost of alterations or additions, or a sum representing the increased value of the property.

When restitution is to be made, if it is impossible to put it in its former condition or the property would be damaged thereby, the person who received the property must return it in such condition as it is and he is not entitled to compensation for any increase of value accruing to the property from such alterations or additions.

Section 419. Statute of Limitations for Undue Enrichment Claims

No action on account of undue enrichment can be entered later than one year from the time when the injured party became aware of his right to restitution or later than 10 years from the time when the right accrued.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE V
TORTS
CHAPTER I

Section 420. Liability for Wrongful Acts

A person who, willfully or negligently, unlawfully injures the life, body, health, liberty, property or any right of another person, is said to commit a wrongful act and is bound to make compensation therefore.

Section 421. Self Defense

The exercise of a right which can only have the purpose of causing injury to another person is unlawful.

Section 422. Damage Resulting from Violation of Law

If damage results from an infringement of a statutory provision intended for the protection of others, the person who so infringes is presumed to be in fault.

Section 423. Slander and Libel

A person who, contrary to the truth, asserts or circulates as a fact that which injurious to the reputation or the credit of another or his earnings or prosperity in any other manner, shall compensate the other for any damage arising therefrom, even if he does not know of its untruth, provided he ought to know it.

A person who makes a communication the untruth of which is unknown to him, does not thereby render himself liable to make compensation, if he or the receiver of the communication has a rightful interest in it.

Section 424. Civil Liability vs. Criminal Liability

The Court, when given judgment as to the liability for wrongful act and the amount of compensation, shall not be bound by the provisions of the criminal law concerning liability to punishment or by the conviction or non-conviction of the wrongdoer for a criminal offence.

Section 425. Employer Liability

An employer is jointly liable with his employee for the consequences of a wrongful act committed by such an employee in the course of his employment.

Section 426. Employee Reimbursement to Employer

The employer who has made compensation to a third person for a wrongful act committed by his employee is entitled to reimbursement from such employee.

Section 427. Principal and Agent

The two foregoing sections shall apply mutatis mutandis to principal and agent.

Section 428. Non-Liability for Torts of Contractor

An employer is not liable for damage done by the contractor to a third person in the course of the work, unless the employer was at fault in regard to the word ordered or to his instructions or to the selection of the contractor.

Section 429. Everyone is Liable for their Torts

A person, even though incapacitated, on account of minority or unsoundness of mind is liable for the consequences of his wrongful act. The parents of such person are, or his guardian is, jointly liable with him, unless they or he can prove that proper care in performing their or his duty of supervision has been extended.

Section 430. Joint Liability if Improperly Supervised

A teacher, employer or other person who undertakes the supervision of an incapacitated person either permanently or temporarily, is jointly liable with such person for any wrongful act committed by the latter whilst under his supervision, provided that it can be proved that he has not exercised proper care.

Section 431

In case falling under the two forgoing sections the provisions of Section 426 apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 432. Jointly Bound to make Compensation

If several persons by a joint wrongful act cause damage to another person, they are jointly bound to make compensation for the damage. The same applies if, among several joint doers of an act, the one who caused the damage cannot be ascertained.

Persons who instigate or assist in a wrongful act are deemed to be joint actors.

As between themselves the persons jointly bound to make compensation are liable in equal shares unless, under the circumstances, the Court otherwise decides.

Section 433. Liability for Animal

If damage is caused by an animal, the owner, or the person who undertakes to keep the animal on behalf of the owner, is bound to compensate the injured party for any damage arising therefrom, unless he can prove that he has exercised proper care in keeping it according to its species and nature or other circumstances, or that the damage would have been occasioned notwithstanding the exercise of such care.

The person responsible under the foregoing paragraph may exercise a right of recourse against the person who has wrongfully excited or provoked the animal or against the owner of another animal which has caused the excitement or provocation.

Section 434. Liability for Defective Building or Structure

If damage is caused by reason of the defective construction or insufficient maintenance of a building or other structure, the possessor of such building or structure is bound to make compensation, but if the possessor has used proper care to prevent the happening of the damage, the owner is bound to make compensation.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph apply correspondingly to defects in the planting or propping of trees or bamboos.

If in cases of the foregoing two paragraphs there is also some other person who is responsible for the cause of the damage, the possessor or owner may exercise a right of recourse against such person.

Section 435. Forcing Building Owner to Make Repairs

A person who is threatened with an injury from a building or other structure belonging to another is entitled to require the latter to make necessary measures for averting the danger.

Section 436. Liability for Falling Items from Inside the Building

An occupier of a building is responsible for damage arising from things which fall from it or are thrown into an improper place.

Section 437. Automobile Accidents

A person is responsible for injury caused by any conveyance propelled by mechanism which is in his possession or control, unless he proves that the injury results from force majeure or fault of the injured person.

The same applies to the person who has in his possession things dangerous by nature of destination or on account of their mechanical action.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE V
TORTS
CHAPTER II

Compensation for Wrongful Acts

Section 438. Compensation

The Court shall determine the manner and the extent of the compensation according to the circumstances and the gravity of the wrongful act.

Compensation may include restitution of the property of which the injured person has been wrongfully deprived or its value as well as damages for any injury caused.

Section 439. Responsibility for Accidental Destruction

A person who is bound to return a thing of which he has deprived another by a wrongful act is also responsible for the accidental destruction of the thing, or for accidental impossibility of returning it arising from any other cause, or for its accidental deterioration, unless destruction or the impossibility of returning it or the deterioration would have happened even if the wrongful act had not been committed.

Section 440. Interest for lost time in Addition to Property Value

If on account of the taking of a thing its value, or, on account of damage to a thing, its diminution in value is to be made good, the injured party may demand interest on the amount to be made good from the time which serves as the basis for the estimate of the value.

Section 441. Compensation to an Unknown Third Party Owner

If a person bound to make compensation for any damage on account of the taking or damaging of a movable compensates the person whose possession the thing was at the time of taking or damage, he is discharged by so doing even if a third party was the owner of the thing, or had some other right in the thing, unless the right of the third party is known to him or remains unknown in consequence of gross negligence.

Section 442. Partial Fault of Injured Party

If any fault of the injured party has contributed in causing the injury, the provisions of Section 223 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 443. Funeral Expenses

In the cause of causing death, compensation shall include funeral and other necessary expenses.

If death did not ensue immediately, compensation shall include in particular expenses for medical treatment and damages for the loss of earning on account of disability to work.

If on account of the death any person has been deprived of his legal support, he is entitled to compensation therefore.

Section 444. Lost Wages

In the case of an injury to the body or health, the injured person is entitled to receive reimbursement of his expenses and damages for total or partial disability to work, for the present as well as for the future.

If at the time of giving judgment it is impossible to ascertain the actual consequences of the injury, the Court may reserve in the judgment the right to revise such judgment for a period not exceeding two years.

Section 445. Compensation of Third Person for Loss of Service

In the case of causing death, or of causing injury to the body or health of another, or in the case of deprivation of liberty, if the injured person was bound by law to perform service in favor of a third person in his household or industry, the person bound to make compensation shall compensate the third person for the loss of such service.

Section 446. Non-Pecuniary Loss

In the case of injury to the body or health of another, or in the case of deprivation of liberty, the injured person may also claim compensation for the damage which is non-pecuniary loss. The claim is not transferable, and does not pass to the heirs, unless it has been acknowledged by contract, or on action on it has been commenced.

Section 447. Compensation for Loss of Reputation

Against a person who has injured the reputation of another, the Court may, on the application of the injured person, or order proper measures to be taken for the rehabilitation of the latter’s reputation, instead of, or together with, compensation damages.

Section 448. Statute of Limitations

The claim for damages arising from wrongful act is barred by prescription after one year from the day when the wrongful act and the person bound to make compensation became known to the injured person, or ten years from the day when the wrongful act was committed.

However if the damages are claimed on account of an act punishable under the criminal law for which a longer prescription is provided such longer prescription shall apply.

(top)

OBLIGATIONS
TITLE V
TORTS
CHAPTER III

Justifiable Acts

Section 449. Self Defense

A person who, acting in lawful defense or under a lawful command, has caused injury to any other person is not liable to make compensation.

The injured person can claim compensation from the person against whom the lawful defense was directed, or from the person who wrongfully gave the command, as the case may be.

Section 450. Avert Common Danger

If a person damages or destroys a thing in order to avert an immediate common danger, he is not liable to make compensation, provided the damage done is not out of proportion to the danger.

If a person damages or destroys a thing in order to avert an immediate individual danger, he shall make restitution therefore.

If a person damages or destroys a thing in order to protect the rights of himself or of a third person against immediate danger threatened by the thing itself, such person is not liable to make compensation, provided the damage done is not out of proportion to the danger. If the danger was caused by such person’s fault he is liable to make compensation.

Section 451. Use of Force Only Allowed when Necessary and Reasonable

A person who uses force for protecting his right is not liable to make compensation if under the circumstances the help the Court or of the proper authorities is not obtainable in due time and there is danger that, if he does not act immediately, the realization of his right will be frustrated or seriously impeded.

The using of force according to the foregoing paragraph must be strictly limited to that which is necessary for adverting the danger.

If any person does the act specified in the first paragraph under the erroneous assumption that the necessary conditions exist to render his act lawful, he is liable to make compensation to the other person, even if the error was not due to his negligence.

Section 452. Notice must be provided before taking Animals

A possessor of an immovable property is entitled to seize animals belonging to another person which cause injury on such property and retain them as security for any compensation which may be due to him, he is even entitled to kill them if it is necessary under the circumstances.

However he must give notice without delay to the owner of the animals. If the owner could not be found the person seizing must take proper measures to seek him out.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE I
SALE
CHAPTER I
NATURE AND ESSENTIALS OF THE CONTRACT OF SALE

General Provisions

Section 453. Sale

Sale is a contract whereby a person, called the seller, transfers to another person, called the buyer, the ownership of property, and the buyer agrees to pay to the seller a price for it.

Section 454. Reasonable Time to Respond to Sale

A previous promise of sale made by one party has the effect of a sale only when the other party has given notice of his intention to complete the sale and such notice has reached the person who made the promise.

If no time has been fixed in the promise for such notification, the person who made the promise may fix a reasonable time and notify the other party to give a definite answer within that time whether he will complete the sale or not. If within that time he does not give a definite answer, the previous promise loses its effect.

Section 455. Time of Sale

The time of the completion of the contract of sale is referred to hereafter as the time of sale.

Section 456. Sales of Immovable Property Requirements

A sale of immovable property is void unless it is made in writing and registered by the competent official. The same rule applies to ships or vessels of six tons and over, to steam launches or motor boats of five tons and over, to floating houses and to beasts of burden. (Car sales, homes, farm animals)

An agreement to sell or to buy any of the aforesaid property, or a promise of sale of such property is not enforceable by action unless there is some written evidence signed by the party liable or unless earnest is given, or there is part performance.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph shall apply to a contract of sale of movable property where the agreed price is five hundred baht or upwards.

Section 457. Cost of Sale

The costs of a contract of sale are borne by both parties equally.

(top)

Transfer of Ownership

Section 458. Transfer of Ownership

The ownership of the property sold is transferred to the buyer from the moment when the contract of sale is entered into.

Section 459. Time Clause

If a contract of sale is subject to a condition or to a time clause’, the ownership of the property is not transferred until the condition is fulfilled, or the time has arrived.

Section 460. Sale of Unascertained Property

In case of sale of unascertained property, the ownership is not transferred until the property has been numbered, counted, weighed, measured or selected, or its identity has been otherwise rendered certain.

In case of sale of specific property, if the seller is bound to count, weigh, measure or do some other act or thing with reference to the property for the purpose of ascertaining the price, the ownership is not transferred to the buyer until such act or thing be done.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE I
SALE
CHAPTER II
DUTIES AND LIABILITIES OF THE SELLER

Delivery

Section 461. Delivery

The seller is bound to deliver to the buyer the property sold.

Section 462. Definition of Delivery

Delivery may be made by doing anything which has the effect of putting the property at the disposal of the buyer.

Section 463. Delivery through Carrier

If the contract provides that the property sold shall be sent from one place to another, delivery takes place at the moment when the property is delivered to the carrier.

Section 464. Cost of Transportation borne by Buyer

The costs of transportation of the property sold to a place other than the place of performance are to be borne by the buyer.

Section 465. In a sale of movable property:

  1. Where the seller delivers the property less than he contracted for, the buyer may reject it; but if the buyer accepts it, he must pay the proportionate price.
  2. Where the seller delivers the property more than he contracted for, the buyer may accept the property according to the contract and reject the rest, or he may reject the whole. If the buyer accepts the whole of the property so delivered, he must pay the proportionate price.
  3. Where the seller delivers the property he contracted for mixed with the property of a different description not included in the contract, the buyer may accept the property according to the contract and reject the rest, or he may reject the whole.

Section 466. Imperfect Performance

In a sale of immovable property where the total area is specified and the seller delivers the property less or more than he contracted for, the buyer has the option either to reject or accept it and pay the proportionate price.

If the deficiency or excess does not exceed five per cent of the total area so specified the buyer is bound to accept it and pay the proportionate price, provided that the buyer can rescind the contract if the deficiency or excess is such that had he known of it he would not have entered into the contract.

Section 467. Statute of Limitations for Imperfect Delivery

No action for liability on account of deficiency or excess can be entered later than one year after delivery.

Section 468. No Time Clause – Seller can hold property until Payment

When there is no time clause for payment of the price, the seller is entitled to retain the property sold until the price is paid.

Section 469. Bankruptcy Before Delivery

Even though there is a time clause for payment, if the buyer becomes bankrupt before delivery, or was bankrupt at the time of sale without the knowledge of the seller, or impairs or reduces security given for payment, the seller is entitled to retain the property sold, unless the buyer gives proper security.

Section 470. Buyer Defaults

When the buyer is in default, the seller who retains the property under the foregoing sections can, instead of using the ordinary remedies for non-performance, notify the buyer in writing to pay the price and incidental charges, within a reasonable time to be fixed in the notice.

If the buyer fails to comply with the notice, the seller can sell the property by public auction.

Section 471. Public Auction

The seller shall deduct from the net proceeds of the public auction what is due to him for the price and incidental charges and deliver forthwith any surplus to the buyer.

(top)

Liability for Defect

Section 472. Liability for Defect

In case of any defect in the property sold which impairs either its value or its fitness for ordinary purposes, or for the purposes of the contract, the seller is liable.

The foregoing provision applies whether the seller knew or did not know of the existence of the defect.

Section 473. The seller is not liable in the following cases:

  1. If the buyer knew of the defect at the time of sale, or would have known of it if he had exercised such care as might be expected from a person of ordinary prudence.
  2. If the defect was apparent at the time of the delivery, and the buyer accepts the property without reservation.
  3. If the property was sold by public auction.

Section 474. Statute of Limitation for Defect

No action for liability for defect can be entered later than one year after the discovery of the defect.

(top)

Liability for Eviction

Section 475. Seller liable over Ownership Questions

The seller is liable for the consequences of any disturbance caused to the peaceful possession of the buyer by any person having over the property sold a right existing at the time of sale or by the fault of the seller.

Section 476. No Liability if Ownership Questions are known

The seller is not liable for a disturbance caused by a person whose rights were known to the buyer at the time of sale.

Section 477. Right to Bring the Seller as a Joint Defendant

In any case of disturbance where an action arises between the buyer and a third person, the buyer is entitled to summon the seller to appear in the action to be joint defendant or joint plaintiff with the buyer, in order to enable the Court to settle disputes between all the parties to them in one action.

Section 478. Seller Right to Deny Claim of Third Person

The seller is also entitled; if he thinks proper, to intervene in the action in order to deny the claim of the third person.

Section 479. Seller liability if Buyer is deprived of Property

The seller is liable if, by reason of eviction, the buyer is deprived of the whole or part of the property sold or if the property is subject to a right, the existence of which impairs its value, fitness, use or benefit and of which the buyer had no knowledge at the time of sale.

Section 480. Immovable Property

If an immovable property is declared to be subject to a servitude established by law, the seller is not liable unless he has expressly guaranteed that the property was free from servitudes, or from that particular servitude.

Section 481. Statute of Limitations

If the seller was not a party to the original action, or if the buyer has made a compromise with the third person, or has yielded to his claim, no action for liability on account of eviction can be entered later than three months after final judgment in the original action, or after the date of the compromise, or of the yielding to the third person.

Section 482. The seller is not liable for eviction in the following cases:

  1. If no action was entered, and the seller proves that the rights of the buyer were lost on account of the fault of the buyer, or
  2. If the buyer did not summon the seller to appear in the action, and the seller proves that he would have succeeded in the action if summoned to appear, or
  3. If the seller appeared in the action, but the claim of the buyer was dismissed on account of the fault of the buyer.

In any case the seller is liable whenever he is summoned to appear in the action and refuses to take the part of the buyer as joint defendant or joint plaintiff.

(top)

Clause for Non-Liability

Section 483. Agreement for Non-Liability

The parties to a contract of sale may agree that the seller shall not incur any liability for defects or eviction.

Section 484. Exemptions from Repayment

Unless the non-liability clause specifies otherwise, such clause does not exempt the seller from the repayment of the price.

Section 485. Non-Liability cannot exempt Seller from consequences of his own acts or concealments

A non-liability clause cannot exempt the seller from the consequences of his own acts or of facts which he knew and concealed.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE I
SALE
CHAPTER III

Section 486. Buyer’s Duties

The buyer is bound to take delivery of the property sold and to pay the price in accordance with the terms of the contract of sale.

Section 487. Price

The price of the property sold may be fixed by the contract, or may be left to be fixed in manner thereby agreed, or may be determined by the course of dealing between the parties.

When the price is not determined as aforesaid, the buyer must pay a reasonable price.

Section 488. Defect

If the buyer has discovered defects in the property sold, he is entitled to withhold the price or part of it still unpaid, unless the seller gives proper security.

Section 489. Withholding Payment

The buyer is also entitled to withhold the price wholly or partly, if he is threatened, or has good reason to believe that he is about to be threatened, with an action by a mortgagee or by a person claiming the property sold, until the seller has caused the danger with which he is threatened to cease, or until the seller has given proper security.

Section 490. Fixed Payment Time

If a time is fixed for the delivery of the property sold, it is presumed that the same time is fixed for the payment of the price.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE I
SALE
CHAPTER IV

Section 491. Sale with the Right of Redemption

Sale with right of redemption is a contract of sale whereby the ownership of the property sold passes to the buyer subject to an agreement that the seller can redeem that property.

Section 492. Ownership Transfer After Redemption

Where the property sold is redeemed within the period fixed by the contract or by law, or where the person who redeems deposits the price of redemption to a deposit office within the period by waiving the right to withdraw the price, the ownership of the property shall be vested in the person who redeems from the time of payment or deposit of the price, as the case may be.

In the case of deposit under paragraph one, an official of the deposit office shall immediately give notice of it to the redeemed person, whereby the person who redeems does not have to comply with Section 333 paragraph three.

Section 493. Agreement not to Sell

The parties may agree that the buyer shall not dispose of the property sold. If he disposes of it contrary to his agreement, he shall be liable to the seller for any injury resulting thereby.

Section 494. The right of redemption cannot be exercised later than:

  1. Ten years after the time of the sale in case of immovable property.
  2. Three years after the time of sale in case of movable property.

Section 495. Right of Redemption cannot be longer than allowed by law

If a longer period is provided in the contract, it shall be reduced to ten years and three years respectively.

Section 496. Extension of Redemption Period Limits

The period of redemption may be afterward extended by a contract, but if the total period is in excess of the period under Section 494, it shall be reduced to the period under Section 494.

The extension of the period under paragraph one must, at least, have some written evidence signed by the redeemed person. In case of the property whose sale must be made in writing and registered by the competent official, the extension cannot be set up against a third person who has, for value and in good faith, acquired and registered his right unless such writing or written evidence is registered or recorded by the competent official.

Section 497. The right of redemption may be exercised only by:

  1. The original seller or his heirs, or
  2. The transferee of the right, or
  3. Any person expressly allowed to redeem by a contract.

Section 498. The right of redemption may be exercised only against:

  1. The original buyer
  2. The transferee of the property or of a right on the property, provided that, in case of movable property, he knew at the time of the transfer that such property was subject to a right of redemption.

Section 499. No Redemption Price

If no price of redemption is fixed, the property may be redeemed by reimbursing the price of the sale.

If the price of redemption or the price of the sale, at the time of redemption, is higher than the real price of the sale more than fifteen percent per year, it shall be redeemed at a real price including fifteen percent per year of profit.

Section 500. Cost of Sale

Costs of the sale borne by the buyer must be reimbursed together with the price.

Costs of redemption are borne by the person who redeems.

Section 501. Return of Property

The property must be returned in the condition in which it is at the time of redemption, provided that if the property has been destroyed or deteriorated through the fault of the buyer he must pay compensation therefore.

Section 502. Redemption Free of Any Rights

The person who redeems the property recovers it free from any rights created by the original buyer or his heirs or transferee before redemption.

If a hire of property held subject to a right of redemption is registered by the competent official, it shall be valid for not more than one year of its remaining duration, provided that it is not made for the purpose of injuring the seller.

(top)

Section 503. Sale by Sample

In a sale by sample, the seller is bound to deliver property or properties corresponding to the sample.

In a sale by description, the seller is bound to deliver property corresponding to the description.

Section 504. Statute of Limitations

No action for liability on account of non-correspondence to the sample or description can be entered later than one year after delivery.

Section 505. Sale on Approval

A sale on approval is the selling contract that the buyer having an option to buy when verifying the buying property.

Section 506. Verifying Property

To verify the property, if there is no buying deadline, the seller may specify the reasonable deadline period and give a notice to the buyer to accept or reject the buying or not.

Section 507. No Contract if Buyer does not Verify Property before Deadline

The property that the buyer having option to verify before delivery, if the buyer does not accept it within the deadline stated in the contract or commercial practice or deadline setting by the seller, the selling contract is unbound.

Section 508. When the property is delivered to the buyer for verifying, the selling and the buying shall be absolutely completed in the following cases:

  1. If the buyer does not reject the purchasing within deadline specified in the contract or by commercial practice or setting by the seller; or
  2. If the buyer does not return the property to the seller within the said deadline; or
  3. If the buyer fully uses all the property or in some parts; or
  4. If the buyer sells the property or makes any buying signals.

Section 509. Auction

The auction shall be completed when the auctioneer accepts the final price by knocking the wood hammer or any practical acts in auction; otherwise the bidder can withdraw his bid in anytime.

Section 510. Bidding Procedure

During bidding process, the bidder must comply with the bidding procedure that the auctioneer has announced in each bidding.

Section 511. Auctioneer Cannot Bid on Property

The auctioneer cannot make a bid or let any person to make a bid for his own benefit that he is control the bidding process.

Section 512. Seller Cannot Bid on Own Property unless allowed in terms

The seller cannot make a bid or let any person to make a bid, except specified in the bidding terms and conditions that the seller has the right to bid.

Section 513. Withdraw of Property if Price is too Low

If the auctioneer thinks that the bidding price is not high enough, he may withdraw the said property auction.

Section 514. Higher Bids

The bidder shall be unbound from his bid when other person offers a higher bidding price, even though the said bidding is complete or not, or when the auctioneer withdraws the said property auction.

Section 515. Cash Payment

Bidder who offers the highest bidding price must pay in cash when the auction is complete or the deadline specified in the bidding advertising.

Section 516. If Winning Bidder does not Pay

If the bidder who offers the highest bidding price does not pay the money, the auctioneer may renew the auction. If the renew bidding price is lower than the previous one, such default bidder must liable for the short.

Section 517. Liability of Auctioneer

If some or all of the proceed from auction is unpaid that the cause comes from the ignorance of the auctioneer under Section 515 or Section 516, the auctioneer is liable for the unpaid amount.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE II
EXCHANGE

Section 518. Exchange

Exchange is the contract that both parties transfer the right of ownership to each other.

Section 519. Selling and Buying

In any provisions of the laws relating to the selling and buying, the exchange is also included in such provision by implying that both parties are seller and buyer for such transfer of such properties.

Section 520. Additional Cash Payments During Exchange

If any exchanging party accepts to add money with the exchange of property to another, the selling price shall include such additional cash payment too.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE III
GIFT

Section 521. Gift

A gift is a contract whereby a person. Called the donor, transfers gratuitously a property of his own to another person, called the donee, and the donee accepts such property.

Section 522. Gift by Release of Obligation or Performance

A gift may be made by granting to the donee the release of an obligation or by performing an obligation due from the donee.

Section 523. Validity

A gift is valid only on delivery of the property given.

Section 524. Rights in Written Format

If a right represented by a written instrument is given, the gift is not valid unless such instrument is delivered to the donee and the gift is notified in writing to the debtor of the right.

Section 525. Gift of Property must be Registered

The gift of a property the sale of which must be made in writing and registered by such competent official is valid only when so made and registered by the competent official. In such case it is valid without delivery.

Section 526. Limit of Claim

If a gift or a promise for a gift has been made in writing and registered by the competent official and the donor does not deliver to the donee the property given, the donee is entitled to claim the delivery of it or its value, but he is not entitled to any additional compensation.

Section 527. Periodical Performance Extinguished upon Death

If a donor binds himself to make periodical performance the obligation is extinguished on the death either of the donor or the donee unless a contrary intention appears from the obligation.

Section 528. Demand for Return of Gift for Non-Performance

If the gift is encumbered with a charge and the donee fails to perform the charge, the donor may, under the conditions specified for the right of rescission in the case of reciprocal contracts, demand the return of the gift under the provisions relating to the return of undue enrichment in so far as the gift ought to have been applied to the performance of the change.

This claim is barred if a third party is entitled to require the performance of the charge.

Section 529. Insufficient Property Value

If the property given is not sufficient to satisfy the charge, the donee has to perform only to the extent of the value of the property.

Section 530. Liability for Encumbrances

If the gift encumbered with a charge, the donor is liable for defect or eviction in the same manner as the seller but only to the extent of the charge.

Section 531. Revocation of Gift for Ingratitude

The donor can claim revocation of a gift for an act of ingratitude only in the following cases.

  1. If the donee committed a serious criminal offence punishable under the Penal Code against the donor, or
  2. If the donee seriously defamed or insulted the donor, or
  3. If the donee refused the donor who is in need of the necessaries of life while he was able to supply them.

Section. 532. Heir Revocation if Donee Killed Donor

The heir of the donor can claim revocation only if the donee has intentionally and unlawfully killed the donor or prevented him from revoking the gift.

However, the heir may continue an action which has been duly entered by the donor.

Section 533. Statute of Limitation for Revocation

A gift cannot be revoked if the donor has forgiven the donee, or if six months have elapsed since the time when the act of ingratitude came to knowledge of the person entitled to claim revocation.

No action can be claimed later than ten years after such act.

Section 534. Revocation = Undue enrichment

If the gift is revoked, the property shall be returned under the provisions of this Code concerning Undue Enrichment.

Section 535. Irrevocable Gifts

The following gifts are not revocable for ingratitude:

  1. Gifts purely remuneration
  2. Gifts encumbered with a charge
  3. Gifts made in compliance with a moral duty
  4. Gifts made in consideration of marriage

Section 536. Inheritance and Wills

A gift to take effect at the death of the donor is governed by the provisions of Law concerning Inheritance and Wills.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE IV
RENTING PROPERTY
Chapter I

General Provisions

Section 537. Renting or Leasing Property

A hire of property is a contract whereby a person, called the letter, agrees to let another person, called the hirer, have the use or benefit of a property for a limited period of time and the hirer agrees to pay rent therefore.

Section 538. Renting Property

A hire of immovable property is not enforceable by action unless there be some written evidence signed by the party liable. If the hire is for more than three years or for the life of the letter or hirer, it is enforceable only for three years unless it is made in writing and registered by the competent official.

Section 539. Contract Costs

Costs of a contract of hire are borne by both parties equally.

Section 540. Lease cannot exceed 30 years

The duration of a hire of immovable property cannot exceed thirty years. If it is made for a longer period, such period shall be reduced to thirty years. The aforesaid period may be renewed, but it must not exceed thirty years from the time of renewal.

Section 541. Contract

Contract of hire may be made for the duration of the life of the letter or of the hirer

Section 542

When several persons claim the same movable property under different contracts of hire, the hirer who has first taken possession of the property by virtue of his contract shall be preferred.

Section 543. Multiple Claims for Same Property

When several persons claim the same immovable property under different contracts of hire:

  1. If none of the contracts is required by law to be registered, the hirer who has first taken possession of the property by virtue of his contract shall be preferred.
  2. If all the contracts are required by law to be registered, the hirer whose contract was first registered shall be preferred.
  3. If there is a conflict between a contract which is required by law, and a contract which is not required by law, to be registered, the hirer whose contract has been registered shall be preferred, unless the other hirer has taken possession of the property by virtue of his contract before the date of registration.

Section 544. No subletting or transfer to third person without authorization

Unless otherwise provided by the contract of hire, a hirer cannot sublet or transfer his rights in the whole or part of the property hired to a third person.

Section 545. Authorization to Sublet

If the hirer rightfully sublets the property hired, the sub-hirer is directly liable to the lessor. In such case a payment of rent made in advance by the sub-hirer to the hirer who sublets cannot be set up against the letter.

The provisions does not prevent the lessor from exercising his rights against the hirer.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE IV
RENTING PROPERTY
Chapter II

Duties and liabilities of the letter

Section 546. Return of Property

The lessor is bound to deliver the property hired in a good state of repair.

Section 547. Reimbursement of Necessary and Reasonable Expenses

The lessor is bound to reimburse to the hirer any necessary and reasonable expenses incurred by him for the preservation of the property hired, except expenses for ordinary maintenance and petty repairs

Section 548. Property Not Suitable for Purpose

In case of delivery of the property hired in a condition not suitable for the purpose for which it is let, the hirer may terminate the contract.

Section 549. Liability for Defects

The delivery of the property hired, the liability of the lessor in case of defects and eviction and the effects of a non-liability clause are governed by the provisions of this Code concerning sale, mutatis mutandis.

Section 550. Liability for Defects during the Contract

The lessor is liable for any defects which arise during the continuance of the contract and he must make all the repairs which may become necessary, except those which are by law or custom to be done by the hirer.

Section 551. Correction of Defect with Notice

If the defect is not such as would deprive the hirer of the use and benefit of the property hired, and can be remedied by the lessor, the hirer must first notify the lessor to make it good. If the defect is not made good within a reasonable time, the hirer may terminate the contract provided the defect is serious enough to justify this course.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE IV
RENTING PROPERTY
Chapter III

Duties and liabilities of the hirer

Section 552. Ordinary and Usual Use of Property

The hirer cannot use the property hired for the purpose other than those which are ordinary and usual, or which have been provided in the contract.

Section 553. Prudent Care of Property

The hirer is bound to take as much care of the property hired as a person of ordinary prudence would take of his own property, and to do ordinary maintenance and petty repairs.

Section 554. Notification to Hirer of Non-compliance with Contract

If the hirer act contrary to the provision of Sections 552, 553 or contrary to the terms of the contract, the lessor may notify the hirer to comply with such provisions or terms, and if the hirer fails to comply, the letter may terminate the contract.

Section 555. Lessor has right to Inspect Property

The hirer is bound to allow the lessor or his agents to inspect the property hired at reasonable times.

Section 556. Lessor Right to Make Repairs

If the property hired requires urgent repairs during the continuance of the contract, and if the lessor desires to do an act necessary for such repairs, the hirer cannot refuse permission to have such act done, though it may cause him inconvenience.

However, if the repairs are of such nature as would take unreasonable length of time and thereby cause the property unsuitable for the purpose for which it is let, the hirer may terminate the contract.

Section 557. Failure to Provide Notice

In any of the following cases:

  • If the property hired is in need of repairs by the lessor, or
  • If a preventive measure is required for avoiding a danger, or
  • If a third person encroaches on the property hired or claims a right over it, the hirer shall forthwith inform the letter of occurrence, unless the lessor already has knowledge of it

If the hirer fails to comply with this provision, he is liable to the lessor for any injury resulting from the delay occasioned by such failure.

Section 558. Notice Required Prior to Make Alternations

The hirer may not make alterations in, or addition to, the property hired without the permission of the lessor. If he does so without such permission, he must, on request of the letter, restore the property to its former condition, and he is liable to the letter for any loss or damage that may result from such alteration or addition.

Section 559. Time for Rent Payment

If no time for payment of rent is fixed by the contract or by custom, the rent must be paid at the end of each period for which it is stipulated, that is to say: if a property is hired at so much per year, the rent is payable at the end of each year, if a property is hired at so much per month, the rent is payable at the end of each month.

Section 560. Non-Payment of Rent

In case of non-payment of rent, the letter may terminate the contract. But, if the rent is payable at monthly or longer intervals, the letter must first notify the hirer that payment is required within a period not less than fifteen days.

Section 561. Presumption of Property in Good State

If no written description of the condition of the property hired has been made and signed by both parties, the hirer is presumed to have received the property in good state of repair and he must return the property in such condition at the termination or extinction of the contract, unless he can prove that it was out of repair at the time of delivery.

Section 562. Responsibility for Sub-Lessee

The hirer is liable for any loss or damage caused to the property hired by his own fault or by the fault of persons living with him or being his sub-hirer.

But he is not liable for loss or damage resulting from proper use.

Section 563. Statute of Limitations

No action by the letter against the hirer in connection with the contract of hire can be entered later than six months after the return of the property hired.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE IV
RENTING PROPERTY
Chapter IV

Extinction of Contract of Hire

Section 564. End of Contract

A contract of hire is extinguished at the end of the agreed period without notice.

Section 565. Farm Land Rental Period

A hire of garden land is presumed to be made for one year. A hire of paddy land is presumed to be made for the agricultural year.

Section 566. If no period set, one rent period notice is required

If no period is agreed upon or presumed, either party may terminate the contract of hire at the end of each period for the payment of rent, provided that notice of at least one rent period is given, but no more than two months’ notice need be given.

Section 567. Loss of Property

If the whole of the property hired is lost, the contract is extinguished.

Section 568. Loss of Part of Property – Reduction in Rent

If part only of the property hired is lost without the fault of the hirer, he may claim that the rent be reduced in portion to the part lost.

If in such case the hirer cannot with the remaining part accomplish the purpose for which he entered the contract of hire, he may terminate.

Section 569. Transfer of Property does not terminate rental contract

A contract of hire of immovable property is not extinguished by the transfer of ownership of the property hired.

The transferee is entitled to the rights and is subjected to the duties of the transferor towards the hirer.

Section 570. Staying at Property at the end of the Contract

If, at the end of the agreed period, the hirer remains in possession of the property and the lessor knowing thereof does not object, the parties are deemed to have renewed the contract for an indefinite period.

Section 571. Renter for Farm Land can stay at the property until harvest but must pay rent

If a contract of hire of paddy land is terminated or extinguished after the hirer has planted the paddy, the hirer is entitled to remain in the possession till the harvest is finished, but he must pay rent.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE V
HIRE-PURCHASE

Section 572. Lease – Purchase

A hire-purchase is a contract whereby an owner of a property lets it out on hire and promises to sell it to, or that it shall become the property of, the hirer, conditionally on his making a certain number of payments.

The contract of hire-purchase is void unless made in writing.

Section 573. Return of Property Prior to Purchase

The hirer may at any time terminate the contract by redelivering the property at his own expense to the owner.

Section 574. Termination Contract After Material Breach or 2 Missed Payments

The owner may also terminate the contract in case of default of two successive payments, or breach of any material part of the contract; in which case all previous payments are forfeited to the owner who is entitled to resume possession of the property.

In case of breach of contract by default of the last payment, the owner is entitled to forfeit previous payment and resume possession of the property only after the expiration of one instalment period.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS TITLE VI HIRE OF SERVICES

Section 575. Employee

A hire of services is a contract whereby a person, called the employee, agrees to render services to another person, called the employer, who agrees to pay remuneration for the duration of the services.

Section 576. Promise to Pay Remuneration Implied

The promise to pay a remuneration is implied, if, under the circumstances if cannot be expected that the services are to be rendered gratuitously.

Section 577. Consent Required to Transfer Rights

The employer may transfer his right to a third person with the consent of the employee. The employee may have a third person render the services in his place with the consent of the employer. If either party acts contrary to this provision, the other party may terminate the contract.

Section 578. Special Requirements for Employment

If the employee either expressly or impliedly warrants special skill on his part, the absence of such skill entitles the employer to terminate the contract.

Section 579. Short Absences from Employment

Absence of the employee from service for a reasonable cause and during a reasonably short period does not entitle the employer to terminate the contract.

Section 580. No fixed time period for remuneration

If no time for payment of remuneration is fixed by the contract or by custom, the remuneration is payable after the services have been rendered; if fixed by periods, the remuneration is payable at the end of each period.

Section 581. End of Agreed Period, without termination, new period beings

If after the end of the agreed period the employee continues to render services and the employer knowing thereof does not object, the parties are presumed to have made a new contract of hire on the same terms, but either party can terminate the contract by giving notice in accordance with the following section.

Section 582. Notice for Ending Contract

If the parties have not fixed the duration of the contract, either party can terminate it by giving notice at or before any time of payment to take effect at the following time of payment. But no more than three-month notice need be given. The employer can, on giving such notice, immediately dispense with the services of the employee by paying him his remuneration up to the expiration of the notice.

Section 583. Gross Misconduct

If the employee wilfully disobeys or habitually neglects the lawful commands of his employer, absents himself for services, is guilty of gross misconduct, or otherwise acts in a manner incompatible with the due and faithful discharge of his duty, he may be dismissed by the employer without notice or compensation.

Section 584. Death of Employer

If a hire of services is one in which the personality of the employer forms an essential part such contract is extinguished by the death of the employer.

Section 585. Requirements for Employment Certificate

If a hire of services comes to an end, the employee is entitled to a certificate as to the length and nature of his services.

Section 586. Pay for Cost of Return Journey after Termination

If the employee has been brought from elsewhere at the expense of the employer, the employer is bound, when the hire of service comes to an end, unless otherwise provided in the contract, to pay the cost of the return journey, provided that:
  1. The contract has not been terminated or extinguished by reason of the act or fault of the employee, and
  2. The employee returns within a reasonable time to the place from which he has been brought.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE VII
HIRE OF WORK

Section 587. Contract Labor

The hire of work is a contract whereby a person, called contractor, agrees to accomplish a definite work for another person, called employer, who agrees to pay him a remuneration of the result of the work.

Section 588. Contractor Responsible for Tools

Tools or instruments which are necessary for the execution of the work are to be supplied by the contractor.

Section 589. Contractor Responsible for Good Quality Materials

If the materials for the work are to be supplied by the contractor, the contractor shall supply material in good quality.

Section 590. Return of Surplus

If the materials are to be supplied by the employer, the contractor shall use them carefully and without waste. He shall return the surplus after work is completed.

Section 591. If Delay caused by Employer’s materials…

If the defect or the delay of the work originates from the nature of the material supplied by the employer, or from instruction given by him, the contractor is not liable, unless the contractor knew of the unfitness of the materials or the impropriety of instructions, and did not give notice of it.

Section 592. Inspection of Work

The contractor is bound to allow the employer or his agents to inspect the work during its execution.

Section 593. Proper Time Period to Begin Work

If the contractor does not begin to work in a proper time or delays in proceeding with it contrary to the terms of the contract, or if, without the fault of the employer, he delays to proceed with it in a such a manner that it can be foreseen that the work will not be finished within the agreed period. The employer is entitled to cancel the contract without waiting for the time agreed upon for delivery.

Section 594. Notice of Defect by Employer

When it is possible to foresee with certainty, whilst the work is proceeding, that by the fault of the contractor, the work will be executed in a defective manner or contrary to the terms of the contract, the employer may notify the contractor to make good the defect or to comply with the terms of the contract within a reasonable time to be fixed in the notice, failing which the employer is entitled to have the work repaired or continued by a third person at the risks and expenses of the contractor.

Section 595. Liability for Materials Supplied by Contractor

If the materials have been supplied by the contractor, his liability for defects is governed by the provisions of this code concerning sale.

Section 596. Late Completion Remedies

If the work is delivered after the time fixed in the contract, or if no time was fixed, after reasonable time has elapsed, the employer is entitled to a reduction of remuneration or when time is of the essence of the contract to rescission.

Section 597. Acceptance of Work without Reservation

If the employer has accepted the work without reservation, the contractor is not liable for the delay in delivery.

Section 598. Acceptance of Defective Work

If the employer has accepted a defective work either expressly or impliedly, the contractor is not liable unless the defect was such as could not be discovered when the work was accepted, or it had been concealed by the contractor.

Section 599. Right to Withhold Remuneration

In case of delay in delivery or of delivery of a defective work, the employer is entitled to withhold the remuneration unless the contractor gives proper security.

Section 600. Statute of Limitations

Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the contractor is only liable for defect appearing within one year after delivery of the work, or within five years if the work is for a structure on land other than a wooden building.

This limitation shall not apply if the contractor has concealed the defect.

Section 601. 1 Year for Defect

No action against the contractor can be entered later than one year after the defect appeared.

Section 602. Payment of Remuneration

The remuneration is payable on taking delivery of the work. If the work is to be accepted in parts and the remuneration has been specified for the several parts, the remuneration for each part is payable at the time of its acceptance.

Section 603. Destruction or Damage Prior to Delivery

If the materials have been supplied by the contractor, and the work is destroyed or damaged before due delivery, the contractor bears the loss provided that such loss is not caused by any act of the employer.

In such case no remuneration is payable.

Section 604. Damage or Destruction if Materials supplied by Employer.

If the materials have been supplied by the employer and the work is destroyed or damaged before due delivery, the employer bears the loss provided that such loss is caused by any act of the contractor.

In such case, no remuneration is payable unless the loss is caused by any act of the employer.

Section 605. Termination of Contract Prior to Completion

As long as the work is not finished, the employer can terminate the contract on making compensation to the contractor for any injury resulting from the termination of the contract.

Section 606. If Contractor Dies or is not able to complete the project

If the personal qualification of the contractor is of the essence of the contract and the contractor dies, or without his fault becomes incapable to carry on the work the contract comes to an end.

If any part of the work already done is useful to the employer, he is bound to accept it and pay a reasonable remuneration.

Section 607. Sub-Contractors

The contractor may appoint sub-contractor to work for him in all or in part, except in the major part of contract that required the ability of the contractor. The contractor is still responsible for the work and any mistake of the sub-contractor.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE VIII
CARRIAGE

Section 608 Carrier

A carrier, within the meaning of this Title, is a person who in the usual course of business undertakes to transport goods or passengers for remuneration.

Section 609 Transport of Goods or People

The carriage of goods or passengers by the Royal State Railways Department of Siam or of postal articles by the Post and Telegraph Department are governed by the Laws and Regulations concerning such Department. The carriage of goods by sea is governed by the Laws and Regulations relating thereto.

CHAPTER 1: Carriage of Goods (Trucker)

Section 610 Consigner, Consignee, and Freight

The person making an agreement with a carrier for the transportation of goods is called the sender or consignor. The person whom the goods are forwarded is called the consignee. The remuneration to be paid for the transportation of the goods is called the freight.

Section 611 Accessories of the Freight

The accessories of the freight comprise any customary expenses duly incurred by the carrier in course of transportation.

Section 612 Requirements of Way-Bill

If required by the carrier, the sender must supply him with a way-bill. The way-bill must show the following particulars:

  1. The nature of the goods sent, their weight or bulk and the nature, number and marking of the packages
  2. The place of destination
  3. The name or trade-name and address of the consignee
  4. The place where and time when the way-bill is made out
  5. The way-bill must be signed by the sender.

Section 613 Consignment Note

If required by the sender, the carrier must supply him with a consignment note. The consignment note must show the following particulars:

  1. Those mentioned in 612, subsections 1,2,and 3
  2. The name or trade-name of the sender
  3. The amount of freight
  4. The place where and the time when the consignment note is made out
  5. The consignment note must be signed by the carrier.

Section 614 Endorsement

Even though a consignment note has been made out to a named person, it can be transferred by endorsement, unless the endorsement is forbidden in the consignment note.M

Section 615 Surrender of Consignment

If a consignment note has been made, delivery can be obtained only on its surrender or on proper security being given by the consignee.

Section 616 Liability for loss during delivery

The carrier is liable for any loss, damage or delay in delivery of the goods entrusted to him, unless he proves that the loss, damage or delay is caused by force majeure or by the fault of the sender or consignee.

Section 617 Carrier liable for damage by third person

The carrier is liable for loss, damage or delay caused by the fault of the other carries or persons to whom he entrusted the goods.

Section 618 Joint Liability for Several Carriers

If the goods were transported by several carriers, they are jointly liable for loss, damage or delay.

Section 619 Declaration of Dangerous Goods

If the goods are of a dangerous nature or are likely to cause injury to persons or property, the sender must declare their nature before making the contract of carriage, failing which he shall be liable for any injury caused by them.

Section 620 Liability for Valuable Items

The carrier is not liable for specie, currency notes, bank notes, bills, bonds, shares, debentures, warrants, jewels, and other valuables, unless he is given notice of the value or nature of such goods when they are delivered to him. If their value is declared, the liability of the carrier is limited to such declared value.

Section 621 Compensation for Delay

Compensation in case of delay in delivery cannot exceed the amount which could be awarded in case of total loss of goods.

Section 622 Notification of Arrival

The carrier must notify the consignee as soon as the goods arrive.

Section 633

If the goods were transported by several carriers, the last of them can exercise the rights described in Section 630, 631, 632 for the amounts due to them all for freight and accessories.

(top)

Chapter 2: Carriage of Passengers

Section 634 Liability of Passenger Carriers

The carrier of passengers is liable to a passenger for personal injuries and for the damages immediately resulting from delay suffered by reason of the transportation, unless the injury or delay is caused by force majeure or by the fault of such passenger.

Section 635 Liability for Luggage

Luggage entrusted to the carrier in time must be delivered on the arrival of the passenger.

Section 636 One Month to pick up luggage unless it is perishable

If the passenger does not take delivery of the luggage within one month after its arrival, the carrier can sell it by public auction. If the luggage is of a perishable nature, the carrier can sell it by public auction twenty-four hours after its arrival. The provisions of section 632 apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 637 Rights and Liabilities of a Carrier

The rights and liabilities of the carrier for the luggage which has been entrusted to him are governed by Chapter I, even though the carrier did not make a separate charge for it.

Section 638 No Liability for Carrier for Luggage Not Entrusted to Them

No liability is incurred by the carrier for the luggage which has not been entrusted to him, unless such luggage is lost or damaged by the fault of the carrier or of his employees.

Section 639 Limited Liability

A provision in a ticket, receipt or such other document delivered by the carrier to the passenger excluding or limiting liability of the carrier is void, unless the passenger expressly agreed to such exclusion per limitation of liability.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE IX
LOAN

Chapter 1: Loan for Use

Section 640. Loan for Use

A loan for use is a contract whereby a person, called the lender, lets another person, called the borrower, have gratuitously the use of a property, and the borrower agrees to return it after having made use thereof.

Section 641. Delivery

A loan for use is complete only on delivery of the property lent.

Section 642. Cost of the Contract

Costs of the contract, costs of delivery of the property lent and costs of return are born by the borrower.

Section 643. Liability for Use beyond Ordinary Purposes

If the borrower uses the property lent for purposes other than ordinary purposes or purposes appearing from the contract, or lets a third person have the use of it, or keeps it longer than ought to, he is liable for any loss or damage to the property caused by force majeure unless he proves that the loss or damage would have happened in any case.

Section 644. Ordinary Care

The borrower is bound to take as much care of the property lent as a person of ordinary prudence would take of his own property.

Section 645. Termination of Contract

In any cases provided in Section 643, or if the borrower acts according to Section 644, the lender may terminate the contract.

Section 646. No Fixed Time

If no time is fixed, the property shall be returned after the borrower has made the use of it for the purpose appearing from the contract. The lender may claim the return of the property earlier, if so much time has elapsed that the borrower might have made the use of it.

If no time is fixed and no purpose appears from the contract, the lender may claim the return at any time.

Section 647. Responsibility for Ordinary Maintenance

Expenses for ordinary maintenance of the property lent must be borne by the borrower.

Section 648. Death of Borrower

A loan for use is extinguished by the death of the borrower.

Section 649. Statute of Limitations

No action for compensation in connection with a loan for use can be entered later than six months after the extinction of the contract.

(top)

Chapter 2: Loan for Consumption

Section 650. Loan for Consumption

A loan for consumption is a contract whereby the lender transfers to the borrower the ownership of a certain quantity of property which is consumed by the user, and the borrower agrees to return a property of the same kind, quality and quantity.

The contract is complete only on delivery of the property.

Section 651. Costs borne by the borrower

Costs of the contract, costs of delivery of the property lent and costs of return are borne by the borrower.

Section 652. If not time for limit, reasonable notice must be provided

If no time for return of the property lent has been fixed, the lender may give notice to the borrower to return the property within a reasonable time to be fixed in the notice.

Section 653. Loan exceeding 2000 baht must be written

A loan of money for a sum exceeding two thousand baht in capital is not enforceable by action unless there be some written evidence of the loan signed by the borrower.

No repayment of a loan of money evidenced by writing may be proved unless there be some written evidence signed by the lender, or the document evidencing the loan has been surrendered to the borrower or cancelled.

Section 654. Maximum Interest is 15% per year

Interest shall not exceed 15% per year; when a higher rate of interest is fixed by the contract, it shall be reduced to 15% per year.

Section 655. Personal loans – No Compound Interest Allowed

Interest shall not bear interest. The parties to a loan of money may, however, agree that the interest due for not less than one year shall be added to the capital, and that the whole shall bear interest, but such agreement must be made in writing.

(Compound Interest Allowed at Financial Institutions.)

Commercial usage for the calculation of compound interest in current accounts, as well as in similar commercial transactions, are not governed by the forgoing paragraph.

Section 656. Payment of Debt with Goods

If a loan is made for a sum of money, and the borrower accepts goods or other property instead of such sum, the amount of the debt due shall be considered as equal to the market value of the goods or property at the time and place of delivery.

If a loan is made for a sum of money, and the lender accepts goods or other property for the repayment of the loan, the amount of the debt extinguished thereby shall be considered as equal to the market value of the goods or property at the time and place of delivery.

Any agreement to the contrary is void.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE X
DEPOSIT

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 657 Deposit

A deposit is a contract whereby a person, called the depositor, delivers a property to another person, called the depositary, and the depositary agrees to keep it in his custody and return it.

Section 658 Remuneration Implied

Remuneration for the deposit is deemed to have been impliedly agreed upon. If under the circumstances the undertaking of the deposit is to be expected only for the remuneration.

Section 659 Proper Care of Deposited Property

If the deposit is undertaken gratuitously, the depositary is bound to exercise as much care of the property deposited as he is accustomed to exercising in his own affairs.

If the deposit is undertaken with remuneration the depositary is bound to exercise such care and skill as a person of ordinary prudence would exercise in the circumstances. This includes the exercise of special skill where such skill is required.

If the depositary professes a particular trade, business or calling, he is bound to exercise the degree of care and skill usual and requisite in such trade, business or calling.

Section 660 Use of Property without permission

If without the permission of the depositor the depositary uses the property deposited or lets a third person have the use or custody of it, he is liable for any loss or damage to the property, even caused by force majeure, unless he proves that the loss or damage would have happened in any case.

Section 661 Third Party Claims over Property

If a third person claims rights over the property deposited and enters an action against the depositary, or attaches the property, the depositary must forthwith give notice thereof to the depositor.

Section 662 Fix Deposit

If a time for return of the property deposited has been fixed, the depositary has no right to return the property before such time, except in case of unavoidable necessity.

Section 663 Depositor Right to Demand

Although the parties have fixed a time for the return of the property deposited, the depositary must return it at any time on demand made by the depositor.

Section 664 No Fixed Time for Return of Property

If the parties have fixed no time for the return of the property deposited, the depositary can return it at any time.

Section 665 Right to Return of Property

The depositary is bound to return the property deposited to the depositor, or to the person in whose name it was deposited, or to the person to whom he has been duly directed to return it.

Provided that if the depositor dies the property deposited shall be returned to his heir. Section 666 The depositary is bound to deliver with the property any fruits which may have accrued from it.

Section 667 Cost of Returning Property

Costs of returning the property deposited shall be borne by the depositor. Section 668 The depositor is bound to reimburse the depositary for any expenses which were necessary for the preservation or maintenance of the property deposited, unless such expenses were incumbent upon the depositary under the contract of deposit.

Section 669 Terms of Remuneration through Custom or Contract

If no time for payment of remuneration is fixed by the contract or by custom, the remuneration is payable when the property deposited is returned. If fixed by periods the remuneration is payable at the end of each period.

Section 670 Entitled to Retain Property until Payment

The depositary is entitled to retain the property deposited until he has been paid all that is due to him on account of the deposit.

Section 671 Statute of Limitations

No action for remuneration, reimbursement of expenses or compensation in connection with a deposit can be entered later than six months after the extinction of the contract.

(top)

Chapter 2: Special rules for the deposit of money

Section 672 Cash Deposit

If the deposited is one of money, it is presumed that the depositary is not to return the same species, but only the same amount.

The depositary may use the money deposited and is only bound to return an equivalent amount. He is bound to return such amount even though the money deposited has been lost by force majeure.

Section 673 Depositor Cannot Demand Money Before Agreed Time

When the depositary is bound only to return the same amount of money, the depositor may not demand the return of the money before agreed time, nor may the depositary return it before such time.

(top)

Text EditorNote: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE X
DEPOSIT

Chapter 3: Special rules for innkeepers

Section 674 Proprietor of Hotel is Responsible for Damage

The proprietor of an inn, hotel or other such place is liable for any loss or damage to the property which the traveller or guest lodging with him may have brought.

Section 675 Responsible even for the actions of other guests

The proprietor is liable for loss or damage to the property of the traveller or guest, even caused by strangers going to and from the inn, hotel or other such place.

His liability is limited to the sum of five thousand baht if the property is specie, currency notes, bills, bonds, shares, debentures, warrants, jewels or other valuables, unless it has been deposited with him and its value clearly stated.

But he is not liable for loss or damage caused by force majeure or by the nature of the property or by the fault of the traveller or guest or of his attendant or of a person whom he has received.

Section 676 Notification of Proprietor for Any Loss

On discovery of the loss or damage to the property not expressly deposited, the traveller or guest must communicate the fact to the proprietor of the inn, hotel or any such place at once, failing which the proprietor shall be relieved of the responsibility provided in Sections 674 and 675.

Section 677 Notices agreeing to exclude or limit liability is void unless there is express agreement

A notice posted in the inn, hotel or other such place excluding or limiting the liability of the proprietor is void unless the traveller or guest expressly agreed to such exclusion or limitation of liability.

Section 678 Statute of Limitations

No action for compensation for loss or damage caused to the property of the traveller or guest can be entered later than six months after the departure of the traveller or guest.

Section 679 Retain Luggage for 6 Weeks

The proprietor is entitled to retain the luggage or other property of the traveller or guest which is in the inn, hotel or other such place until he has been paid all that is due to him for lodging and other services afforded to the traveller or guest in satisfaction of his needs, including disbursements.

He may sell by public auction properties so retained and pay himself out of the proceeds of such sale the amount which is due to him, together with the cost and expenses of such sale. But he cannot exercise such right unless:

  1. The properties have been left for six weeks without the debt being paid, and
  2. At least one month before such sale he has caused to be inserted in one local newspaper and advertisement containing notice of the intended sale, together with a short description of the properties to be sold and the name of the owner, if known.

The surplus (if any) remaining after such payment must be paid to the owner of such properties or deposited at the Deposit Office according to the provisions of Sections 331 and 333.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XI
SURETYSHIP

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 680 Suretyship

Suretyship is a contract whereby a third person, called the surety, binds himself to a creditor to satisfy an obligation in the event that the debtor fails to perform it.

A contract of suretyship is not enforceable by action unless there is some written evidence signed by the surety.

Section 681 Suretyship can be given only for a valid obligation.

A future or conditional obligation may be secured for the event in which it would have effect.

An obligation, resulting from a contract which under mistake or incapacity does not bind the debtor, can be validly secured if the surety at the time when he binds himself knows such mistake or incapacity.

Section 682 A person may agree to be surety for another surety.

If several persons make themselves sureties for the same obligation they are liable as joint debtors, even though they do not assume the suretyship in common.

Section 683 Suretyship without limitation

The suretyship without limitation covers interest and compensation due by the debtor on account of the obligation and all charges accessory to it.

Section 684 Liability for Cost of Action

The surety is liable for the costs of action to be paid by the debtor to the creditor, but he is not liable for such costs if the action was entered without first demanding performance from him.

Section 685 Non-performance by Surety

If, on enforcement of the contract of suretyship, the surety does not perform the whole of the obligation of the debtor, together with interest, compensation and accessories, the debtor remains liable to the creditor for the balance.

(top)

Chapter 2: Effects before Performance

Section 686 Demand for Performance

As soon as the debtor is in default, the creditor is entitled to demand performance of the obligation for the surety.

Section 687 Time of Performance

The surety is not bound to perform the obligation before the time fixed for performance, although the debtor can no longer take advantage of a time of commencement or ending.

Section 688 Notice to Debtor prior to Performance

When the creditor demands performance of the obligation from the surety, the latter may require that the debtor be first called upon to perform unless the debtor has been adjudged bankrupt, or his whereabouts in Thailand in unknown.

Section 689 If Debtor can perform, Surety does not

Even after the debtor has been called upon as provided in the forgoing section, if the surety can prove that the debtor has the means to perform and that execution would not be difficult, the creditor must first make execution against the property of the debtor.

Section 690 Creditor must try to collect prior to go to Surety

If the creditor holds real security belonging to the debtor, he must, on request of the surety, have the obligation performed first out of the real security.

Section 691 Joint Liability for Performance

If the surety is bound jointly with the debtor, he has not the rights mentioned in Sections 688, 689 and 690.

Section 692 Interruption of SOL

An interruption of prescription against the debtor is also an interruption against the surety.

(top)

Chapter 3: Effects after performance

Section 693 Right to Recourse Against Debtor

The surety who has performed the obligation has a right of recourse against the debtor for the principal and interest, and for the losses or damages which he may suffer by reason of the surety ship.

He is subrogated to the rights of the creditor against the debtor.

Section 694 Defences Against Creditor

In addition to the defences which the surety has against the creditor, he can also set up defences which the debtor has against the creditor.

Section 695 Neglecting use of Defences by Surety

The surety who neglects to set up against the creditor defences of the debtor loses his right of recourse against the debtor to the extent of these defences, unless he proves that he did not know of such defences and that his ignorance was not due to his fault.

Section 696 Surety must inform debtor prior to performance

The surety has no right of recourse against the debtor, if he performs the obligation without informing the debtor who, in ignorance or the fact, performs it.

In such case, the surety may have only an action for undue enrichment against the creditor.

Section 697 Subrogation of Creditor’s Rights

If, owing to the creditor’s own acts, the surety cannot be subrogated wholly or partially into the creditor’s rights, mortgages, pledges and preferential rights which have been given before or at the time of suretyship for the performance of the obligation, the surety is discharged to the extent of the injury suffered by him thereby.

(top)

Chapter 4: Extinction of Suretyship

Section 698 Discharge of Surety

The surety is discharged as soon as the obligation of the debtor is extinguished by any cause whatsoever.

Section 699 Transactions without Limit can be terminated with notice

The suretyship for a series of transactions without limit or time in favour of the creditor can be terminated by the surety for the future by giving notice to the creditor to that effect.

In such case the surety is not liable for transactions done by the debtor after the notice has reached the creditor.

Section 700 Definite Time for Obligation

If suretyship has been given for an obligation which is to be performed at a definite time, and the creditor grants to the debtor an extension time, the surety is discharged.

The surety is not discharged if he agreed to the extension of time.

Section 701 Performance when Due

The surety may tender performance of the obligation to the creditor from the time when performance is due.

If the creditor refuses to accept performance, the surety is discharged.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XII
MORTGAGE

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 702. Mortgage

A mortgage is a contract whereby a person, called the mortgagor, assigns a property to another person, called the mortgagee, as security for the performance of an obligation, without delivering the property to the mortgagee.

The mortgagee is entitled to be paid out of the mortgaged property in preference to ordinary creditors regardless as to whether or not the ownership of the property has been transferred to a third person.

Section 703. Immovables of any kind can be mortgaged.

The following movables can also be mortgaged provided they are registered according to law:

  1. Ships of five tons and over
  2. Floating houses.
  3. Beast of burden
  4. Any other movables with regard to which the law may provide registration for that purpose.

Section 704

A contract of mortgage must specify the property mortgaged.

Section 705

No property can be mortgaged except by the owner for the time being.

Section 706

A person whose right of ownership over a property is subject to a condition may mortgage such property only subject to such condition.

Section 707

The provisions of Section 681 concerning Suretyship apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 708. Used Thai Currency in Mortgages

A contract of mortgage must contain, in Thai currency, either the sum certain or a maximum amount for which the mortgaged property is assigned as security.

Section 709. Security for Performance

A person may mortgage his property as security for the performance of an obligation by another person.

Section 710. Several Properties may be secured with multiple mortagages

The performance of one and the same obligation may be secured by the mortgage of several properties belonging either to one or to several owners.

The parties may agree:

  1. That the mortgagee shall enforce his right against the mortgaged properties on a specific order.
  2. That each property is security only for a specified part of the obligation.

Section 711. Before the Obligation is due, transfer of property is invalid

Before the obligation is due, any agreement that the mortgagee shall, in case of non-performance, become the owner of the mortgaged property or dispose of it otherwise than in accordance with the provisions concerning Enforcement of Mortgage, shall be invalid.

Section 712. Mortgage to a third person

Notwithstanding any clause in the contract to the contrary, a property mortgaged to one person may be mortgaged to another person during the continuance of the previous contract.

Section. 713. Payoff by Instalments

Unless otherwise agreed in the contract of mortgage, the mortgagor may pay off the mortgage by instalments.

Section 714. Mortgage must be written and registered

A contract of mortgage must be made in writing and registered by the competent official.

(top)

Chapter 2: Extent of Mortgage

Section 715. Mortgaged Property = Security

A mortgaged property is security for the performance of the obligation and for the following accessories:

  1. Interest.
  2. Compensation in case of non-performance of the obligation
  3. Costs of enforcement of the mortgage.

Section 716. Part Performance

A mortgage, even part performance, extend to all the properties mortgaged and the whole of each of them.

Section 717. Divided Mortgaged Property

If a mortgaged property is divided into parcels, the mortgage continues notwithstanding to extend to each and all of such parcels.

Section 718. Mortgage Restrictions

A mortgage extends to all things which are connected with the mortgaged property, subject, however to the restrictions contained in the following sections.

Section 719. Land Mortgage does not extend to Building on the Land

A mortgage over land does not extend to the buildings erected by the mortgagor upon such land after the date of the mortgage, unless there is in the contract a special clause to that effect.

However, in any case, the mortgagee can have such buildings sold with the land, but he can exercise his preferential right only against the price obtained for the land.

Section 720. A Mortgage of Buildings does not expend to the land

A mortgage over buildings erected or constructed made upon or under the land of another person does not extend to such land, and vice versa.

Section 721. Mortgage does not extend to the fruits of property

A mortgage does not extend to the fruits of the mortgaged property except after the mortgagee has notified the mortgagor or the transferee of his intention to enforce the mortgage.

(top)

Chapter 3: Rights and Duties of the Mortgagee and Mortgagor

Section 722. Mortgage has priority over after filed servitude

When a property has been mortgaged and a servitude or other real right is registered after the registration of the mortgage without the consent of the mortgagee, the mortgage has priority over the servitude or other real right and the latter will be erased from the register where its existence prejudice the right of the mortgagee on the enforcement of the mortgage.

Section 723. If Mortgaged Property is damaged or lost

If the mortgaged property is damaged, or if one of the mortgaged properties is lost or damaged, so that the security becomes insufficient, the mortgagee may enforce the mortgage at once, unless the mortgagor has not been at fault and offers either to mortgage another property of sufficient value or to repair the damage within a reasonable time.

Section 724. Mortgagor right to recover from Debtor

A mortgagor, who has mortgaged his property as security for the performance of an obligation by another person and performs the obligation on behalf of the debtor to prevent the enforcement of the mortgage, is entitled to recover from the debtor the amount of the performance.

If the mortgage is enforced, the mortgagor is entitled to recover from the debtor the amount by which the mortgagee has been satisfied by such performance.

Section 725. No Right to Recourse against Joint Mortgagers

When two or more persons have separately mortgaged their properties as security for the performance of one and the same obligation by another person and no order has been specified, the mortgagor who has performed the obligation, or on whose property the mortgage has been enforced, has no right of recourse against the other mortgagors.

Section 726. Release of one Mortgager discharges other Mortgagers

When several persons have separately mortgaged their properties as security for the performance of one and the same obligation by another person and an order has been specified, the release granted by the mortgagee to one of the mortgagors discharges the subsequent mortgagors to the extent of the injury suffered by them thereby.

Section 727. Suretyship

If a person has mortgaged his property as security for the performance of an obligation by another person, the provisions of Sections 697, 700 and 701 concerning Suretyship shall apply mutatis mutandis.

(top)

Chapter 4: Enforcement of Mortgage

Section 728. Notice to Debtor prior to Court Action

For enforcement of mortgage the mortgagee must notify the debtor on writing to perform his obligation within a reasonable time to be fixed in the notice. If the debtor fails to comply with such notice, the mortgagee may enter an action in Court for a judgment ordering the mortgaged property to be seized and sold by public auction.

Section 729. Additional Reasons to foreclose on mortgage

In addition to the remedy provided in the foregoing section, the mortgagee is entitled to claim foreclosure of the mortgage, subject to the following conditions:

  1. The debtor has failed to pay interest for five years;
  2. The mortgagor has not satisfied the Court that the value of the property is greater than the amount due; and
  3. There are no other registered mortgages or preferential rights on the same property.

Section 730. When Same Property is mortgaged, earlier mortgagee is satisfied first

When one and the same property is mortgaged to several mortgagees, they rank according to the respective dates and hours of registration, and the earlier mortgagee shall be satisfied before the later one.

Section 731. A later mortgagee cannot sue earlier mortgagee

A later mortgage cannot enforce his right to the injury of an earlier one.

Section 732. Distribution of Proceeds from Sale

The net proceeds of the auction shall be distributed to the mortgagees according to their ranks, and the surplus, if any, shall be delivered to the mortgagor.

Section 733. If value of property is less than the amount due, the debtor is not liable for difference.

If the estimated value of the property, in case of foreclosure, is or the net proceeds, in case of auction, are less than the amount due, the debtor of the obligation is not liable for the difference.

Section 734. Several Properties Mortgaged for same obligation

When several properties have been mortgaged to secure one and the same obligation and no order has been specified, the mortgagee may enforce his right against all or any of the properties; provided that he does not do so upon more properties than is necessary for the satisfaction of his right.

If the mortgagee enforces his right against all properties at the same time, the burden of the obligation is divided according to the respective value of the properties, except where the amounts of the mortgages have been specified for each property, in which case the division is made according to the respective amounts of the mortgages on such properties.

If, however, the mortgagee enforces his right against one of the properties, the mortgagee may receive performance of his entire obligation from such property. In that case the mortgagee who is next in rank shall be considered as being subrogated to the prior mortgagee and may enforce the mortgage in his stead to the amount which the prior mortgagee would have received from the other properties according to the provisions of the foregoing paragraph.

Section 735. 1 Month Written Notice Prior to Enforcement

When the mortgagee intends to enforce the mortgage against the transferee of a mortgaged property, the latter must be served with a written notice one month before the enforcement of the mortgage.

(top)

Chapter 5: Rights and Duties of the Transferee of a Mortgaged Property

Section 736. Transferee

The transferee of a mortgaged property may remove the mortgage, provided that he is not the principal debtor, a surety or an heir of either of them.

Section 737. Removal of the Mortgaged Property

The transferee may remove the mortgage at any time, but if he has been notified by the mortgagee of the mortgagee’s intention to enforce the mortgage, he must do so within one month thereafter.

Section 738. Notify Principal Debtor and Registered Creditor

The transferee who wishes to remove the mortgage must notify the principal debtor and make an offer to every registered creditor whether by way of mortgage or otherwise pay a reasonable amount corresponding to the value of the property.

The offer shall contain the following particulars:

  1. The place and the description of the mortgaged property.
  2. The date of transfer of ownership.
  3. The name of the former owner.
  4. The name and domicile of the transferee.
  5. The sum offered.
  6. A calculation of the total amount due to each of the creditors including accessories, and the sum which would be distributed to them according to their respective ranks.

A certified copy of the entries in the official registered to the mortgaged property shall be enclosed.

Section 739. Creditor Can File Court Action to Stop Action

If any creditor refuses the offer, he must enter an action in Court within one month from the date of the offer for a judgment ordering the mortgaged property to be sold by public auction, provided that:

  1. He advances the cost of sale;
  2. He binds himself to make a bid or have a bid made above the sum offered by the transferee, and
  3. He notifies his refusal to the transferee, other registered creditors, the former owner and the principal debtor.

Section 740. Cost of Transfer and Auction

If the net proceeds of the auction are more than the sum offered by the transferee, the costs of the auction shall be borne by him; otherwise, the creditor demanding the sale shall bear the costs of the auction.

Section 741. Acceptance of Offer

When all the creditors have accepted the offer, either expressly or implied, the mortgage and preferential rights are removed by the transferee paying or depositing in lieu of performance the sum offered.

Section 742. Removal of Property from After Acquired Mortgage Property

When, by the enforcement or the removal of the mortgage, a person who has previously acquired the mortgaged property is deprived of the property, such deprivation has no retrospective effect, and the preferential rights registered by his own creditors of the mortgagor or other former owner.

In such case, if any rights over the mortgaged property existing in favour of or against the person who has so previously acquired the mortgaged property have been extinguished by merger at the time of his acquisition, they shall revive in his favour or against him after he has been deprived of the mortgaged property.

Section 743. Liability for Damages

The transferee is liable to damages if the property has been made less valuable by his act or negligence, and loss has thereby been suffered by the creditors having mortgages or preferential rights over the same. The transferee cannot, however, claim any sum spent by him, or reimbursement of his expenses for improvements, except so far as he has increased the value of the property, and only up to the amount of the increase of value at the time of auction.

(top)

Chapter 6: Extinction of Mortgage

Section 744. A mortgage is extinguished:

  1. By extinction of the obligation secured, otherwise than by prescription.
  2. By release of the mortgage granted in writing to the mortgagor
  3. By the mortgagor being discharged.
  4. By the mortgage being removed.
  5. By action sale of the mortgaged property by order of the Court as a result of enforcement or removal of mortgage.
  6. By foreclosure of the mortgage.

Section 745. Statute of Limitation

The mortgagee may enforce the mortgage even after the obligation secured has been barred by prescription, but arrears of interest on the mortgage cannot be enforced for more than five years.

Section 746. End of Mortgage must be registered

Any performance, either wholly or partly, or any extinction, or any agreement modifying the mortgage or the obligation secured, must be registered by the competent official on the request of the interested party, failing which it cannot be set up against a third person.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XIII
PLEDGE

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 747. Pledge

A pledge is a contract whereby a person, called the pledger, delivers to another person, called the pledge, a movable property as a security for the performance of an obligation.

Section 748. Security for Performance

The pledge is a security for the performance of the obligation and for the following accessories:

  1. Interest.
  2. Compensation in case of non-performance of the obligation.
  3. Costs of enforcement of the pledge.
  4. Expenses for the preservation of the pledged property.
  5. Compensation for injury caused by non-apparent defects of the pledged property.

Section 749. Escrow

The parties to a pledge may agree that the pledged property shall be kept by a third person. (Escrow)

Section 750. Written Notice Required

If the pledged property is a right represented by a written instrument, the pledge is void unless such instrument is delivered to the pledge and the pledge is notified in writing to the debtor of the right.

Section 751. Cannot be set up against 3rd Person with endorsement

If an instrument to order is pledged, such pledge cannot be set up against third persons unless its creation is endorsed upon the instrument.

No notification to the debtor under such instrument id necessary.

Section 752. Debtor Notification Required

If an instrument issued to a named person and not transferable by endorsement is pledged, the pledge must be stated on such instrument, and cannot be set up against the debtor under such instrument or third persons, unless it is notified to such debtor.

Section 753. Pledged Share or Debenture

If a named certificate for share or debenture is pledged, such pledge cannot be set up against the company or other third person, unless the creation of the pledge is entered in the company’s book in accordance with the provisions of Title XXII relating to the transfer of shares or debentures.

Section 754. Pledge Right Due before Obligation is Due

If the pledged right becomes due before the obligation for which it is security is due, the debtor of such right must deliver to the pledge the property which is the subject of the right and it becomes pledged in lieu of the pledged right.

If the pledged right is an obligation to pay a sum of money and becomes due before the obligation secured, the payment must be made jointly to the pledge and pledger; if they cannot come to an agreement, each of them is entitled to demand that such sum be deposited in Deposited Office for their common benefit.

Section 755. If Right is Pledge, cannot extinguish or modify

If a right is pledged, it cannot be extinguished or modified to the injury of the pledge without the consent of the pledgee.

Section 756. Any modification to ownership of the obligation is invalid until the obligation is due

Before the obligation is due, any agreement that the pledge shall, in case of non-performance, become the owner of the pledged property or disposed of it otherwise than in accordance with the provisions concerning Enforcement of Pledge, shall be invalid.

Section 757. Pawnbrokers

The provisions of this Title XIII apply to contracts of pledge entered into with licensed pawnbrokers only in so far as they are not contrary to the Laws or Regulations concerning Pawnbrokers.

(top)

Chapter 2: Rights and Duties of Pledger and Pledgee

Section 758. Retention of Pledged Property

The pledge is entitled to retain all the pledged property until he has received full performance of the obligation and accessories.

Section 759. Ordinary Care of Pledge Property

The pledge is bound to keep the pledged property in safe custody and take as much care of it as a person of ordinary prudence would take of his own property.

Section 760. Liability for Loss if Pledgee allows 3rd person to use property

If, without the consent of the pledger, the pledgee uses the pledged property or lets a third person have custody over it, he is liable for any loss or damage to the pledged property, even caused by force majeure, unless he proves that the loss or damage would have happened in any case.

Section 761. Fruits of Pledged Property

Unless otherwise provided by the contract, if the pledged property procedures legal fruits, the pledgee shall appropriate them in payment of any interest that may be due to him, and, if no interest is due, in payment of the principal of the obligation secured.

Section 762. Pledger responsible to Pledgee to preserve and maintain property

The pledger is bound to reimburse the pledgee for any expenses which were necessary for the preservation or maintenance of the pledged property unless otherwise provided in the contract.

Section 763. Statute of Limitations

The following actions cannot be entered later than six months after the return or sale by auction of the pledged property:

  1. An action for compensation for damage caused to the pledged property by the pledge.
  2. An action for reimbursement of expenses incurred for the preservation or maintenance of the pledged property.
  3. An action for compensation for injury caused to the pledge by non-apparent defects in the pledged property.

(top)

Chapter 3: Enforcement of Pledge

Section 764. Enforcement of Pledge requires Notification

On enforcement of the pledge the pledgee must first notify the debtor in writing to perform the obligation and accessories within a reasonable time to be fixed in the notice.

The pledgee must notify the pledger in writing of the time and place of the auction.

Section 765. Without notification, can wait 30 days

If notification is impracticable, the pledge may sell the pledged property by public auction after one month from the time the obligation became due.

Section 766. Notification Not Required for Bill

The pledgee of a bill shall, without previous notification being necessary, collect it on the day of its maturity.

Section 767. Return of Surplus

On enforcement of the pledge the pledgee must appropriate the net proceeds to extinction of the obligation and accessories and must return the surplus to the pledger or any person entitled to it.

If the proceeds are less than amount due, the debtor of the obligation remains liable for the difference.

Section 768. Sale of Multiple Properties

If several properties are pledged as security for one obligation, the pledgee may sell such of them as he may select, but he may not sell more than is necessary for the satisfaction of his right.

Chapter 4: Extinction of Pledge

Section 769. A pledge is extinguished:

  1. When the obligation secured is extinguished otherwise than by prescription, or
  2. When the pledgee allows the pledged property to return into the possession of the pledger.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XIV
WAREHOUSING

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 770. Warehouseman

A warehouseman is a person who, in the usual course of his business, undertakes the storage and custody of goods for remuneration.

Section 771. Warehousing Code

The provisions of this Code concerning Deposit apply to Warehousing in so far they are not contrary to the provisions of this Title.

Section 772. Change Carriage Mutatis

The provisions of sections 616, 619, 623, 625, 630, 631, and 632 concerning Carriage apply to Warehousing mutatis mutandis.

Section 773. Inspection of Goods

The warehouse man is bound to allow the holder of the warehouse receipt or the holder of the warrant to inspect the goods and to take samples at any reasonable time during business hours.

Section 774. Time Period for Holding Goods

The warehouseman cannot demand the removal if the goods by the depositor before expiration of the period agreed upon. If no time for the return of the goods was fixed, the warehouse man may return them only on giving one month’s notice to the depositor, provided that the latter shall not be compelled to remove the goods before two months have elapsed since delivery.

(top)

Chapter 2: Warehouse receipt and warrant

Section 775. Documentation of Warehouse

If required by the deposit, the warehouseman must deliver to him a document taken out from a special counterfoil Register and including a warehouse receipt and a warrant.

Section 776. Transfer of Ownership

The warehouse receipt entitles the depositor to transfer the ownership of the goods to another person by endorsement.

Section 777. Pledging Goods by Endorsement

The warrant entitles the depositor to pledge the goods mentioned in it by endorsement and without delivering such goods to the endorsee.

Provided that when the depositor wants to pledge the goods, he must separate the warrant from the warehouse receipt and deliver the former to the endorsee.

Section 778. Receipt, Warrant, and Serial Number

The warehouse receipt and the warrant must each bear the same serial number as mentioned in the counterfoil, and be signed by the warehouseman.

They shall contain the following particulars:

  1. The name or trade name and the address of the depositor.
  2. The place of storage.
  3. The remuneration for storage.
  4. The nature of the goods stored, their weight or bulk and the nature, number and marking or the packages.
  5. The place where, and the time when, the receipt and the warrant are made out.
  6. The period for which the goods are stored, if that has been fixed.
  7. If the goods stored are insured, the amount of the insurance, the period for which the goods are insured and the name or trade name of the insurer.

The warehouseman must enter the same particulars in the counterfoil.

Section 779. No Endorsement to Bearer

The warehouse receipt and the warrant cannot be made or endorsed to bearer.

Section 780. Endorsement on Warrant must Match Endorsement on Receipt

When the depositor endorses the warrant to a pledgee, the parties must mention such endorsement upon the warehouse receipt.

If such mention is not made, the pledge cannot be set up against a further buyer of the goods.

Section 781. Warrant and Receipt

When the warrant is endorsed and delivered to the pledgee, the depositor and the pledgee shall certify on the warrant that they have made on the warehouse receipt the mention provided in the foregoing section.

Section 782. Pledging Goods must be in Writing

When the depositor pledges the goods and delivers the warrant to an endorsee, such endorsee must notify in writing to the warehouseman the amount of the obligation for the security of which the goods are pledged, the interest to be paid and the day of maturity of the obligation; and upon such notification the warehouseman must enter such particulars in the counterfoil.

If such entry is not made in the counterfoil, the pledge cannot be set up against the creditors of the depositor.

Section 783. Division of Goods

The holder of the document including the warehouse receipt and the warrant may require the warehouseman to divide the goods stored and to deliver to him a separate document for each part. In such case, the holder must return the original document to the warehouseman.

The expenses for such division and for the delivery of the new documents must be borne by the holder.

Section 784. Transfer of Goods only by Endorsement of Receipt

The ownership of the goods stored can be transferred only by endorsement on the warehouse receipt.

Section 785. Transfer of Pledge by Endorsement of Warrant

The goods stored can be pledged only by endorsement of the warrant. After the warrant has been endorsed, the goods may be pledged to a second pledgee by endorsing the warehouse receipt in the same way as a warrant.

Section 786. Goods Not Pledged

As long as the goods stored are not pledged, the warehouse receipt and the warrant may not be transferred separately.

Section 787. Requirements for Endorsement on a Warrant

The first endorsement on a warrant must mention the amount of the obligation for the security of which the goods are pledged, the interest to be paid and the day of maturity of the obligation.

Section 788. Delivery Requires Warehouse Receipt

The delivery of the goods stored may be obtained only on surrender of the warehouse receipt.

Section 789. Receipt and Warrant required for delivery to Pledgee

If a warrant has been separated and endorsed to a pledgee, the delivery of the goods may be obtained only on surrender of both the warehouse receipt and the warrant.

However, the holder of the warehouse receipt can at any time have the goods returned to him on depositing with the warehouseman the whole amount of the obligation entered in the warrant, with interest up to the date when the obligation is due.

The amount so deposited must be paid by the warehouseman to the holder of the warrant upon surrender of such warrant.

Section 790. Auction of Goods if Pledge Not Performed

If the obligation for which the goods have been pledged is not performed on the day of its maturity, the holder of the warrant is entitled after protest duly made to have the goods sold by public auction by the warehouseman, provided that the public auction shall not be held less than eight days after the day of protest.

Section 791. Notice of Auction

The holder of the warrant must notify the depositor in writing of the time and place of the auction.

Section 792. Deduction of the Proceeds

The warehouseman must deduct from the net proceeds of the public auction the sums due to him in connection with the storage, and out of the balance he must, on surrender of the warrant, pay to the holder thereof the amount due to him.

Any surplus must be paid to the second pledgee on surrender of the warehouse receipt of, if there is no second pledgee or after he has been satisfied, to the holder of the warehouse receipt.

Section 793. Insufficient Proceeds from Auction

If the net proceeds of the public auction are not sufficient to satisfy the holder of the warrant, the warehouseman must return the warrant to the holder stating thereon the amount paid, and make an entry thereof in his books.

Section 794. Right to Unpaid Amount

The holder of the warrant has a right of recourse for the amount unpaid against all or any of the prior endorsers, provided that the public auction has been held within one month after the day of protest.

No action for recourse can be entered later than one year after the day of the auction.

Section 795. Bills

The provisions of this Code concerning Bills apply to warrants and warehouse receipts endorsed as warrants in so far as they are not contrary to the provisions of this Title.

Section 796. Lost Receipts and Warrants

If the documents including the warehouse receipt and the warrant, or one of them, have been lost, the holder on giving proper security may require the warehouseman to deliver him a new title.

In such case the warehouseman must enter the fact in the counterfoil.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XV
AGENCY

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 797. Agent or Representative

Agency is a contract whereby a person, called the agent, has authority to act for another person, called the principal, and agrees so to act.

Agency may be express or implied.

Section 798. Written Agency Appointment

If a transaction is by law required to be made in writing, the appointment of an agent for such transaction must also be made in writing.

If the transaction is required to be evidenced by writing, the appointment of an agent for such transaction must also be evidenced by writing.

Section 799. Principal Responsible For Agent

The principal who employs an incapable person as an agent is bound by the act of that agent.

Section 800. Special Authority

The agent who has a special authority may do on behalf of his principal whatever is necessary for the due execution of the matters entrusted to him.

Section 801. General Authority

The agent who has a general authority may do all acts of management on behalf of his principal.

He cannot do such acts as:

  1. Selling or mortgaging immovable property.
  2. Letting immovable property for more than three years.
  3. Making a gift.
  4. Making a compromise.
  5. Entering an action in Court.
  6. Submitting a dispute to arbitration.

Section 802. Actions Judged Based on Ordinary Prudence

In case of an emergency, the agent is presumed to have an authority to do, in order to protect his principal from loss, all such acts as would be done by a person of ordinary prudence.

Section 803. No Entitlement to Remuneration without Agreement

The agent is not entitled to receive remuneration unless it is provided by the contract, or may be implied from the course of dealing between the parties or by usage.

Section 804. Several Agents must Act Together

If several agents have been appointed in one contract by the same principal for the same matters, it is presumed that they cannot act separately.

Section 805. No Self Dealing

An agent may not without his principal’s consent enter into a juristic act in the name of his principal with himself in his own name, or as agent of a third party, unless the juristic act consists exclusively in the performance of an obligation.

Section 806. Principal Rights to Enter Contracts on his own Behalf

An undisclosed principal may declare himself and assume any contract entered into on his behalf. But the principal who allows his agent to act as a principal cannot prejudice the rights of the third person against the agent acquired before notice of agency.

(top)

Chapter 2: Duties and Liabilities of the Agent to the Principal

Section 807. Following Directions of Principal

The agent must act according to the express or implied directions of the principal. In the absence of such directions, he must pursue the accustomed course of business in which he is employed.

The provisions of Section 659 concerning Deposit apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 808. Cannot Delegate Work without Authority

The agent must act personally, unless he has authority to act by subagent.

Section 809. Principal must provide information required by Agent to complete task

If required by principal, the agent must at all reasonable times give information as to the conditions of the matter entrusted to him. He must render an account after the agency has come to an end.

Section 810. Must Handover all Money to the Principal

The agent must hand over to the principal all the moneys and other properties which he receives in connection with the agency.

Section 811. Unlawful Use of Principal’s Money

If the agent has used for his own benefit money which ought to have handed over to the principal or to have used for the principal, he must pay interest thereon from the day when he used it for his own benefit.

Section 812. Agent is Liable for Acts of Negligence or Non Authority

The agent is liable for any injury resulting from his negligence or non-execution of agency, or from an act done without or in excess of authority.

Section 813. Agent liability for Subagent chosen by Principal

The agent who appoints a subagent designated by the principal is liable only in case he knew his unfitness or untrustworthiness and omitted to inform the principal thereof or to revoke the sub-agency.

Section 814. Subagent is Liable to the Principal

The subagent is directly liable to the principal and vice versa.

(top)

Chapter 3: Duties and Liabilities of the Principal to the Agent

Section 815. Advance of Moneys to Agent

The principal must, if so required, advance to the agent such sums as are necessary for the execution of the matters entrusted to him.

Section 816. Advances by the Agent

If the agent in executing the matters entrusted to him has made advances or expenses which could reasonably be regarded as necessary, he may claim from the principal reimbursement with interest from the day when they were made.

If the agent in executing the matters entrusted to him has assumed an obligation which could reasonably be regarded as necessary, he may require the principal to perform in his place or if the time of its maturity has not yet arrived, to give proper security.

If the agent by reason of the execution of the matters entrusted to him has suffered damage without fault on his part he may claim compensation from the principal.

Section 817. Payment of Remuneration

In case remuneration is to be paid, it is payable, unless otherwise agreed, only after the agency has come to an end.

Section 818. No Remuneration for Misconduct

The agent is not entitled to remuneration in respect of that part of his agency which he has misconduct.

Section 819. Agent Retain Property until Remuneration is Paid

The agent is entitled to retain any property of the principal in his possession by reason of agency until he has been paid all that is due to him on account of agency.

(top)

Chapter 4: Liability of Principal and Agent to Third Persons

Section 820. Principal is bound by acts of the Agent

The principal is bound to third persons by the acts which the agent or the subagent has done within the scope of his authority by virtue of his agency.

Section 821. Agent is liable to third person

A person who holds out another person as his agent or knowingly allows another person to hold himself out as his agent, is liable to third persons in good faith in the same way as such person was his agent.

Section 822. Agent who acts beyond Authority – effect on 3rd Party

If an agent does an act in excess of his authority, but the third person has reasonable grounds, arising from the act of the principal, to believe that it was within his authority, the provisions of the foregoing section apply correspondingly.

Section 823. Agent Acting without Authority Does not Bind Principal

If an agent does an act without authority or beyond the scope of his authority, such act does not bind the principal unless he ratifies it.

If the principal does not ratify, the agent is personally liable to third persons, unless he proves that such third persons knew he was acting without authority or beyond the scope of the authority.

Section 824. Agent Liability for Contracts

If an agent makes a contract on behalf of a principal, who is living outside the country, is liable on the contract albeit the name of the principal has been mentioned on the contract.

The agent is not liable if the terms of the contract are inconsistent with his liability.

Section 825. Principal not bound by contract done by his agent unless he has given his consent.

(top)

Chapter 5: Extinction of Agency

Section 826. Revoking or Renouncing Agency

Agency is extinguished by the principal revoking or by the agent renouncing the agency.

It is also extinguished when either party dies or becomes incapacitated or bankrupt, unless the contrary appears from the terms of the agreement or the nature of the business.

Section 827. Revocation at any Time

The principal may revoke the authority and the agent may renounce the agency at any time.

Except in case of unavoidable necessity, the party who revokes or renounces the agency at a time which is inconvenient to the other party is liable to such party for any injury resulting therefrom.

Section 828. Death or Incapacity of the Principal

When agency is extinguished by the death of the principal or by the principal becoming incapacitated or bankrupt, the agent must take all reasonable steps to protect the interest entrusted to him until the heirs or representatives of the principal can protect such interest.

Section 829. Protecting the Interests of the Principal

When agency is extinguished by the death of the agent or the agent becoming incapacitated or bankrupt, the heir or the person having lawful charge of the agent’s estate must notify the principal and take steps to protect the interest of the principal as may be reasonable under the circumstances until the principal can protect such interest.

Section 830. Notification Requirements

The causes for extinction of agency, whether arising from the principal or agent, cannot be set up against the other party, until they have been notified to the other party or the latter has knowledge of them.

Section 831. Good Faith Third Parties

The extinction of agency cannot be set up against a third person acting in good faith, unless the third person is ignorant of the fact through his own negligence.

Section 832. Demand for Surrender of Written Authority

On extinction of agency, the principal is entitled to demand the surrender of any written authority given to the agent.

(top)

Chapter 6: Commission Agency

Section 833. Commission Agent

A commission agent is a person who, in the course of his business undertakes to buy sell property or undertakes any other commercial transaction in his own name on account of the principal.

Section 834. Remuneration

Unless otherwise agreed, a commission agent is entitled to a usual rate of remuneration on every transaction concluded by him.

Section 835. Commission Agency

The provisions of this Code concerning Agency apply to Commission Agency in so far as they are not contrary to the provisions of this Chapter.

Section 836. Incapacitated Person

An incapacitated person cannot act as commission agent unless duly authorized to that effect.

Section 837. Acquiring Rights to Property

The commission agent, by a sale or purchase or any other transaction made on account of the principal, acquires rights against the other party to such transaction and becomes bound to him.

Section 838. Liability for Performance

If the other party to the transaction does not perform his obligation, the commission agent is not himself liable to the principal for the performance unless it is provided by the contract, or may be implied from the course of dealing between the principal an agent, or by local usage.

The commission agent who undertakes to guarantee the execution of a contract upon the terms mentioned in the foregoing paragraph is a del credere agent and is entitled to a special remuneration.

Section 839. Sale for Lower Price than Agreed by Principal

When a commission agent has made a sale for a lower price or a purchase for a higher price than that designated by the principal, if the agent takes upon himself the difference, such sale or purchase takes effect against the principal.

Section 840. Sale for Higher Price Agreed by Principal

When a commission agent has made a sale for a higher price or purchase for a lower price than that designated by the principal, he cannot take the benefit on such transaction and must account it to the principal.

Section 841. Reporting Commission

The commission agent shall report his activities to the principal, and upon execution of the commission, shall inform the principal without delay.

Section 842. Entrusting Agent with Deposit

Where a property has been entrusted to a commission agent the provisions of this Code concerning Deposit apply mutatis mutandis.

In case of unavoidable necessity the commission agent may dispose of the property in a manner provided in Section 631 concerning Carriage.

Section 843. Order to Buy or Sell Property

A commission agent who has been ordered to sell or buy a property which has an exchange quotation may himself be the buyer or seller, unless he is expressly forbidden by the contract. In such a case the price to be paid is determined by the quotation of such property on the exchange at the time when the commission agent gives notice of his being the buyer or seller.

On receiving such notice the principal is deemed to have accepted the transaction, unless he refuses it at once.

A commission agent may even in such case charge remuneration.

Section 844. Transactions by Principal or Agent have the same effect

Between the principal and the commission agent, a transaction concluded by the latter shall have the same effect as if it had been concluded directly in the name of the principal.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XVI
BROKERAGE

Section 845. Broker

A person who agrees to pay remuneration to a broker for indicating the opportunity for the conclusion of a contract, or for procuring a contract, is liable to pay the remuneration only if the contract is concluded in consequence of the indication or of the procurement by the broker. If the contract is concluded subject to a condition precedent, the broker’s remuneration may not be claimed until the condition is fulfilled.

The broker is entitled to be reimbursed for expenses incurred only if it has been agreed upon. This applies even if a contract is not concluded.

Section 846. Fixed Remuneration

A broker’s remuneration is deemed to have been impliedly agreed upon, if the business entrusted to the broker is, under the circumstances, only to be expected for remuneration.

If the amount of the remuneration is not fixed, the usual remuneration is deemed to have been agreed upon.

Section 847. No Remuneration or reimbursement if already paid by 3rd Party

A broker is not entitled to remuneration or to reimbursement of his expenses if, contrary to his engagement, he has acted also for the third party or has been promised by such third party a remuneration which is not consistent with the broker acting in good faith.

Section 848. No Personal Liability for Performance

A broker is not personally liable for the performance of the contracts entered into through his mediation, unless he has not communicated the name of a party to the other party.

Section 849. No Right to Receive Payments

A broker is presumed to have no authority to receive on behalf of the party’s payments or other performances due under the contract.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XVII
COMPROMISE

Section 850. Compromise

A compromise is a contract whereby the parties settle a dispute, whether actual or contemplated by mutual concessions.

Section 851. Only Signed Compromised Enforceable

A contract of compromise is not enforceable by action unless there be some written evidence signed by the party liable or his agent.

Section 852. Compromise Extinguishes Claims by Each Party

The effect of the compromise is to extinguish the claims abandoned by each party and to secure to each party the rights which are declared to belong to him.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XVIII
GAMBLING AND BETTING

Section 853. No obligation is created by gambling or betting.

What has been given by reason of the gambling or betting may not be demanded back on the ground that no obligation existed.

These provisions apply also to an agreement whereby the losing party, for the purpose of satisfying a gambling debt or a bet, incurs an obligation towards the other party.

Section 854. Lottery Legal if Authorized by Government

A lottery contract or a raffle contract is binding if the lottery of the raffle is specially authorized or ratified by the Government. In all other cases the provisions of Section shall apply.

Section 855. Money given or received for gambling is invalid

Subject to the provisions of Sections 312 and 916, every bill or other given in whole or in part for any money won by gambling or betting, or for repaying money lent for such gambling or betting shall be invalid.

For the purpose of this provision, any money lent to a person while gambling or betting the time or place of such play shall be presumed to have been lent for such gambling or betting.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XIX
CURRENT ACCOUNT

Section 856. Current Account

A contract of current account is one in which two persons agree that henceforth or for a determinate period the amount of all or some only of the obligation arising from transactions between them shall be set off and that the balance only shall be paid.

Section 857. Bill for Current Account

The entry of a bill in a current account is presumed to be made on condition that the bill will be paid. If the bill is not paid, the entry may be cancelled.

Section 858. Period of Payment

If the parties have not fixed the period for striking the balance, such period shall be six months.

Section 859. Termination of Current Account

In the absence of anything appearing to the contrary, either party may at any time terminate the contract of current account and have the balance struck.

Section 860. Interest

The difference, if not paid, bears interest from the day when the balance was struck.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XX
INSURANCE

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 861. Insurance Contract

A contract of insurance is one in which a person agrees to make compensation or to pay a sum of money in case of contingent loss or any other future event specified in the contract, and another person agrees to pay therefor a sum of money, called premium.

Section 862. Definitions

In the present Title:

“Insurer” means the party who agrees to make compensation or to pay a sum of money. “Assured” means the party who agrees to pay the premium money.

“Beneficiary” means the person who is to receive compensation or to be paid a sum of.

The assured and the beneficiary may be one and the same person.

Section 863.

A contract of insurance is not binding on the parties unless the assured has an interest in the event insured against.

Section 864.

When the parties to a contract of insurance, in fixing the amount of the premium, took into consideration a particular risk, and such risk ceases to exist, the assured is entitled to have the premium reduced proportionately for the future.

Section 865.

If at the time of making the contract, the assured, or, in case of insurance on life, the person upon whose life or death the payment of the sum payable depends, knowingly omits to disclose facts which would have induced the insurer to raise the premium or to ref use to enter into the contract, or knowingly makes false statements in regard to such facts, the contract is voidable.

If such right of avoidance is not exercised within one month from the time when the insurer has knowledge of the ground of avoidance, or within five years from the date of the contract, such right is extinguished.

Section 866.

If the insurer knew of the facts mentioned in Section 865, or knew the statements to be false, or would have known of them – or of their falsity if he had exercised such care as may be expected from a person of ordinary prudence, the contract shall be valid.

Section 867. A contract of insurance is not enforceable by action unless there be some written evidence signed by the party liable or his agent.

A policy of insurance conforming to the contract shall be delivered to the assured.

The policy must be signed by the insurer and contain:

  1. The subject of the insurance.
  2. The risk taken by the insurer.
  3. The value of the insurable interest, if that has been fixed.
  4. The sum insured.
  5. The amount of the premium and manner of its payment.
  6. If the duration of the insurance has been fixed, its commencement and ending.
  7. The name or trade name of the insurer.
  8. The name or trade name of the assured.
  9. The name of the beneficiary, if any.
  10. The date of the contract of insurance.
  11. The place where, and the date when, the policy was made.

Section 868.

Contracts of Maritime insurance shall be governed by the provisions of the Maritime Law.

(top)

Chapter 2: Insurance Against Loss

Part 1: General Provisions

Section 869. Loss

“Loss”, within the meaning of this Chapter, includes any injury which may be estimated in money.

Section 870. Multiple Insurance Contracts

If two or more contracts of insurance are made simultaneously for the same loss and the total amount of the sum insured exceeds the actual amount of the loss, the beneficiary is entitled to receive compensation up to such amount only. Each insurer must pay a part of the actual loss in proportion to the sum insured by him.

Contracts of insurance are deemed to have been made simultaneously if their dates are the same.

If two or more contracts of insurance are made successively, the first insurer is first liable for the loss. If the amount paid by him is not sufficient to cover the loss, the next insurer is liable for the difference and so on, till the loss is covered.

Section 871. Renunciation of a Right

If two or more contracts of insurance are made simultaneously or successively, a renunciation of the right against one of the insurers does not affect the rights and duties of the others.

Section 872. Insured may terminate contract

Before the risk begins, the insured may terminate the contract, but the insurer is entitled to one half of the premium.

Section 873. Reduction of the Premium

If, during the period of insurance, the insurable interest is substantially reduced, the insured is entitled to a reduction of the sum insured and of the premium.

The reduction of the premium shall take effect only for the future.

Section 874. Reduction of the Compensation

If the parties have valued the insurable interest, the insurer is entitled to a reduction of the amount of compensation only if he proves that the agreed valuation is substantially too high and returns a proportionate amount of the premiums with interest.

Section 875. Transfer of the Rights of the Insured

If the subject of insurance passes from the insured by will or operation of law, the rights under the contract of insurance are transferred with it.

Unless otherwise provided by the contract, if the insured transfers the subject of insurance and notifies the transfer to the insurer, the rights under the contract of insurance are transferred with it. If, by such transfer, the risk is substantially altered or increased, the contract of insurance becomes void.

Section 876. Bankruptcy

If the insurer has been adjudged bankrupt, the insured may require proper security to be given him or may terminate the contract.

If the insured is adjudged bankrupt, the same rules shall apply correspondingly; however when the whole amount of the premium has been paid for a certain period of time, the insurer cannot terminate the contract before such period expires.

Section 877. Compensation Requirements

The insurer is bound to pay compensation for:

  1. The actual amount of the loss;
  2. The damage caused to the insured properly by reasonable measures taken for preventing the loss;
  3. All reasonable expenses incurred for preserving the insured properly from the loss. The actual amount of the loss shall be valued at the place where, and at the time when, the loss occurred. The sum insured is presumed to be a correct basis for such valuation.

The compensation cannot exceed the sum insured.

Section 878. Expense for Valuation

The expenses for valuation of the loss must be borne by the insurer.

Section 879. Bad Faith by the Insurance Beneficiary

The insurer is not liable if the loss or other event specified in the contract is caused by the bad faith or the gross negligence of the insured or the beneficiary.

The insurer is not liable for loss resulting directly from the inherent vice of the subject of insurance unless otherwise provided.

Section 880. Subrogation by Insurer against Third Parties

If the loss is caused by the act of a third person, the insurer who pays compensation is subrogated, up to the amount paid by him, to the rights of the insured and of the beneficiary against such third person.

If the insurer has paid part only of the compensation, he cannot exercise his right to the prejudice of the right of the insured or of the beneficiary to claim from the third person for the remainder of the loss.

Section 881. Assumed Loss and Notice

When a loss occurs from the happening of the risk assumed by the insurer, the insured or the beneficiary must after he had knowledge of such loss, without delay give notice thereof to the insurer.

If the provision of the foregoing paragraph is not complied with, the insurer can claim compensation for any damage suffered thereby unless the other party can prove that it is impracticable for him to comply with.

Section 882. Statute of Limitations

No action for payment of compensation can be entered later than two years after the date of the loss.

No action for payment or refund of a premium can be entered later than two years after the date when the right to payment or ref und of premium became due.

(top)

Part 2: Special Rules for Insurance on Carriage

Section 883. Carriage Insurance

A contract of insurance on carriage covers every loss which the goods carried may sustain from the time when they are received by the carrier until they are delivered to the consignee, and the amount of compensation is fixed according to the value which the goods carried would have had on arrival at the place of destination.

Section 884. Insurable Interest

If the goods carried are insured in course of their transportation, the insurable interest of such goods includes their value at the place where and at the time when they have been received by the carrier, increased by the freight to the place of delivery to the consignee and other expenses connected with transportation.

Profits to be made at the time when the goods were to be delivered, are included in the insurable interest only if there is an express agreement to that effect.

Section 885. Interruption in the Delivery

Unless otherwise specified by the contract, a contract of insurance on carriage remains valid if, under the necessities of transportation, the carriage is interrupted for a time, or there are modifications in the route or manner of carriage.

Section 886. Carrier’s Insurance Policy Requirements

The policy of insurance on carriage must contain in addition to the particulars specified in Section 867.

  1. The specification of the route and manner of the carriage;
  2. The name or trade name of the carrier;
  3. The place where the goods are to be received and delivered;
  4. The period fixed for the carriage, if any.

Part 3: Guarantee Insurance

Section 887. Guarantee Insurance

Guarantee insurance is a contract of insurance where the insurer agrees to make compensation, on behalf of the assured, for a loss caused to another person and for which the assured is responsible.

The injured person is entitled to receive the compensation actually due to him from the insurer directly, but such compensation cannot exceed the sum due by the insurer under the contract. In an action between the injured person and the insurer, the injured person shall summon the assured to appear in the action.

The insurer is not discharged from his liability to the injured person by delivering the compensation to the assured, unless he proves that the compensation has been paid by the assured to the injured person.

Section 888. Insurance does not Cover Entire Loss

If the compensation paid by the insurer under judgment does not cover the whole amount of the loss, the assured remains liable for the difference unless the injured person has failed to summon the assured to appear in the action as provided by the foregoing section.

(top)

Chapter 3: Insurance on Life

Section 889. Life Insurance

In a contract of insurance on life, the payment of the sum of money is dependent upon the life or death of a person.

Section 890. Lump Sum Payment of Annuity

The sum payable may be a lump sum or an annuity, as may be agreed between the parties.

Section 891. Transfer of Beneficiary Rights

Even in the case where the insured is not himself the beneficiary, he has the right to transfer the benefit of the contract to any other person unless he has delivered the policy to the beneficiary and the beneficiary has notified in writing the insurer his intention to take the benefit of the contract.

If the policy is made payable to order the provisions of Section 309 shall apply.

Section 892. Insurer Avoidance

In case of avoidance of the contract under Section 865, the insurer has to return to the insured or to his heirs the redemption value of the policy.

Section 893. False Information about Age

If the age of the person upon whose life or death the payment of the sum depends has been incorrectly stated, in consequence of which a lower premium has been fixed. The sum to be paid by the insurer shall be reduced in the same proportion.

However the contract is voidable if it is proved by the insurer that the real age at the time when the contract was made was out of the age-limit according to his business practice.

Section 894.

The insured is entitled at any time to terminate the contract of insurance by discontinuing to pay the premium. If the premium had been paid for at least three years, he is entitled to receive from the insurer the surrender value of the policy or a paid up policy.

Section 895. Insurer Bound to Pay on Death

Whenever the sum is to be paid on the death of a person, the insurer is bound to pay it on such death unless:

  1. Such person voluntarily committed suicide within one year after the date of the contract, or
  2. Such person was intentionally killed by the beneficiary.

In case number 2, the insurer is bound to pay the insured or to his heirs the redemption value of the policy.

Section 896.

If the death is caused by the fault of a third person, the insurer cannot claim compensation from that person, but the heirs of the deceased do not lose their right to compensation from the third person, even if the sum payable under the contract of insurance on life reverts to them.

Section 897.

If the insured has made an insurance payable on his death in favor of his heirs without specifying any particular person, the sum payable shall be part of the assets of his estate available for his creditors.

If the insurance has been made in favor of a particular person, only the amount of the premiums paid by the insured shall be part of the assets of his estate available for his creditors.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 898. Bills

Bills, within the meaning of this Code, are of three kinds, namely: bills of exchange, promissory notes and checks.

Section 899. Not a Bill

If matters not provided for in this Title are inserted in a bill, they have no effect under the bill.

Section 900. Signature required

A person who puts his signature upon a bill is liable thereon according to the tenor of such bill.

A mere mark, such as a cross or a finger-print purporting to be a signature on a bill, even if certified by witnesses, produces no specific effect under the bill.

Section 901. Notice required if acting on behalf of another

If a person puts his signature upon a bill without stating that he is acting on behalf of another person, he is personally liable upon the bill.

Section 902. Signature of Incapacitated Person

If a bill bears the signatures of persons who cannot at all, or with full effect, become parties to a bill, this does not affect the liability of the remaining persons liable on the bill.

Section 903. No Grace Period

No days of grace are allowed for the payment of a bill.

Section 904. Holder

Holder means a person who is in possession of a bill as a payee or endorsee, or the bearer if the bill is payable to bearer.

Section 905. Chain of Endorsements

Subject to the provisions of Section 1008 the possessor of a bill is deemed to be the lawful holder if he shows his title through an uninterrupted series of endorsement, even if the last endorsement is in blank. When an endorsement is blank is followed by another indorsement, the person who signed this last endorsement is deemed to have acquired the bill by the endorsement in blank. Cancelled endorsements are deemed to be non-existent.

Where a person has been dispossessed of a bill, the holder who shows his right thereto in the manner mentioned in the foregoing paragraph is not bound to give up the bill unless he has acquired it in bad faith, or unless in acquiring it he has been guilty of gross negligence.

The foregoing paragraph applies also to the holder of a bill payable to bearer.

Section 906. Prior Parties

The expression “prior parties” includes the drawer or maker of the bill and the prior endorsers.

Section 907. Allonge

When there is no room on a bill for further endorsement, a slip of paper, called an allonge, may be attached thereto. It becomes part of the bill.

The first indorsement on the allonge must be written partly on the bill itself and partly on the allonge.

(top)

Chapter 2: Bills of Exchange

Part 1: Drawing and Endorsement

Section 908. Bill of Exchange

A bill of exchange is a written instrument by which a person, called the drawer, orders another person, called the drawee, to pay a sum of money to, or to the order of, a person, called the payee.

Section 909. Requirements for a Bill of Exchange

A bill of exchange must contain the following particulars:

  1. The designation of it as a bill of exchange.
  2. An unconditional order to pay a sum certain in money.
  3. The name or trade name of the drawee.
  4. A day of maturity.
  5. The place of payment.
  6. The name or trade name of the payee, or a mention that it is payable to bearer.
  7. The date and place where the bill is issued.
  8. The signature of the drawer.

Section 910. Missing Requirements can be valid in circumstances.

An instrument in which any of the requirements specified in the foregoing section is wanting is invalid as a bill of exchange, except in the following cases:

  1. A bill of exchange in which no time of payment is specified is deemed to be payable at sight.
  2. If the place where payment is to be effected is not stated in a bill of exchange, the domicile of the drawee shall be considered to be the place of payment.
  3. A bill of exchange which does not show the place at which it was drawn is considered as having been drawn at the domicile of the drawer.
  4. If a bill of exchange does not mention the date on which it was drawn, any lawful holder, acting in good faith, may insert the true date.

Section 911. Interest from the Date of the Bill

The drawer may stipulate that the sum payable shall bear interest, in which case, unless otherwise provided, interest runs from the date of the bill.

Section 912. Payable to Who

A bill of exchange may be drawn payable to the drawer’s order, it may be drawn on the drawer himself or on account of a third person.

Section 913. Maturity Period

The maturity of the bill of exchange is:

  1. On a fixed day, or
  2. At the end of a fixed period after the date of the bill, or
  3. On demand, or at sight, or
  4. At the end of a fixed period after sight.

Section 914. Endorsement of Bill

Any person who draws or endorses a bill of exchange engages that on due presentment it shall be accepted and paid according to its tenor and that, if it be dishonored by non-acceptance or non-payment, he will pay it to the holder or to a subsequent indorser who has been compelled to pay it, provided that the requisite proceedings on non-acceptance or non-payment have been duly taken.

Section 915. Stipulations on the Bill

The drawer of a bill of exchange, and any endorser, may insert therein an express stipulation:

  1. Negating or limiting his own liability to the holder;
  2. Waiving as regards himself some or all of the holder’s duties.

Section 916. Lawsuit over Bill

Persons sued on a bill of exchange cannot set up against the holder defenses founded on their personal relations with the drawer or with previous holders, unless the transfer has taken place in pursuance of a fraudulent understanding.

Section 917. Transfer of Bill

Every bill of exchange, even if not expressly drawn to order, may be transferred by means of an indorsement and delivery.

When the drawer has written on the face of a bill of exchange the words “not negotiable” or any equivalent expression, the bill can be transferred only according to the form, and with the effects of an ordinary transfer.

The bill may be indorsed to the drawee, whether he has accepted or not, or to the drawer, or to any other party to the bill. These persons may indorse the bill afresh.

Section 918. Bearer Bills

A bill of exchange payable to bearer is transferred by mere delivery.

Section 919. Indorsement

An indorsement must be written on the bill of exchange, or on an allonge. It must be signed by the indorser.

An indorsement is valid even though the beneficiary is not specified, or the indorser has done nothing more than put his signature on the back of the bill or allonge in which case it is called “indorsement in blank”.

Section 920. Blank Indorsement

An indorsement transfers all the rights arising out of a bill of exchange.

If the indorsement is in blank, the holder may:

  1. Fill up the blank, either with his own name or with the name of some other person.
  2. Indorse the bill again in blank, or to some other person.
  3. Transfer the bill to a third person without filling up the blank, and without indorsing

Section 921. Guarantee

The indorsement of a bill of exchange payable to bearer operates only as a guarantee for the drawer.

Section 922. Indorsement Unconditional

An indorsement must be unconditional. Any condition to which it is made subject is deemed to be unwritten.

A partial indorsement is void.

Section 923. Prohibited Further Endorsement

If an indorser specifies that he forbids further indorsement, he incurs no liability to the person to whom the bill of exchange is subsequently indorsed.

Section 924. Endorsed after Time Expiration

If a bill of exchange is endorsed after the expiration of the time for protest for non-acceptance or non-payment, then the endorsee acquires the rights of any existing acceptance against the drawee, and the rights of recourse against those who have indorsed the bill after the expiration of such time.

If, however, the bill is already protested for non-acceptance or non-payment before the indorsement, the endorsee has only the rights of his indorser against the acceptor, the drawer, and those who have indorsed the bill up to the time of protest.

Section 925. Collection

When an indorsement contains the stipulation “value in collection”, “for collection”, “by procuration” or any other phrase implying agency, the holder may exercise all rights flowing from the bill of exchange, but he can only indorse it in the capacity of an agent.

In this case the parties liable can only set up against the holder defenses which could be set up against the indorser.

Section 926. Security or Pledge

When an indorsement contains the stipulation “value in security”, “value in pledge” or any other stipulation implying a pledge, the holder may exercise all the tights flowing from the bill of exchange, but an indorsement by him only avails as an agency indorsement.

The parties liable cannot set up against the holder defenses founded on their personal relations with the indorser, unless the indorsement has taken place in pursuance of a fraudulent understanding.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Part 2: Acceptance

Section 927. Acceptance

Up to maturity, a bill of exchange may be presented to the drawee for acceptance at the place where he resides, either by the holder or by a simple possessor.

In any bill of exchange, the drawer may stipulate that it shall be presented for acceptance, with or without fixing a limit of time for presentment.

Except in the case of a bill drawn payable at a particular place other than the drawee’s domicile or a bill drawn payable at a certain time after sight, the drawer may prohib.il presentment for acceptance.

The drawer may also stipulate that presentment for acceptance shall not take place before a certain date.

Every indorser may stipulate that the bill shall be presented for acceptance with or without fixing a limit of time for presentment, unless the drawer has prohibited acceptance.

Section 928. Presentation of the Bill

The holder of a bill of exchange payable at the end of a period after sight must present it for acceptance within six months from its date, or within such shorter or longer time as specified by the drawer.

Section 929. Immediate Acceptance

Subject to the provisions of Section 927, the holder of a bill of exchange has a right to present it to the drawee immediately for acceptance; and if it has not been accepted within twenty-four hours, the holder has a right to protest it.

Section 930. Requirement for Second Presentation

When a bill of exchange is presented for acceptance, the holder is not obliged to leave it in the hands of the drawee.

The drawee may demand that a bill of exchange shall be presented to him a second time on the day after the first presentment. Parties interested are not allowed to set up that this demand has not been complied with unless the demand is specified in the protest.

Section 931. Acceptance of Bill

An acceptance is written on the face of the bill of exchange. It is expressed by the word “accepted”, or any other equivalent term and signed by the drawee. The mere signature of the drawee on the face of the bill constituted an acceptance.

Section 932. Undated or Wrong Date Draft

Where a bill of exchange expressed to be payable at a fixed period after date is issued is undated, or where the acceptance of a bill payable at a fixed period after sight is undated, any holder may insert therein the true date of issue or acceptance and the bill shall be payable accordingly.

Provided that where the holder in good faith and by mistake inserts a wrong date and in every case where a wrong date is inserted, if the bill subsequently comes into the hands of a lawful holder, the bill shall not be avoided thereby but shall operate and be payable as if the date so inserted has been the true date.

Section 933. Undated Acceptance

If the acceptance is not dated, the last day of the period fixed for acceptance is deemed to be the day of acceptance.

Section 934. Cancelled Bill

Where the drawee who has put his acceptance on a bill of exchange has cancelled it before the bill has left his hands, acceptance is deemed to be refused; nevertheless, the drawee is bound, according to terms of his acceptance, if he has cancelled it after he has in writing informed the holder or any other party who has signed the bill that he has accepted it.

Section 935. Acceptance is either general or qualified.

A general acceptance assents without qualification to the order of the drawer. A qualified acceptance in express terms varies the effect of the bill as drawn. In particular an acceptance is qualified which is conditional or partial.

Section 936. Qualified Acceptance

The holder of a bill of exchange may refuse to take a qualified acceptance, and if he does not obtain an unqualified acceptance, may treat the bill as dishonored by non-acceptance.

Where a qualified acceptance is taken, and the drawer or an indorser has not expressly or impliedly authorized the holder to take a qualified acceptance, or does not subsequently assent thereto, such drawer or indorser is discharged from his liability on the bill. These provisions do not apply to a partial acceptance, whereof due notice has been given.

Where the drawer or indorser of a bill receives notice of a qualified acceptance, and does not within a reasonable time express his dissent to the holder he shall be deemed to have assented thereto.

Section 937. Bound to Pay

By acceptance of the bill of exchange the drawee becomes bound to pay the amount accepted according to the tenor of his acceptance.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Part 3: Aval

Section 938. Aval (Guarantee)

Payment of a bill of exchange may be wholly or partly guaranteed by a surety called “aval”.

An aval may be given by a third person or even by any party to the bill.

Section 939. How to Give an Aval

An aval is either given on the bill itself or on an allonge.

It is expressed by the words “good as aval” or by any equivalent expression. It is signed by the giver of aval.

It is deemed to be constituted by the mere signature of the giver of the aval placed on the face of the bill, except in the case of the signature of the drawee or of the drawer.

An aval must specify for whose account it is given. In default of this, it is deemed to be given for the drawer.

Section 940. Bounding Guaranteed

The giver of an aval is bound in the same manner as the person whom he guarantees.

His engagement is valid even when the liability which he has guaranteed is inoperative for any reason other than defect of form.

He has, when he pays the bill of exchange, the right of recourse against the person whom he has guaranteed, and the persons responsible for the latter.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Part 4: Payment

Section 941. Payment

A bill of exchange is payable on the day of its maturity. The holder must present it for payment on that day.

Section 942. Cannot force Payment before Maturity

The holder of a bill of exchange cannot be compelled to receive payment thereof before maturity.

The drawee who pays before maturity does so at his own risk and peril.

Section 943. Maturity Date

The maturity of a bill of exchange payable at a certain period after sight is determined either by the date of the acceptance, or by the date of the protest.

In the absence of the protest, an undated acceptance is deemed so far as regards the acceptor to have been given on the last day of the limit of time for presentment either legal or contractual.

Section 944. Bill of exchange at Sight

A bill of exchange at sight is payable on presentment. It must be presented for payment within the time required for the presentment for acceptance of bills payable at a certain time after sight.

Section 945. Surrender of Bill

Payment may be obtained only on surrender of the bill of exchange. The payer may require the holder to sign a receipt on the bill.

Section 946. Refusal for Partial Payment

The holder of a bill of exchange may refuse part payment.

If he accepts part payment, he must note it on the bill and deliver a receipt to the payer.

Section 947. No Presentation on Date of Maturity

If a bill of exchange is not presented for payment on the day of maturity, the acceptor may free himself from his liability by depositing the amount due on the bill.

Section 948. Extension of Maturity Date

If the holder grants an extension of time to the drawee, he loses his right of recourse against the prior parties who do not agree to the extension.

Section 949. Discharge

Subject to the provisions of Section 1009, a person who pays at maturity is discharged, unless there has been fraud or gross negligence on his part. He is bound to verify the regularity of the series of indorsement, but not the signatures of the indorsers.

(top)

Part 5: Intervention for Honor

Section 950. Specification of Person to Accept Payment

The drawer or an endorser may specify a person who is to accept or pay in case of need at the place of payment.

A bill of exchange may, under the conditions hereafter set forth, be accepted or paid by a person who intervenes for any person who has signed it.

The intervener may be a third person, even the drawee, or the person already liable on the bill, except only the acceptor.

The intervener is bound to give without delay notice of his intervention to the party for whom he has intervened.

Section 951. Acceptance by Intervention

There may be acceptance by intervention in all cases where the holder has the right of recourse before maturity on a bill which is capable of acceptance.

The holder may refuse an acceptance by intervention, even when it is offered by a person designated to accept or pay in case of need.

If he permits the acceptance, he loses his right of recourse before maturity against the parties liable to him.

Section 952. Specification in Bill of Exchange

Acceptance by intervention is specified on the bill of exchange. It is signed by the intervener. It specifies for whose account it has been given, and in default of this specification the acceptance is deemed to have been given for the drawer.

Section 953. Liability for Acceptance by Intervention

The acceptor by intervention is liable to the holder and to the indorsers subsequent to the party for whose account he intervened in the same manner as the latter.

Section 954. Honoring Payment Before or at Maturity

Payment for honor may take place in all cases where either at maturity or before maturity the holder has the right of recourse.

At the latest it must be made on the day following the last day allowed for drawing up the protest for non-payment.

Section 955. Acceptance for Payment

If a bill of exchange has been accepted for honor, or if persons have been specified to pay it in case of need, the holder must at the place of payment present the bill to all these persons, and, if need be, cause a protest for non-payment to be drawn up at the latest on the day following the last day for drawing up the protest.

In default of protest within this limit of time, the party who has indicated the case of need, or for whose account the bill has been accepted, and the subsequent indorsers are discharged.

Section 956. Honor Payment Amount

Payment for honor must include the whole sum which the party for whom it is made would have had to pay, with the exception of the commission provided for by Section 968 (4).

The holder who ref uses this payment loses his right of recourse against those who would have been discharged thereby.

Section 957. Receipt

Payment for honor must be authenticated by a receipt given on the bill of exchange specifying for whom payment has been made. In default of this specification, payment is deemed to have been made for the drawer.

The bill of exchange and the protest, if the protest has been drawn up, must be handed over to the person paying for honor.

Section 958. Subrogation of Rights

The person who pays for honor is subrogated to the rights of the holder against the party for whom he has paid, and against the parties liable to him. Nevertheless he cannot indorse the bill of exchange afresh. Endorsers subsequent to the party for whom payment has been made are discharged.

In case of competition for payment for honor, the payment which effects the greater number of releases has the preference.

If this rule is not observed, the payer who has notice loses his right of recourse against those who would have been discharged.

(top)

Part 6: Recourse for Non-acceptance or Non-payment

Section 959. Recourse for Non-Acceptance or Non-Payment

The holder may exercise his right of recourse against the indorsers, the drawer and the other persons liable under the bill.

  1. At maturity, if payment has not been made
  2. Even before maturity,
    1. When acceptance has been refused;
    2. When the drawee, whether he has accepted or not, has become bankrupt, or has suspended payment, even if the suspension is not authenticated by a judgment; or where execution has been levied against his goods without result;
    3. When the drawer of a bill which need not be accepted has become bankrupt.

Section 960. Protest

Default of acceptance or payment must be evidenced by a formal document, called protest.

Protest for non-payment must be made either on the day when the bill is payable or on one of the three following days.

Protest for non-acceptance must be made within the limit of time fixed for presentment for acceptance or within the three following days.

Protest for non-acceptance dispenses with presentment for payment and protest for non-payment.

In the cases provided for by Section 959 b) (2), the holder cannot exercise his right of recourse until after presentment of the bill to the drawee for payment, and after the protest has been drawn up.

In the cases provided for by Section 959 b) (3), the production of the judgment pronouncing the bankruptcy of the drawer, suffices to enable the holder to exercise his right of recourse.

Section 961. Submission of Protest

A protest shall be made by a district officer (Nai Amphoe) or his deputy or by an attorney having a license for that purpose.

The Minister of Justice is empowered to issue regulations for carrying out the provisions of this Code concerning the issue of the license and the making of the protest as well as for fixing costs and fees in connection therewith.

Section 962. Requirements of a Protest

The protest must, in addition to the name, title and signature of the person making it, contain an exact copy of the bill with all indorsements and specify:

  1. The name or trade name of the person for whom and against whom the bill is protested.
  2. The cause or reason for protesting the bill, the demand made, and the answer given if any, or the fact that the drawee or acceptor could not be found.
  3. If there is an acceptance or payment for honour the nature of the intervention and the name or trade name of the acceptor or payer for honour and of the person for whose honour intervention is made.
  4. The place and date of protest.

The protest shall be delivered to the person at whose request it is made. The person making the protest shall forthwith give notice thereof to the person against whom it is made, if his domicile is known, either by registered letter or by having it delivered at such domicile; if his domicile is not known, by posting a copy of the protest in a conspicuous place in the office of the district officer (Nai Amphoe) of his last residence.

Section 963. Time to Accept or Deny the Protest

The holder must give notice of non-acceptance or non-payment to his immediate indorser, and to the drawer, within four days following the day of protest, or the day of presentment in case where there is a stipulation protest not necessary.”

Every indorser must within two days, give notice to his immediate indorser of the notice which he has received, mentioning the names and addresses of those who have given the previous notices and so on through the series until the drawer is reached. The limit of time mentioned above runs from the receipt of the preceding notice.

Where an indorser either has not specified his address, or has specified it in an illegible manner, it is sufficient that notice should be given to the preceding indorser.

A person who must give notice, may give it in any form whatever, even by the simple return of the bill of exchange. He must prove that he has given it within the prescribed limit of time.

He shall be deemed to have given it within the prescribed limit of time, if a registered letter giving the notice has been posted within the aforesaid time.

A person who does not give notice within the limit of time mentioned above, does not lose his right of recourse. He is liable for any injury caused by his negligence, but the compensation shall not exceed the amount of the bill of exchange.

Section 964. Protest Not Necessary

The drawer or an indorser may, by a stipulation “protest not necessary”, “without protest”, or any other equivalent expression, allow the holder the dispense with a protest for non-acceptance or non-payment, in order to exercise his right of recourse.

This stipulation does not release the holder from presenting the bill within the prescribed time, nor from giving notice of dishonor to a preceding indorser or the drawer. The burden of proving the non-observance of the limits of time lies on the person who seeks to set them up against the holder.

When this stipulation is inserted by the drawer, it takes effect as regards all parties who have signed the bill. If, in spite of this stipulation, the holder has the protest drawn up, he must bear the expenses thereof. When the stipulation is inserted by an indorser, the expenses of protest, if it has been drawn up, can be recovered from all the other parties who signed the bill.

Section 965. Inland Bills

In case of inland bills, if the drawee notes on the bill of exchange the fact and date of refusal of acceptance or payment and signs such note, no protest is necessary and the holder must, within four days following the date of refusal, send notice of dishonor to the person or persons against whom he intends to take recourse.

Section 966. Notice of Dishonor Requirements

The notice of dishonor in case of non-acceptance or non-payment must contain the date of the bill of exchange, the names or trade names of the drawer and drawee, the amount of the bill, the day of the maturity, the name or trade name and address of the holder, the date of the protest or of the refusal of acceptance or payment, and the fact that the bill was not accepted or paid.

Section 967. Liability of Guarantor

All persons who have drawn, accepted, indorsed or guaranteed by aval a bill of exchange are jointly liable to the holder.

The holder has the right of proceeding against all these persons individually or collectively without being required to observe the order in which they have become bound.

The same right belongs, as against prior parties, to every person who has signed the bill and taken it up.

Proceedings against one of the parties liable do not prevent proceedings against others, though they may be subsequent to the person first proceeded against.

Section 968. Recovery with Right of Recourse

The holder may recover from the person against whom he exercises his right of recourse:

  1. The amount of the unaccepted or unpaid bill of exchange with interest, if interest has been stipulated for.
  2. Interest at the rate of 5 per cent per annum from the date of maturity.
  3. The expenses of protest and of the notices given by the holder to his immediate indorser and the drawer, as well as other expenses.
  4. A commission which, in the absence of an agreement, shall be 1/6 per cent on the principal payable by the bill, and which in no case can exceed this rate.

If the right of recourse is exercised before maturity, the amount of the bill shall be subject to a discount of 5 per cent.

Section 969. Transfer of Debt

A party who takes up and pays a bill of exchange can recover from the parties liable to him:

  1. The entire sum which he has paid.
  2. Interest on the said sum calculated at the rate of 5 per cent per annum, starting from the day when he made payment.
  3. Expenses which he has incurred.
  4. Commission on the principal sum of the bill of exchange fixed in conformity with Section 968 subsection 4.

Section 970. Cancellation of Debt

Every party liable against whom a right of recourse is, or may be, exercised, can require, against payment, that the bill shall be given up to him with the protest and receipted account.

Every indorser who has taken up and paid a bill of exchange may cancel his own indorsement and those of subsequent indorsers.

Section 971. Re-endorsed or Re-Transferred

A drawers, acceptor or prior indorser to whom a bill of exchange has been re-endorsed or retransferred has no right of recourse against a party to whom he was previously liable under the bill.

Section 972. Partial Payment of Protested Bill

In case of exercise of the right of recourse after a partial acceptance, the party who pays the sum in respect of which the bill has not been accepted can require that this payment should be specified on the bill, and that a receipt be given therefor. The holder must also give him a certified copy of the bill, together with the protest, in order to allow the exercise of subsequent recourse.

Section 973. After time limit

After the expiration of the limits of time fixed:

  1. For the presentment of a bill of exchange payable at sight or at a certain time after sight;
  2. For drawing up the protest for non-acceptance or non-payment;
  3. For presentment for payment in the case of a stipulation “protest not necessary”

The holder loses his rights or recourse against the indorsers, against the drawer, and against the other parties liable, with the exception of the acceptor.

In default of presentment for acceptance within the limit of time stipulated for by the drawer, the holder loses his right of recourse for non-payment, as well as for non-acceptance, unless it appears from the terms of the stipulation that the drawer meant only to release himself from the guarantee of acceptance.

If the stipulation for a limit of time for presentment is contained in an indorsement, the indorser only can avail himself of it.

Section 974. Unavoidable Necessity of Delay

When presentment of a bill of exchange or drawing up the protest within the prescribed limits of time is prevented by an unavoidable necessity these times are prolonged.

The holder is bound to give without delay notice of the case of unavoidable necessity to his immediate indorser, and to specify this notice, which he must date and sign, on the bill or on an allonge; as regards other matters, the provisions of Section 963 apply.

After the cessation of the unavoidable necessity the holder must without delay present the bill for acceptance or payment, and, if need be, have the protest drawn up.

If the unavoidable necessity continues to operate for more than thirty days after the maturity of the bill recourse may be exercised, and neither presentment nor drawing up the protest shall be necessary.

As regards bills payable at sight or at a certain time after sight, the term of thirty days begins to run from the date on which the holder has, even before the expiration of the time for presentment, given notice of the unavoidable necessity to his immediate indorser.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS
CHAPTER II: BILLS OF EXCHANGE
PART VII
Bills of Exchange in a set

Section 975. Bills in a Set

Except in the case of bills of exchange payable to bearer, a bill of exchange can be drawn in two or more identical duplicates.

These duplicates must be numbered in the body of the instrument, failing which each duplicate is good as a separate bill of exchange.

Every holder of a bill which does not specify that it has been drawn as a so/a bill may, at his own expense, require the delivery of two or more duplicates. For this purpose he must address himself to his immediate indorser, who is bound to help him in proceeding against his own indorser, and so on in the series until the drawer is reached. The indorsers are bound to reproduce their indorsements on the new duplicates of the set.

Section 976. Endorsement of Duplicates

Where the holder of a set endorses two or more duplicates to different persons, he is liable on every such duplicate, and every indorser subsequent to him is liable on the duplicate he has himself indorsed as if the said duplicates were separate bills.

Section 977. First Title is the True Owner

Where two or more duplicates of a set are negotiated to different lawful holders, the holder whose title first accrues is as between such holders deemed the true owner of the bill; but nothing in this section shall affect the rights of a person who lawfully accepts of pays the duplicate first presented to him.

Section 978. Written Acceptance

The acceptance may be written on any duplicate, and it must be written on one duplicate only.

If the drawee accepts more than one duplicate, and such accepted duplicates get into the hands of different lawful holders, he is liable on every such duplicate as if it were a separate bill.

Section 979. If no duplicate

When the acceptor of a bill drawn in a set pays it without requiring the duplicate bearing his acceptance to be delivered up to him, and that duplicate at maturity is outstanding in the hands of a lawful holder, he is liable to the holder thereof.

Section 980. Discharge of a Bill

Subject to the foregoing provisions, where any one duplicate of a bill drawn in a set is discharged by payment or otherwise, the whole bill is discharged.

Section 981. Protest

A party who has sent one duplicate for acceptance must indicate on the other duplicate the name of the person in whose hands this duplicate will be found. That person is bound to give it up to the lawful holder of another duplicate.

If he refuses, the holder cannot exercise his right of recourse until after he has a protest drawn up, specifying:

  1. That the duplicate sent for acceptance has not been given up to him on his demand.
  2. That acceptance or payment could not be obtained on another of the duplicates.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS
CHAPTER II: BILLS OF EXCHANGE
PART VII
CHAPTER III
PROMISSORY NOTES

Section 982.

A promissory note is a written instrument by which a person, called the maker, promises to pay a sum of money to, or to the order of, another person, called the payee.

Section 983. Requirements of a Promissory Note

  1. The designation of it as a promissory note.
  2. An unconditional promise to pay a sum certain in money.
  3. A day of maturity.
  4. The place of payment.
  5. The name or trade name of the payee.
  6. The date and place where the promissory note is made.
  7. The signature of the maker.

Section 984. Missing Promissory Note Requirements but Still Valid

An instrument in which any of the requirements specified in the foregoing section is wanting, is invalid as a promissory note, except in the following cases:

  • A promissory note in which no time of payment is specified is deemed to be payable at sight.
  • If the place where payment is to be effected is not stated in a promissory note, the domicile of the maker shall be considered to be the place of payment.
  • A promissory note which does not specify its place of issue is deemed to have been made at the domicile of the maker.
  • If there is no date of issue, any lawful holder acting in good faith may insert the true date.

Section 985. Other Sections which Apply to Promissory Notes

The following provisions of Chapter II relating to Bills of Exchange apply to Promissory Notes in so far as they are not inconsistent with the nature of this instrument, namely, Sections 911, 913, 916, 917, 919, 920, 922 to 926, 938 to 947, 949, 950, 954 to 959, 967 to 971.

In case of foreign promissory notes the following provisions shall also apply, namely, Sections 960 to 964, 973, 974.

Section 986. Time Limits for Presentation of Promissory Notes

The maker of a promissory note is bound in the same manner as an acceptor of a bill of exchange.

Promissory notes payable at a certain time after sight must be presented for the visa of the maker within the limits of time fixed by Section 928.

The limit of time runs from the date of the visa, signed by the maker of the note. The refusal of the maker to give his visa with the date thereon, must be authenticated by a protest the date of which gives the point of departure for the limit of time from sight.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS
CHAPTER II: BILLS OF EXCHANGE
PART VII
CHAPTER IV
CHECKS

Section 987. Checks

A check is a written instrument by which a person, called the drawer, orders a banker to pay on demand a sum of money to, or to the order of, a person, called the payee.

Section 988. Requirements of a Check

A Check must contain the following particulars:

  1. The designation of it as a Check.
  2. An unconditional order to pay a sum certain in money.
  3. The name or trade name and address of the banker.
  4. The name or trade name of the payee or a mention that it is payable to bearer.
  5. The place of payment.
  6. The date and place where the Check is issued.
  7. The signature of the drawer.

Section 989. Sections that do not apply to Checks

The following provisions of Chapter II relating to Bills of Exchange apply to Checks in so far as they are not inconsistent with the nature of this instrument, namely, sections 910, 914 to 923, 925, 926, 938 to 940, 945, 946, 959, 967, 971.

In case of foreign Checks the following provisions shall also apply, namely, Sections 924, 960 to 964, 973 to 977, 980.

Section 990. Time limit to Present check

The holder of a check must present it for payment to the banker within one month after the date of issue if it is payable in the same town where it is issued, or within three months if it is payable elsewhere; otherwise he loses his right of recourse against the indorsers; he also loses his right against the drawer to the extent of any injury caused to the drawer by failure of such presentment.

The holder of such Check as to which such drawer is discharged shall be subrogated to the rights of such drawer against the banker.

Section 991. Banker is required to Pay

A banker is bound to pay a check drawn on him by his customer unless:

  1. There is not enough money to the credit of the account of the customer to meet the check, or
  2. The check is presented for payment later than six months after the date of drawing, or
  3. Notice is given that the check has been lost or stolen.

Section 992. End of Banker’s Duty

The duty and authority of a banker to pay a check drawn on him come to an end on:

  1. Countermand of payment
  2. Knowledge of the drawer’s death
  3. Knowledge or publication of an interim receiving order or bankruptcy order against the drawer

Section 993. Banker’s Approval

If the banker signs on the check a statement such as “good” or good for payment,” or works to the same effect, he becomes bound, as principal debtor, to pay the check to the holder.

If the holder of a check procures it to be so certified, the drawer and endorsers are discharged from liability thereon.

If it is so certified at the drawer’s request, the drawer and endorsers are not discharged.

Section 994. Two Crossed Parallel Lines

If a check bears across its face two parallel transverse lines either with or without the words “and company” or any abbreviation thereof between such lines, it is said to be crossed generally and payment of it can only be made to a banker.

If between such lines a names or any particular banker is inserted, such check is said to be crossed specially and payment of it can only be made to that banker.

Section 995. Crossed and Uncrossed Checks

    1. An uncrossed check may be crossed generally or specifically by the drawer or any holder.
    2. Where a check is crossed generally, the holder may cross it specially
    3. Where a check is crossed generally or specially, the holder may add the words “not negotiable.”
    4. Where a check is crossed specially, the banker to whom it is crossed may again cross it specifically to another banker for collection.
    5. Where an uncrossed check or a check crossed generally is sent to a banker for collection, he may cross it specialty to himself.

Section 996. Cannot Obliterate Crossed Check

A crossing authorized in the forgoing section is a material part of the check. It shall not be lawful for any person to obliterate it.

Section 997. Crossed to Specially more than one Banker

Where a check is crossed specially to more than one banker except when crossed to an agent for collection being a banker, the banker on whom it is drawn shall ref use payment thereof.

Where a banker on whom a check is drawn which is so crossed nevertheless pays the same, or pays a check crossed generally otherwise than through a banker, or if crossed specially otherwise than to the banker to whom it is crossed or his agent for collection being a banker, he is liable to the true owner of the check for any loss he may sustain owing to the check having been so paid.

Provided that where a check is presented for payment which does not at the time of presentment appear to be crossed, or to have had a crossing which has been obliterated, or to have been added to or altered otherwise than as authorized by law, the banker paying the Check in good faith and without negligence shall not be responsible or incur any liability.

Section 998. Paying a Check in Good Faith

Where the banker, on whom a crossed check is drawn, in good faith and without negligence pays it, if crossed generally, to a banker, and if crossed specially, to the banker to whom it is crossed, or his agent for collection being a banker, the banker paying the check, and, if the check has come into the hands of the payee, the drawer, shall respectively be entitled to the same rights and be placed in the same position as if payment of the check had been made to the true owner thereof.

Section 999. Acceptance of a Non-Negotiable Check

Where a person takes a crossed check which bears on it the words “not negotiable”, he shall not have and shall not be capable of giving a better title to the Check than that which the person from whom he took it had.

Section 1000. Liability for Wrongful Payment

Where a banker in good faith and without negligence receives payment for a customer of a check crossed generally or specially to himself, and the customer has no title or a defective title thereto, the banker shall not incur any liability to the true owner of the check by reason only of having received such payment.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS
CHAPTER II: BILLS OF EXCHANGE
PART VII
CHAPTER V
PRESCRIPTION

Section 1001. Statute of Limitations

No action against the acceptor of a bill of exchange or the maker of a promissory note can be entered later than three years after the date of maturity.

Section 1002. No Action after One Year against Indorses

No action by the holder against the indorsers and against the drawer of a bill can be entered later than one year after the date of the protest drawn up in proper time or after the date of maturity where there is a stipulation “protest not necessary”.

Section 1003. No Action of Recourse by Indorsers after 6 months

No action of recourse by the indorsers against each other and against the drawer of a bill can be entered later than six months after the day when the indorser took up and paid the bill or from the day when he himself was sued.

Section 1004. Acts that delay action will have affect against delaying party

When a prescription is interrupted by any act towards any party to a bill the interruption shall have effect against such party only.

Section 1005. Obligations after Prescription

Unless otherwise agreed, if a bill has been made, transferred or indorsed in respect of an obligation and the rights under such bill have been lost by prescription or by the omission of any necessary proceedings, the original obligation remains in force under the general principles of law, in so far as the debtor has not been prejudiced thereby.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXI
BILLS
CHAPTER II: BILLS OF EXCHANGE
PART VII
CHAPTER VI
FORGED, STOLEN AND LOST BILLS

Section 1006. Forgery effect on Valid Signatures

The forgery of a signature on a bill in no way affects the validity of other signatures.

Section 1007. Effect of Material Alterations

Where a bill or acceptance is materially altered without the assent of all parties liable on the bill, the bill is void, except as against a party who has himself made, authorized, or assented to the alteration, and subsequent indorser.

Provided that where a bill has been materially altered, but the alteration is not apparent, and the bill is in the hands of a lawful holder, such holder may avail himself of the bill as if it had not been altered, and may enforce payment of it according to its original tenor.

In particular the following alterations are material, namely, any alteration of the date, the sum payable, the time of payment, the place of payment, and, where a bill has been accepted generally, the addition of a place of payment without the acceptor’s assent.

Section 1008. Invalidity of a Forged Signature

Subject to the provisions of this Code, where a signature on a bill is forged or placed thereon without the authority of the person whose signature it purports to be, the forged or unauthorized signature is wholly inoperative, and no right to retain the bill or to give a discharge therefor or to enforce payment thereof against any party thereto can be acquired through or under that signature, unless the party against whom it is sought to retain or enforce payment of the bill is precluded from setting up the forgery or want of authority.

Provided that nothing in this section shall affect the ratification of an unauthorized signature not amounting to a forgery.

Section 1009. Good Faith Payment of a Bill by a Banker

When a bill payable to order on demand is drawn on a banker, and the banker on whom it is drawn pays the bill in good faith, without negligence and in the ordinary course of business it is not incumbent on the banker to show that the endorsement of the payee or any subsequent indorsement was made by or under the authority of the person whose endorsement it purports to be, and the banker is deemed to have paid the bill in due course although such indorsement has been forged or made without authority.

Section 1010. Notification of a Loss or Stolen Bill

The holder of a bill which is lost or stolen must, as soon as he knows of the loss or theft, notify in writing the maker, the drawee, the referee in case of need, the acceptor for honor and the giver of aval, if any, to refuse payment of the bill.

Section 1011. Security to the Drawer for Lost Bill

Where a bill has been lost before it is overdue, the person who was the holder of it may apply to the drawer to give him another bill of the same tenor, giving security to the drawer if required to indemnify him against all persons whatever in case the bill alleged to have been lost shall be found again.

If the drawer on request as aforesaid refuses to give such duplicate bill, he may be compelled to do so.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER I
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1012. Partnership and Companies

A contract for the organization of a partnership or company is a contract whereby two or more persons agree to unite for a common undertaking, with a view of sharing profit the profits which may be derived therefrom.

Section 1013. Three kinds of partnerships or companies:

Ordinary partnerships, Limited partnerships, and Limited companies

Section 1014. Registration Offices

Offices for the registration of partnerships and companies shall be established by regulations issued by the Minister responsible for the registration of partnerships and companies.

Section 1015. Juristic Person

A partnership or company, upon registration being made according to the provisions of this Title, continues a juristic person distinct form the partners or shareholders of whom it is composed.

Section 1016. Registration where Principal Business is Located

The registration must be made at the Registration Office of that part of the kingdom where the principal business office of the partnership or company is situated.

Any alterations subsequently made in the registered particulars, as well as any other matters ordered or allowed to be registered by this Title must be registered at the same place.

Section 1017. Required Notice Periods

If a fact to be registered or published happens in a foreign country, the period for its registration or publication shall be computed from the time when notice thereof arrives at the place of registration or publication.

Section 1018. Registration Fees

There shall be paid in respect to registration such fees as may be provided by the regulations issued by the competent Minister.

Section 1019. Documentation Requirements must be met

If an applicant for registration or a document subject to registration does not contain all the particulars required by this Title to be mentioned in it, or if any of the particulars mentioned in such application or document are contrary to law, or if any of the documents prescribed to be deposited with it are not produced , or if any other condition imposed by law is not complied with, the Registrar may decline to make any entry in his register till the application or documents has been completed or modified or till the prescribed documents are produced, or till the condition is fulfilled.

Section 1020. Public Inspection of Documents

Every person is entitled to inspect the documents kept by the Registrar, or to require a certificate of the registration of any partnership or company, or a certified copy or extract of any other document, to be delivered to him by the Registrar, on payment of such fee as may be prescribed by the regulations issued by the competent Minister.

Section 1021. Public Notice of New Registration

Every Registrar shall cause to be published periodically in the Government Gazette, in the form provided by the competent Minister, a summary of the entries made in his register.

Section 1022. After Publication – Knowledge is Deemed

Until the registration has been completed, the partners cannot take any advantage under the law against a third person of the existence of the agreements, documents, or title but third person may take advantage of such existence.

Section 1023. No rights until publication

Until such publication has been made, no advantage may be taken by the partners, the partnership or the company against third persons of the existence of the agreements, documents or particulars required by this Title to be registered, but third persons may take advantage of such existence.

No partnership or company may use Section 1023 to avoid its liability to third persons who act in good faith by arguing that the entity or director has no authority to act.

Section 1024. Presumption of Correctness of Entities Documents

As between the partners of shareholders, the partners and the partnership, the shareholders and the company, all books, accounts and documents of any partnership or company or of the liquidators of any partnership or company are presumed to be correct evidence of all matters therein recorded.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER II
ORDINARY PARTNERSHIPS

Part 1: Definition

Section 1025. Partnership

The ordinary partnership is that kind of partnership in which all the partners are jointly and unlimitedly liable for all the obligations of the partnership.

Part 2: Relation of Partners between Themselves

Section 1026. Contributions

Each partner must bring a contribution to the partnership. Such contribution may consist of money or other properties or of service.

Section 1027. Presumption of Equal Value

In case of doubt, contributions are presumed to be of equal value.

Section 1028. Personal Service Contributions

If the contribution of the partner consist merely of his personal service and the contract of partnership does not fix the value of such services, the share of such partner in the profits is equivalent to the average of the shares of the partners whose contributions are in money or other properties.

Section 1029. Contribution of the Use of Property

If a partner brings as contribution the use of a property, relations between such partners and the partnership with regard to;

  • delivery and repair,
  • liability for defects,
  • liability for eviction,
  • clause of non-liability,

are governed by the provisions of this Code concerning the Hire of Property.

Section 1030. Contribution of Property

If the contribution of a partner consist of the ownership of a property, the relations between such partners and partnership with regard to:

  • delivery and repair,
  • liability for defects,
  • liability for eviction,
  • clause of non-liability,

are governed by the provisions of this Code concerning Sale.

Section 1031. Failure to Deliver Contribution

If a partner wholly fails to deliver his contribution, a written notice must be given him by a registered letter to deliver it within a reasonable time, failing which he may be excluded from the partnership by a decision of all the other partners, or of such majority as provided in the contract.

Section 1032. Change in the Original Partnership

No change in the original partnership or in the nature of the business may be made except by the consent of all the partners, unless there is an agreement providing otherwise.

Section 1033. Management of Partnership

If nothing has been agreed between the partners as to the management of the business of the partnership, such business may be managed by each of the partners, provided that no partner may enter into a contract to which another partner objects.

In such case, each partner is the managing partner.

Section 1034. Voting Rights of Partners

If it is agreed that matters relating to the business of the partnership shall be decided by a majority of partners, each partner shall have one vote, irrespective the amount of his contribution.

Section 1035. Management of Partnership

If it is agreed that the business of the partnership shall be managed by several managing partners, such business may be managed by each of the managing partners, provided that no managing partner may do anything to which another managing partner objects.

Section 1036. Removal of Managing Partners

Managing partners may be removed from their position only by the consent of all the other partners, unless there be an agreement providing otherwise.

Section 1037. Inspection of Partnership Books and Documents

Even if partners have agreed that the business of the partnership shall be managed by one or more managing partners, each non-managing partner has the right to enquire at any time into the management of the business and to inspect and copy any of the partnerships books and documents.

Section 1038. Partners cannot compete with Partnership

No partner may either on his own account or on account of another person carry on, without the consent of the other partners, any business of the same nature as and competing with that of the partnership.

If a partner acts contrary to the provisions of this section, the other partners are entitled to claim from him all the profits which he has made or compensation for the injury which the partnership has suffered thereby, but such claim cannot be entered later than one year after the date of contravention.

Section 1039. Ordinary Care

A partner is bound to manage the business of the partnership with as much care as he would take of his own business.

Section 1040. New Partners

No person may be introduced as partner in the partnership without the consent of all partners, unless there is an agreement providing otherwise.

Section 1041. Transfer of Third Person into Partnership

If a partner, without the consent of the other partners, transfers to a third person the whole or part of his share in the profits of the partnership, such third person does not become partner.

Section 1042. Agency

The relations of the managing partners with the other partners are governed by the provisions of this Code concerning Agency.

Section 1043. Scope Authority

If a non-managing partner manages the business of the partnership or a managing partner acts beyond the scope of his authority, the provisions of this Code concerning Management of Affairs without Mandate shall apply.

Section 1044. Share of Profits or Losses

The share of each partner in the profits or losses is in proportion to his contribution.

Section 1045. Fixed Share

If the share of a partner is fixed only as to profits or only as to losses, the proportion is presumed to be the same for profits and losses.

Section 1046. Remuneration for Managing Business to Partner

No partner is entitled to remuneration for having managed the business of the partnership, unless there be an agreement providing otherwise.

Section 1047. Removal of Previous Partner’s Name from Firm Name

If the name of a partner whose membership has ceased is used in the firm name, he is entitled to demand that such use shall cease.

Section 1048. Claiming a Share of a Transaction

A partner may claim from the other partners a share even in a transaction where his own name did not appear.

(top)

Part 3: Relation of Partners with Third Persons

Section 1049. Acquiring Rights Against 3rd Party

No partner can acquire any right against third persons by a transaction where his own name did not appear.

Section 1150. Jointly Liable for Acts of Partners

All the partners are bound by the acts done by any of them in the ordinary course of the business of the partnership and are jointly and unlimitedly liable for the performance of the obligations incurred in such management.

Section 1151. Continuing Liability after Partnership Ceases

A partner whose membership has ceased continues to be liable in respect of obligations incurred by the partnership before he became a partner.

Section 1152. New Partners Liable for Previous Obligations

A person who becomes member of a partnership is liable for any obligations incurred by the partnership before he became a partner.

Section 1153. No Restriction on the Effect of Partner’s Interaction with 3rd Person

No restrictions of the power of a member of a non-registered partnership to bind the other partners can have effect with respect to third persons.

Section 1054. False Claim of Partnership makes Person Liable

A person who by words spoken or written, or by conduct, or by consenting to the use of his name in the firm name of the partnership, represents himself, or who knowingly suffers himself to be represented as a member of a partnership becomes liable to third persons as a partner for all the obligations of the partnership.

If after the death of a partner the partnership business is continued in the old firm name, the continued use of that name or of the deceased partner, as part thereof, does not in itself make his estate liable for any obligations incurred by the partnership after his death.

(top)

Part 4: Dissolution and Liquidation of Ordinary Partnerships

Section 1055. An Ordinary Partnership is Dissolved:

  1. In the cases, if any, provided by the contract of partnership.
  2. If made for a definite period of time, by the expiration of such period.
  3. If made for a single undertaking, by the termination of such undertaking.
  4. By any of the partners giving to the other partners due notice as provided by section 1056.
  5. By the death of any partner or by any partner becoming bankrupt or incapacitated.

Section 1056. 6 months’ Notice of Intent to Terminate Partnership

If a partnership is entered upon for any indefinite period, it can only be terminated by a partner at the end of a financial year of the partnership; and such partner must give at least six months’ notice of his intention to terminate.

Section 1057. Dissolution by Court Order

An ordinary partnership may also be dissolved by the Court on application by a partner in any of the following cases:

  1. When a partner, other than the partner suing wilfully or by gross negligence violates any essential obligation imposed upon him by the partnership contract.
  2. When the business of the partnership can only be carried on at a loss and there is no prospect of its fortunes being retrieved.
  3. When there is any other cause making the continuance of the partnership an impossibility.

Section 1058. Dissolution by Partnership Action

Upon the occurrence of any event connected with one partner which according to Section 1057 or Section 1067 entitles the remaining partners to demand the dissolution of the partnership, the Court may upon the application of the remaining partners instead of such dissolution order the expulsion of the partner in question.

For the purpose of the division of property between the partnership and the expelled partner, the partnership property must be assessed and valued at which it stood at the time when the application for the expulsion was first made.

Section 1059. Dissolution by Agreement Expiration

If at the expiration of the period agreed upon, the business of the partnership is continued by the partners or by such of them as habitually managed it during the said period, without any settlement or liquidation accounts, the partners are deemed to have agreed to continue the partnership for an indefinite period of time.

Section 1060. Purchase of Shares by other Partners

In any case under Section 1055, sub-section (4) or (5), if the subsisting partners buy the share of the partner whose membership has ceased, the contract of partnership continues between the subsisting partners.

Section 1061. Share Distribution After Dissolution of Partnership

After the dissolution of a partnership the liquidation shall take place, unless some other method of adjustment of property between the partners has been agreed upon or unless the partnership is adjudicated bankrupt.

If the dissolution is brought about by notice given by a creditor of one of the partners or by the bankruptcy of one of the partners, the liquidation can only be dispensed with the consent of the creditor or of the official receiver.

Liquidation shall be carried on by all the partners or by persons appointed by them.

The appointment of liquidators is decided by a majority of votes of the partners.

Section 1062. Order of Liquidation

The liquidation must be made in the following order:

  1. Performance of the obligation incurred towards third persons.
  2. Reimbursement of advances made and expenses incurred by the partners in managing the business of the partnership.
  3. Return of the contributions made by each partners.

The balance, if any, must be distributed as profit between the partners.

Section 1063. Division of Losses

If, after the performance of the obligations incurred towards third persons and reimbursement of advances and expenses, the assets are insufficient to return the whole amount of contributions to the partners, the deficiency constitutes a loss and must be divided as such.

(top)

Part 5: Registration of Ordinary Partnership

Section 1064. An Ordinary Partnership may be registered.

The entry in the register must contain the following particulars:

  1. The firm name of the partnership.
  2. Its object.
  3. The address of the principal business office and of all branch offices.
  4. The full names, addresses and occupations of every partner: if a partner has a trade name the entry in the register must contain his name and his trade name.
  5. The names of the managing partners, in case fewer than all of the partners have been appointed as such.
  6. The restrictions, if any, imposed upon the powers of the managing partners.
  7. The seal or seals which are binding on the partnership.

The entry may contain any other particulars which the parties may deem expedient to make known to the public.

The entry must be signed by every member of the partnership, and must also be sealed with the common seal of the partnership.

A certificate of registration shall be delivered to the partnership.

Section 1064/1.

A managing partner of a registered partnership who wishes to resign from his post shall tender his tender his resignation letter to any other managing partner. The resignation in writing shall take effect from the date the registration letter reaches the said other managing partner.

In the case where a registered partnership has only one managing partner, the managing partner who wishes to resign from his post shall notify any other partner of his intention in writing, together with the letter of resignation, so that a meeting could be held with a view to appoint a new managing partner. The resignation shall take effect from the date the resignation reaches the said partner.

The managing partner who resigns under paragraph one or paragraph two hereof may notify the Registrar of his resignation.

Section 1064/2. Updating Registration after Change of Managing Partner

When there is a change of managing partner, the registered partnership shall effect the registration thereof within fourteen days from the date of such a change.

Section 1065. Right to Advantages of Partnership

A partner can take advantage against third persons of any right acquired by the registered partnership, even though his name did not appear in the transaction.

Section 1066. Partners Running Business without Consent of other Partners

No partner of a registered partnership may, either on his own account or on account of another person, carry on without the consent of all the other partners any business of the same nature as and competing with that of the partnership or without such consent be member with unlimited liability in another partnership carrying on a business of the same nature as and competing with that of the registered partnership.

Such prohibition does not apply if it was already known to the partners at the time of registration of the partnership that one of them was engaged in a business or in other partnership having the same object, and if his withdrawal was not stipulated in the contract of partnership.

Section 1067. Acts Contrary to Partnership

If a partner acts contrary to the provisions of the foregoing section, the registered partnership is entitled to claim from him all the profits which he had made or compensation for the injury which the registered partnership has suffered thereby.

Such claim cannot be entered later than one year after the date of contravention.

The provisions of this section are without prejudice to the rights of the remaining partners to demand the dissolution of the partnership.

Section 1068. Liability for Partnership Obligations Ceases after 2 years

The liability of a partner in a partnership in respect to obligations incurred by the partnership before he ceased to be a member of such partnership, is limited to a period of two years after the ceased to be a member.

Section 1069. Dissolution by Bankruptcy

In addition to the cases provided by Section 1055, a registered partnership is dissolved if it becomes bankrupt.

Section 1070. Creditor can demand performance by any of the partners

The creditor of an obligation due by a registered partnership is entitled, as soon as the partnership is in default, to demand performance of the obligation from any of the partners.

Section 1071. Use of Partnership Assets before Partner Individual Assets

In the case provide by Section 1070, if the partner proves:

  1. That the assets of the partnership are sufficient to perform the whole or part of the obligation, and
  2. That enforcement against the partnership would not be difficult.

The Court may, in its discretion, order that the obligation be enforced first against the assets of the partnership.

Section 1072. If Partnership is dissolved, creditors may exercise their rights against the partners.

As long as a registered partnership is not dissolved the creditors of a partner may exercise their rights only on the profits or other sums due by the partnership to such partner. After dissolution they may exercise their rights on the share of such partner in the assets of the partnership.

(top)

Part 6: Amalgamation of Registered Partnerships

Section 1073. Amalgamation Partnership

A registered partnership may amalgamate with another registered partnership with the consent of all the partners, unless there be an agreement providing otherwise.

Section 1074. Publish Twice and Notice to Creditors

When a registered partnership has decided to amalgamate, the partnership must publish twice at least in a local paper and send to all creditors known to the partnership a notice of the proposed amalgamation requiring the creditors to present within three months from the date of notice any objection the may have to it.

If no objection is raised during such period, none is deemed to exist.

If an objection is raised, the partnership may not proceed with the amalgamation unless it has satisfied the claim given a security for it.

Section 1075. Registration of New Partnership

When the amalgamation has been made it shall be the duty of each of the partnership to cause the amalgamation to be registered as a new partnership.

Section 1076. New Partnership

The new partnership is entitled to the rights and subject to the liabilities of the amalgamated partnership.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER III
LIMITED PARTNERSHIPS

Section 1077. A Limited Partnership is that kind of partnership in which there are:

  1. One or more partners whose liability is limited to such amount as they may respectively undertake to contribute to the partnership.
  2. One or more partners who are jointly and unlimitedly liable for all the obligations of the partnership.

Section 1078. Registration of Limited Partnership

A limited partnership must be registered.

The entry in the register must contain the following particulars:

  1. The firm name of the partnership
  2. A statement that the partnership is a limited partnership, and the object of such partnership.
  3. The address of the principal business office and of all branch offices.
  4. The full names, trade names, addresses and occupations of the partners with limited liability, and the amount of their respective contributions of the partnership.
  5. The full names, trade names, addresses and occupations of the partners with unlimited liability.
  6. The names of the managing partners.
  7. The restrictions, if any, imposed upon the posers of the managing partners to bind the partnership.

The entry may contain any other particulars which the parties may deem expedient to made known to the public.

The entry must be signed by every member of the partnership, and must also be sealed with the common seal of the partnership.

A certificate of registration shall be delivered to the partnership.

Section 1078/1. Resignation of Managing Partner

A managing partner who wishes to resign from his post shall tender his resignation letter to any managing partner. The resignation shall take effect from the date the resignation letter reaches the said partner.

In the case where the limited partnership has only one managing partner, who wishes to resign from his post shall notify any other partner of his intention in writing, together with the letter of resignation, so that a meeting could be held with a view to appointing a new managing partner. The resignation shall take effect from the date the resignation letter reaches the said partner.

The managing partner who has resigned under paragraph one or paragraph two hereof may notify the Registrar of his resignation.

Section 1078/2. Registration of a Change of Managing Partner

When there is a change of the managing partner, the limited partnership shall effect the registration thereof within fourteen days from the date of such a change.

Section 1079. Ordinary Partnership until Registration

Until registration a limited partnership is deemed an ordinary partnership in which all the partners are jointly and unlimitedly liable for all the obligations of the partnership.

Section 1080. Applicable Provisions of LP still function

The provisions concerning Ordinary Partnerships apply to Limited Partnerships in so far as they are not excluded or modified by the provisions of this Chapter III.

If there are several partnerships with unlimited liability, the rules of the ordinary partnership apply to their relations to one another and to the partnership.

Section 1081. LP Name

The firm name shall not contain any of the names of the partners with limited liability.

Section 1082. Limited Partner on a LP Name

A partner with limited liability who expressly or impliedly consents to the use of his name in the firm name is liable to third persons in the same manner as if he was a partner with unlimited liability.

As between the partners themselves, the liability of such partner remains governed by the contact of partnership.

Section 1083. Limited Liability Partners Contributions

The contributions of the partners with limited liability must be in money or other properties.

Section 1084. Distributions only allowed out of Partnerships

No dividend or interest may be distributed to partners with limited liability except out of the profits made by the partnerships.

If the capital of the partnership has been reduced by losses, no dividend or interest may be distributed to partners with limited liability until the said losses have been made good.

Provided that a partner with limited liability cannot be obliged to return the dividend or interest which he has received in good faith.

Section 1085. 3rd Party Contributions

If a partner with limited liability has, by letter, circular or otherwise, informed third persons that his contribution is greater than the registered amount, he becomes liable for such greater amount.

Section 1086. Agreements between Partners do not effect 3rd Persons until it is registered

Agreements entered into between the partners for altering the nature or reducing the amount of the contribution of a partner with limited liability have no effect as regards to third persons until registered.

When registered, they have effect only as to obligations incurred by the partnership after their registration.

Section 1087. Managing Partners = Unlimited Liability

A limited partnership must be managed only by the partners with unlimited liability.

Section 1088. Limited Partner can incurred Unlimited Liability for Interference

If a partner with limited liability interferes with the management of the partnership, he becomes jointly and unlimited liable for all the obligations of the partnership.

Options and advice, votes given for the appointment or dismissal of managers in cases provided by the contract of partnership, are not considered as interference with the management of the partnership.

Section 1089. Limited Partner can be a Liquidator

A partner with limited liability may be appointed a liquidator of the partnership.

Section 1090. Limited Partner can carry on competing business

Partners with limited liability may carry on any business, either on their own account or on the account of third persons, even if such business is of the same nature as that of the partnership.

Section 1091. Limited Partners can transfer shares without consent

Partners with limited liability may transfer their shares without the consent of the other partners.

Section 1092. Death or Bankruptcy of Limited Partner does not end LP

Unless otherwise provided by the contract, a limited partnership is not dissolved by the death of one of the partners with limited liability or by his becoming bankrupt or incapacitated.

Section 1093. Death of Limited Partner

If a partner with limited liability dies, his heirs become partners in place, unless otherwise provided by the contract.

Section 1094. Bankruptcy of Limited Partner

If a partner with limited liability becomes bankrupt, his share in the partnership must be sold as an asset of the bankruptcy.

Section 1095. Creditors have not action against Limited Partner

The creditors of a limited partnership have no action against the partners with limited liability as long as the partnership is not dissolved.

After the dissolution of the partnership, the can enter actions against every partner with limited liability up to the following amounts:

  1. The part of contributions of such partner which has not been delivered to the partnership.
  2. Such part of the contribution as the partner may have withdrawn from the asset of the partnership.
  3. Dividends and interest with the partner may have received in bad faith and contrary to the provisions of Section 1084

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER IV
LIMITED COMPANIES

Part 1: Nature and Formation of Limited Companies

Section 1096. Limited Company (LC)

A limited company is formed with the capital divided into shares, and the liability of the shareholders is limited to the amount, if any, unpaid on the shares respectively held by them.

Section 1096 bis. (Repealed)

Section 1097. Minimum Number of Persons Required for LC

Any three or more persons may, by subscribing their names to a memorandum and otherwise complying with the provisions of this Code, promote and form a limited company.

Section 1098. Requirements of Memorandum

  1. The name of the proposed company, which must always end with the word “limited”.
  2. The part of the Kingdom in which the registered office of the company shall be situated.
  3. The objects of the company.
  4. A declaration that the liability of the shareholders shall be limited
  5. The amount of share capital with which the company proposes to be registered, and the divisions thereof into shares of a fixed amount.
  6. The names, addresses, occupations and signatures of the promoters, and the number of shares subscribed by each of them.

Section 1099. Two Original Copies Required

The memorandum must be made in two original copies at least and signed by the promoters, and the signatures shall be certified by two witnesses.

One of the copies of the memorandum must be deposited and registered at the Registration Office of that part of the Kingdom in which the registered office of the company is declared to be situated.

Section 1100. Promoter must be a Shareholder

Every promoter must subscribe at least one share.

Section 1101. Director’s Liability is Unlimited

The liability of the directors of a limited company may be unlimited.

In such case, a statement to that effect must be inserted in the memorandum.

The unlimited liability of a director terminates at the expiration of two years after the date at which he ceased to hold office.

Section 1102. No Public Offerings

No invitation to subscribe for shares shall be made to the public.

Section 1103. (Repealed)

Section 1104. Shares must subscribe before Registration

The whole number of shares with which the company proposes to be registered must be subscribed or allotted before registration of the company.

Section 1105. Shares may not be issued at a lower price than their nominal amount.

The issue of shares at a higher price than their nominal amount is permissible, if sanctioned by the memorandum. In such case the excess amount must be paid together with the first payment.

The first payment on the shares must not be less than twenty-five per cent of their nominal amount.

Section 1106. Subscription of Shares

A person by subscribing for shares bind himself, on condition that the company be formed, to pay to the company the amount of such shares in conformity with the prospectus and regulations.

Section 1107. General Meeting of Subscribers

When all the shares to be paid in money have been subscribed, the promoters must without delay hold a general meeting of subscribers which shall be called the statutory meeting.

The promoters shall, at least seven days before the day on which the meeting is to be held, forward to every subscriber a statutory report, duly certified by them, containing the particulars of the business to be transacted at the statutory meeting under the following section.

The promoters shall cause a copy of the statutory report, certified as by this section required, to be filed with the Registrar of companies forthwith after sending thereof to the subscribers.

The promoters shall also cause a list showing the names, descriptions and addresses of the subscribers, and the number of shares subscribed by them respectively, to be produced at the meeting.

The provisions of Section 1176, 1187, 1188, 1189, 1191, 1192 and 1195 shall apply mutatis mutandis to statutory meeting.

Section 1108. General Meeting Transactions

The business to be transacted at the statutory meeting:

  1. The adoption of the regulations of the company, if any.
  2. The ratification of any contracts entered into and any expenses incurred by the promoters in promoting the company.
  3. The fixing of the amount, if any, to be paid to the promoters.
  4. The fixing of the number of preference shares, if any, to be issued, and the nature and extent of the preferential rights accruing to them.
  5. The fixing of the number of ordinary shares or preference shares to be allotted as fully or partly paid-up otherwise than in money, if any, and the amount up to which they shall be considered as paid-up.
    The description of the service or property in return for which such ordinary shares or preference shares shall be allotted as paid-up shall be expressly laid down before the meeting.
  6. The appointment of the first directors and auditors and the fixing of their respective powers.

Section 1109. No Voting if Promoter or Subscriber has Personal Interest in the Vote

A promoter or a subscriber who has a special interest in a resolution cannot exercise the right of voting.

No resolution of the statutory meeting are valid unless passed by a majority including at least one half of the total number of subscribers entitled to vote, and representing at least one half of the total number of shares of such subscribers.

Section 1110. Transfer of Power to Directors

After the statutory meeting is held, the promoters shall hand over the business to the directors.

The directors shall thereupon cause the promoters and subscribers to pay forthwith upon each share payable in money such amount, not less than twenty-five per cent, as provided by the prospectus, notice, advertisement or invitation.

Section 1111. Registration of Company after Subscriber payment

When the amount mentioned in Section 1110 has been paid, the directors must apply for the registration of the company.

The application and entry in the register must contain, in conformity with the decisions of the statutory meeting, the following particulars:

    • The total number of shares subscribed or allotted, distinguishing ordinary shares and preference shares.
    • The number of ordinary shares or preference shares allotted as fully or partly paid-up otherwise than in money, and in the latter case, the extent to which they are so paid up.
    • The amount already paid in money on each share.
    • The total amount of money received in respect of shares.
    • The names, occupations and addresses of the directors.
    • If the directors have power to act separately, their respective powers and the number or names of the directors whose signature is binding on the company.
    • The period, if any has been fixed, for which the company is formed.
    • The address of the principal of business office and of all branch offices.

The entry may contain any other particulars which the directors may deem expedient to make to the public. The application must be accompanied by the copy of the regulations, if any, and of the proceedings of the statutory meeting, both certified by the signature of at least one director. The directors must at the same time deposit with the Registration Office ten printed copies of the memorandum and of the regulations, if any, of the company.

A certificate of registration shall be delivered to the company.

Sections 1111/1 Registration of Memorandum of Association and Company Registration

In forming a company, the directors may, upon completing all the following steps on the day the memorandum of association is made by the promoters; apply for registration of the memorandum of association and registration of the company on the same day.

        • Have all shares to be registered by the company subscribed;
        • Hold a statutory meeting to consider the business as provided in Section 1108, the meeting being attended by all promoters and subscribers and the business to be transacted at the meeting being approved by all promoters and subscribers;
        • Have the promoters hand over the business to the directors; and
        • Have the directors cause the subscribers to pay the amount for each share as provided in Section 1110 paragraph two and the amount is actually paid.

Section 1112. Three Month Time Limit for Registration after Statutory Meeting

If registration does not take place within three months after the statutory meeting, the company is not formed, and all the money received from the applicants must be repaid without deduction.

If any such money has not been so repaid within three months after the statutory meeting, the directors of the company are jointly liable to repay that money with interest from the expiration of the three months.

Provided that a director shall not be liable for repayment of interest if he proves that the loss of money or delay was not due to his fault.

Section 1113. Promoters Liable Until Company is registered

The promoters of the company are jointly and unlimitedly liable for all obligations and disbursement not approved by the statutory meeting; even if approved they remain so liable until the registration of the company.

Section 1114. No Right to Cancelation after Registration

After a company is registered, a subscriber of shares cannot enter a claim for cancellation by the Court of his subscription on the ground of, mistake, duress or fraud.

Section 1115. Same Name Registration

If the name inserted in a memorandum is identical with the name of an existing registered company or with the name inserted in a registered memorandum, or so nearly resembling the same as to be likely to deceive the public, any interested person can enter a claim for compensation against the promoters of the company and can ask for an order from the Court that the name be changed.

Upon such order being made, the new name must be registered in the place of the former name and the certificate of registration must be altered accordingly.

Section 1116. Public Inspection of Company Memorandum and Registration

Any interested person is entitled to obtain from any company a copy of its memorandum and registration, for which a sum not exceeding one baht per copy may be charged by the company.

(top)

Part 2: Shares and Shareholders

Section 1117. Minimum Value of Share

The amount of a share may not be less than five baht.

Section 1118. Shares are indivisible

If a share is held by two or more persons in common, they must appoint one of them to exercise their rights as shareholders.

Persons holding a share in common are jointly liable to the company for payment of the amount of the share.

Section 1119. Payment for Shares

The whole amount of every share must be paid in money, except shares allotted under Section 1108 sub-section 5, or under Section 1221.

A shareholder cannot avail himself of a set-off against the company as to payments on shares.

Section 1120. Contacting Shareholders for Payment

Unless otherwise decided by a general meeting, the directors may make calls upon the shareholders in respect of all money being due on their shares.

Section 1121. Notice Period for Payment

Twenty-one days’ notice at least must be given by registered letter of each call and each shareholder must pay the amount of such call to the person and at the time and place fixed by the directors.

Section 1122. Interest Accrues from the Due Date of Payment

If the call payable in respect of any share has not been paid on the day fixed for payment thereof, the holder of such share is bound to pay interest from the day fixed for payment to the time of the actual payment.

Section 1123. Second Notice with Interest

If a shareholder fails to pay a call on the day fixed for payment thereof, the directors may give him notice by registered letter to pay such call with interest.

The notice must fix a reasonable time within which such call and interest must be paid.

It must also fix the place where payment must be made. The notice may also state that in the case of non-payment the share in respect of which such call was made may be forfeited.

Section 1124. Forfeiture of Shares

If a statement as to forfeiture has been made in the notice the directors may, as long as the call and interest remain unpaid, declare the shares to be forfeited.

Section 1125. Forfeiture by Public Auction

Shares forfeited must be sold without delay by public auction. The proceeds must be applied to the payment of the call and interest due. The surplus, if any must be returned to the shareholder.

Section 1126. Shares Value are the same

The title of the purchaser of the forfeited share is not affected by any irregularity in the proceedings of such forfeiture and sale.

Section 1127. Share Certificates

A certificate or certificates shall be delivered to each shareholder for the shares held by him.

The delivery of a certificate may be subject to the payment of such fee, not exceeding fifty satang, as the directors may decide.

Section 1128. Signed and Sealed Shares

Every certificate of shares shall be signed by one of the directors at least, and shall bear the seal of the company.

It must contain the following particulars:

  1. The name of the company.
  2. The numbers of the shares to which it applies.
  3. The amount of each share.
  4. In the case the shares are not fully paid up, the amount paid on each share.
  5. The name of the shareholder or a statement that the certificate is to bearer.

Section 1129. Transferable Shares

Shares are transferable without the assets of the company unless, in case of shares entered in a name certificate, it is otherwise provided in the regulations of the company.

The transfer of shares entered in a name certificate is void unless made in writing and signed by the transferor and the transferee whose signatures shall be certified by one witness at least.

Such transfer is invalid as against the company and third person until the fact of the transfer and the name and address of the transferee are entered in the register of shareholders.

Section 1130. Declining to Register Share without Payment

The company may decline to register a transfer of shares on which a call is due.

Section 1131. Closing of Transfer Book

The transfer book may be closed during fourteen days immediately preceding the ordinary general meeting.

Section 1132. Death or Bankruptcy of Shareholder

If by some event such as the death or bankruptcy of any shareholder, another person becomes entitled to a share, the company shall, on surrender of the share certificate when possible, and on proper evidence being produced, register such other person as a shareholder.

Section 1133. Liability for Payment of Unpaid Share

The transferor of a share not fully paid up continues to be liable for the full amount unpaid thereon, provided that:

  1. No transferor shall be liable in respect to any obligation of the company incurred after the transfer.
  2. No transferor shall be liable to continue unless it appears to the Court that the existing shareholders are unable to satisfy the contributions required to be made by them.

No action against the transferor for such liability can be entered later than two years after the transfer has been entered in the register of shareholders.

Section 1134. Bearer Certificates

Certificates to bearer may be issued only if authorized by the regulations of the company and for shares which are fully paid up. In such case the holder of a name certificate is entitled to receive certificate to bearer on surrendering the name certificate for cancellation.

Section 1135. Transfer of Bearer Certificate

Shares entered in a certificate to bearer are transferred by the mere delivery of certificate.

Section 1136. Trading Bearer Certificate to Name Certificate

The holder of a certificate to bearer is entitled to receive a name certificate on surrendering the certificate to bearer for cancellation.

Section 1137. Company Share Requirements must be Name Certificates

If it is prescribed by the regulations of the company that a director must hold a certain number of shares of the company as a qualification for such office, such shares must be shares entered in a name certificate.

Section 1138. Requirements for Shareholder Register

Every limited company must keep a register of shareholders containing the following particulars:

  1. The names and addresses, and occupations, if any, of the shareholders, a statement of the shares held by each shareholder, distinguishing each share by its number, and of the amount paid or agreed to be considered as paid on the shares of each shareholder.
  2. The date at which each person was entered in the register as a shareholder.
  3. The date at which each shareholder ceased to be a shareholder.
  4. The numbers and date of certificates issued to bearer, and the respective numbers of shares entered in each such certificate.
  5. The date of cancellation of any name certificate or certificate bearer.

Section 1139. Company Shareholder Registration Open for Review

The register of shareholders commencing from the date of the registration of the company shall be kept at the registered office of the company. It shall be gratuitously open to inspection by the shareholders, during business hours, subjected to such reasonable restrictions as the directors may impose, but not less than 2 hours a day.

It shall be the duty of the directors to send once at least in every year to the Registrar, and not later than on the fourteenth day after the ordinary meeting, a copy of the list of all shareholders at the time such meeting and those who have ceased to be shareholders since the date of the last ordinary meeting. Such list shall include all particulars specified in the foregoing section.

Section 1140. Copies of Register

Any shareholders is entitled to require a copy of such register or of any part thereof to be delivered to him on payment of fifty satang for every hundred words required to be copied.

Section 1141. Assumption of Correctness of the Shareholder Register

The register of shareholders is presumed to be correct evidence of any matters directed or authorized by law to be inserted therein.

Section 1142. Preference Shares

If preference shares have been issued, the preferential rights attributed to such shares cannot be altered.

Section 1143. Limited Company may not own its own shares

A limited company may not own its own shares or take them in pledge.

(top)

Part 3: Management of Limited Companies

Part 1: General Provisions

Section 1144. Limited Company Managers

Every limited company shall be managed by a director or directors under the control of the general meeting of shareholder and according to the regulations of the company.

Section 1145. After registration of the company, not changes to regulations without special resolution.

After registration of the company, no regulations may be made and no additions to or alterations of the regulations or of the contents of the memorandum may be adopted except by passing a special resolution.

Section 1146. New regulations within 14 days of special regulation

It shall be the duty of the company to cause to be registered every new regulation, addition or alteration within fourteen days after the date of the special resolution.

Section 1147. Repealed

Section 1148. Registered Office

Every limited company may have a registered office to which all communications and notices may be addressed.

Notice of the situation of the registered office and of any change therein, shall be given to the Registrar of companies, who shall record the same.

Section 1149. Wait for Fully Paid up Company

As long as the shares have not been fully paid up, the company may not print or mention the capital of the company in any notice, advertisement, bills, invoices, letters or other documents, without clearly mentioning at the same time what proportion of such capital has been paid up.

(top)

Part 2: Directors

Section 1150. Number and Remuneration of the Directors

The number and remuneration of the directors shall be fixed by a general meeting.

Section 1151. Appointment or Removal of Director

A director can be appointed or removed only by a general meeting.

Section 1152. First Ordinary Meeting

At the first ordinary meeting after the registration of the company and at the first ordinary meeting in every subsequent year one-third of the directors, or, if their number is not a multiple of three, then the number nearest to one-third must retire from office.

Section 1153. Director Resignation

Any director who wishes to resign from his post shall tender his resignation letter to the company. The resignation shall take effect from the date of resignation letter reaches the company.

The director who resigns under paragraph one here of may notify the Registrar of his resignation.

Section 1154. Director Bankruptcy or Incapacity

If a director becomes bankrupt or incapacitated, his office is vacated.

Section 1155. Director Vacancies

Any vacancy occurring in the board of directors otherwise than by rotation may be filled up by the directors, but any person so appointed shall retain his office during such time only as the vacating director was entitled to retain the same.

Section 1156. Appointment Period for Substituted Director

If a general meeting removes a director before the expiration of his period of office, and appoints another person in his stead, the person so appointed shall retain his office during such time only as the removed director was entitled to retain the same.

Section 1157. Registration of the Change of Directors or Directors

When there is a change of a director or directors, the company shall effect the registration thereof within fourteen days from the date of such change.

Section 1158. Director’s Powers

Unless otherwise provided by the regulations of the company, the directors have the powers described in the six following sections.

Section 1159. Quorum Needs for Directors to Act

The subsisting directors may act notwithstanding any vacancy among them but, if and so long as their number is reduced below the number necessary to form a quorum, the subsisting directors may act for the purpose of increasing the number of directors to that number, or of summoning a general meeting of the company but for no other purpose.

Section 1160. Directors can reduce number for a quorum

The directors may fix the quorum necessary for the transaction of business at their meetings and unless so fixed the quorum shall (when the number of directors exceeds three) be three.

Section 1161. Shareholder Voting Rights

Questions arising at any meeting of directors are decided by a majority of votes, in case of an equality of votes the chairman has a casting vote.

Section 1162. Directors Meeting

A director may at any time summon a meeting of directors.

Section 1163. Meeting Chairman

The directors may elect a chairman of their meetings, and fix the period for which he is to hold office, but if no such chairman is elected, or if at any meeting the chairman is not present at the time appointed for holding the same, the directors present may choose one of their members to be chairman of such meeting.

Section 1164. Delegation of Powers to Managers

The directors may delegate any of their powers to managers or to committees consisting of members of their body. Every manager or committee shall, in the exercise of the power so delegated, conform to any order or regulation that may be imposed on them by the directors.

Section 1165. Committee Voting

Unless otherwise provided by the delegation, questions arising at any meeting of a committee shall be decided by a majority of votes of the members; in case of an equality of votes the chairman has a casting vote.

Section 1166. Defective Appointment

All acts done by a director shall, notwithstanding that it be afterwards discovered that there was some defect in his appointment, or that he was disqualified, be as valid as if such person had been duly appointed and was qualified to be a director.

Section 1167. Relations between Directors, Company, and Third Persons

The relations between the directors, the company and third persons are governed by the provisions of this Code concerning Agency.

Section 1168. Standard of Care for Directors

The directors must in their conduct of the business apply the diligence of a careful business man.

In particular they are jointly responsible:

  1. For the payment of shares by the shareholders being actually made;
  2. For the existence and regular keeping of the books and documents prescribed by law;
  3. For the proper distribution of the dividend or interest as prescribed by law;
  4. For the proper enforcement of resolutions of the general meetings.

A director must not without the consent of the general meeting of shareholders, undertake commercial transactions of the same nature as and competing with that of the company, either on his own account or that of a third person, nor may he be a partner with unlimited liability in another concern carrying on business of the same nature as and competing with that of the company.

Section 1169. Claims against Directors

Claims against the directors for compensation for injury caused by them to the company may be entered by the company or, in case the company refuses to act, by any of the shareholders.

Such claims may also be enforced by the creditors of the company in so far as their claims against the company remain unsatisfied.

Section 1170. After Approval of General Meeting, Director no longer liable

When the acts of a director have been approved by a general meeting, such director is no longer liable for the said acts to the shareholders who have approved them, or to the company.

Shareholders who did not approve of such acts cannot enter their action later than six months after the date of the general meeting on which such acts were approved.

(top)

Part 3: General Meetings

Section 1171. Annual Ordinary Meeting

A general meeting of shareholders shall be held within six months after the registration, and shall subsequently be held at least every 12 months. Such meeting is called an ordinary meeting.

All other general meetings are called extraordinary meetings.

Section 1172. Extraordinary Meetings

The directors may summon extraordinary meeting whenever they think fit.

They must without delay summon such meeting when the company has lost half the amount of its capital, in order to inform the shareholders of such loss.

Section 1173. Requirements for Shareholder Request for an Extraordinary Meeting

Extraordinary meetings must be summoned if a requisition to that effect is made in writing by shareholders holding not less than one-fifth of the shares of the company. The requisition must specify the object for which the meeting is required to be summoned.

Section 1174. Meeting Required within 30 days of Request by Shareholders

Whenever a requisition for the summoning of an extraordinary meeting is made by the shareholders according to the last preceding section, the directors shall forthwith summon such meeting.

If the meeting is not summoned within thirty days after the date of the requisition, the requisitionist, or any other shareholder amounting to the required number, may themselves summon it.

Section 1175 Notice of General Meeting

Notice of the summoning of every general meeting shall be published at least once in a local paper not later than seven days before the date fixed for the meeting, and sent by post with acknowledgement of receipt to every shareholder whose name appears in the register of shareholders not later than seven days or, in case the notice is for a special resolution to be made by the general meeting, fourteen days before the date fixed for the meeting.

The notice of the summoning of a general meeting shall specify the place, the day and the hour of meeting and the nature of the business to be transacted. In case the notice is for a special resolution to be made in the general meeting, the substance of the proposed resolution shall also be included in the notice.

Section 1176. Shareholder Right to Attending Meetings

Every shareholder has the right to be present at any general meeting.

Section 1177. Exceptions

Unless there are provisions to the contrary in the regulations of the company, the rules provided by the following sections shall apply to general meetings.

Section 1178. Minimum Capital Requirements for Meeting

A general meeting may not transact any business unless shareholders representing at least one-fourth of the capital of the company are present.

Section 1179. If no quorum, then meeting dissolved

If within an hour from the time appointment for the general meeting the quorum prescribed by Section 1178 is not present, the meeting, if summoned upon the requisition of shareholders, shall be dissolved.

If the general meeting had not been summoned upon the requisition of shareholders, another general meeting shall be summoned within fourteen days and at such meeting no quorum shall be necessary.

Section 1180. Chairman of the Board

The chairman of the board of directors shall preside at every general meeting of shareholders.

If there is no such chairman, or of at any general meeting he is not present within fifteen minutes after the time appointed for the holding the meeting, the shareholders present may elect one of their members to be chairman.

Section 1181. Adjournment of a General Meeting

The chairman may, with the consent of meeting, adjourn any general meeting, but no business may be transacted at any adjourned meeting other than the business left unfinished at the original meeting.

Section 1182. One Vote per Share

On a show of hands every shareholder present in person or represented by proxy shall have one vote. On a poll every shareholder shall have one vote for each share of which he is the holder.

Section 1183. Minimum Number of Shares to Vote

If the regulations of the company provide that no shareholder is entitled to vote unless he is in possession of a certain number of shares, the shareholder who do not possess such number of shares have the right to join in order to form the said number and appoint one of them as proxy to represent them and vote at any general meeting.

Section 1184. No shareholder is entitled to vote unless all calls due by him have been paid.

Section 1185. A shareholder who has in a resolution, a special interest cannot vote on such resolution.

Section 1186. Bearer Certificate Voting Rights

Holders of certificates to bearer may not vote unless they have deposited their certificate with the company before the meeting.

Section 1187. Voting by Proxy

Any shareholder may vote by proxy, provided the power given to such proxy is in writing.

Section 1188. Proxy Requirements

The instrument appointing a proxy shall be dated and signed by the shareholder and shall contain the following particulars:

  1. The number of shares held by the shareholder
  2. The name of the proxy
  3. The meeting or meetings or the period for which the proxy is appointed.

Section 1189. Deposit of Proxy

The instrument appointing a proxy must be deposited with the chairman at or before the beginning or the meeting at which the proxy named in such instrument proposed to vote.

Section 1190. Conducting the Vote

At any general meeting, a resolution put to the vote shall be decided on a show of hands, unless a poll is, before or on the declaration of the result of the show of hands, demanded by at least two shareholders.

Section 1191. Evidence of a Vote by a Show of Hands

At any general meeting, a declaration by the chairman that a resolution has on a show of hands, been passed or lost, and an entry to that effect in the books of the proceedings of the company shall be sufficient evidence of the fact.

If a poll is demanded, the result of the poll shall be deemed to be the resolution of the meeting.

Section 1192. Chairman Decides on type of Poll

If a poll is duly demanded, it shall be taken in such manner as the chairman directs.

Section 1193. Chairman can vote in case of Tie

In the case of an equality of votes, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, the chairman of the meeting shall be entitled to a second or casting vote.

Section 1194 * 3/4th majority of Present Shareholders to Pass a Special resolution

Any resolution to carry out a business required by law to be passed as a special resolution shall be passed by a majority of not less than three-fourths of the votes of the present shareholders who are eligible to vote.

Section 1194. Special Resolution

A resolution is deemed to be a special resolution if passed by two successive general meetings in the following way.

The substance of the proposed resolution has been included in the notice for summoning the first general meeting.

The resolution has been passed in the first meeting by a majority of not less than three-fourths of the votes.

The subsequent general meeting has been summoned and has been held not less than fourteen days and not more than six weeks after the former meeting.

The full text of the resolution passed in the first meeting has been included in the notice summoning the special meeting.

The resolution passed in the former meeting has been confirmed in the subsequent meeting by a majority of not less than two-thirds of the votes.

Section 1195.

If a general meeting has been summoned or held or a resolution passed contrary to the provisions of this Title or contrary to the regulations of the company, the Court shall on application of any director or shareholder, cancel any such resolution or any resolutions passed at such irregular general meeting, provided that the application is entered within one month after the date of resolution.

(top)

Part 4: Balance Sheet

Section 1196. Annual Financial Statement required

A balance-sheet must be made at least once every twelve months, at the end of such twelve months as constitute the financial year of the company.

It must contain a summary of the assets and liabilities of the company and a profit and loss account.

Section 1197. Examination by Auditors and Adopted in General Meeting

The balance-sheet must be examined by one or more auditors and submitted for adoption to a general meeting within four months after its date.

A copy of it must be sent to every person entered in the register of shareholders at least three days before the general meeting.

Copies must also be kept open at the offices of the company during the same period for inspection by the holders of certificates to bearer.

Section 1198. Submission of Balance Sheet to General meeting

On submitting the balance-sheet, the directors must lay before the general meeting a report showing how the business of the company was conducted during the year under review.

Section 1199. Right to Copy of Company Balance Sheet

Any person is entitled to obtain from any company a copy of its latest balance-sheet on payment of a sum not exceeding twenty baht.

It shall be the duty of the directors to send to the Registrar a copy of every balance sheet not later than one month after it has been adopted by the general meeting.

(top)

Part 5: Dividend and Reserve

Section 1200. Distribution of Dividend

The distribution of dividend must be made in proportion to the amount paid upon each share, unless otherwise decided with regards to preference shares.

Section 1201. Resolution Required for Declaration of Dividend

No dividend may be declared except by a resolution passed in a general meeting.

The directors may from time to time pay to the shareholders such interim dividends as appeared to the directors to be justified by the profits of the company.

No dividend shall be paid otherwise than out of profits. If the company has incurred losses, no dividend may be paid unless such losses have been made good.

Section 1202. Reserve Fund

The company must appropriate to a reserve fund, at each distribution of dividend, at least one-twentieth of the profits arising from the business of the company, until the reserve fund reaches one-tenth part of the capital of the company or such higher proportion thereof as may be stipulated in the regulations of the company.

If shares have been issued at a value higher than the face value, the excess must be added to the reserve fund until the latter has reached the amount mentioned in the forgoing paragraph.

Section 1203. Creditors can demand return of improperly paid Dividend

If dividend has been paid contrary to the provisions of the last two proceeding sections, the creditors of the company are entitled to have the amount so distributed returned to the company, provided that a shareholder cannot be obliged to return dividend which he has received in good faith.

Section 1204 * Notice of Dividend

Notice of any dividend that may have been declared shall be given by letter to each shareholder whose name appears on the register of shareholders. If the company has any share represented by a certificate issued to bearer, the notice shall also be published once at least in a local paper.

Section 1204. Requirements for Notice

Notice of any dividend that may have been declared shall be either published twice at least in a local paper or given by letter to each shareholder whose name appears on the register of shareholders.

Section 1205. No dividend can bear interest against the company.

(top)

Part 6: Books and Accounts

Section 1206. Accounting Requirements

The directors must cause true accounts to be kept:

  1. Of the sums received and expended by the company and of the matters in respect of which each receipt or expenditure takes place.
  2. Of the assets and liabilities of the company.

Section 1207. Minutes of Meetings

The directors may cause minutes of all proceedings and resolutions of meetings of shareholders and directors to be duly entered in the books which shall be kept at the registered office of the company. Any such minutes signed by the chairman of the meeting at which such resolution were passed or proceedings had, or by the chairman of the next succeeding meeting, are presumed correct evidence of the matters therein contained, and all resolutions and proceedings of which minutes have been made are presumed to have been duly passed.

Any shareholder may at any time during business hours demand inspection of the above documents.

(top)

Part 4: Audit

Section. 1208. Shareholders may be Auditors but No Directors, Agents, or Employees of Company

The auditors may be shareholders of the company; but no person is eligible as an auditor who is interested otherwise than as a shareholder in any transaction of the company, and no director or other agent or employee of the company is eligible as an auditor during his continuance in office.

Section 1209. Election of Auditors

The auditors shall be elected every year at an ordinary meeting.

A retiring auditor is eligible for re-election.

Section 1210. Auditor Remuneration

The remuneration of the auditors shall be fixed in any general meeting.

Section 1211. Extraordinary Meeting to Fill Auditor Vacancy

If any casual vacancy occurs among the auditors, the directors shall forthwith summon an extraordinary meeting for the purpose of filling the vacancy.

Section 1212. Court Appointed Auditor

If no election of auditors is made in a manner aforesaid, the Court shall, on the application of not less than five shareholders, appoint an auditor for the current year and fix his remuneration.

Section 1213. Access to Books and Financial Accounts

Every auditor shall at all reasonable time have access to the books and accounts of the company, and with regard to such books and accounts he may examine the directors or any other agents or employees of the company.

Section 1214. Auditor Reports

The auditors must make a report to the ordinary meeting on the balance-sheet and accounts.

They must state in such report whether in their opinion the balance-sheet is properly drawn up so as to exhibit and correct view of the state of the affairs of the company.

(top)

Part 5: Inspection

Section 1215. Application for Inspection

Upon the application of shareholders holding not less than one-fifth part of the shares of the company, the competent Minister shall appoint one or more competent inspectors to examine into the affairs of any limited company and to report thereon.

The Minister, before appointing any such inspector, may require the applicants to give security for payment of expenses of the inspection.

Section 1216. Must Produce Books and Documents

The directors, employees and agents of the company are bound to produce to the inspectors all books and documents in their custody or power.

Any inspector may examine upon oath the directors, employees and agents of the company in relation to its business.

Section 1217. Inspector Reports to Minister and Shareholders

The inspectors must make a report to be written or printed as the competent Minister directs. Copies must be forwarded by the Minister to the registered office of the company and to the shareholders upon whose application the inspection was made.

Section 1218. Applicants responsible for inspection expenses

All expenses of such inspection must be repaid by the applicants, unless the company, in the first general meeting after such inspection is finished, consents that the same shall be paid out of the assets of the company.

Section 1219. Appointment of Inspectors

The competent Minister may also, of his own motion, appoint inspectors to report to the Government on the affairs of the company. Such appointment lies entirely within the discretion of the Minister.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER IV
LIMITED COMPANIES
PART VI
Increase and Reductions of Capital

Section 1220. Special Resolution to Issue New Shares

A limited company can by special resolution increase its capital by issuing new shares.

Section 1221. Fully or Partly Paid-Up New Shares

No new shares of a limited company may be allotted as fully or partly paid-up otherwise than in money, except in execution of a special resolution.

Section 1222. New Shares must be offered to Shareholders

All new shares must be offered to the shareholders in proportion to the shares held by them.

Such offer must be made by notice specifying the number of shares to which the shareholder is entitled, and fixing a date after which the offer, if not accepted, shall be deemed to be declined.

After such date or on the receipt of an intimation from the shareholder that he declined to accept the shares offered, the director may offer such shares for subscription to other shareholders or may subscribe the shares to himself.

Section 1223. Notice Signed by Directors

A notice to any shareholder to subscribe for New Shares must be dated and Signed to the directors.

Section 1224. Reducing the Number of Shares

A limited company may, by special resolution, reduce its capital either by lowering the amount of each share or by reducing the number of shares.

Section 1225.

The capital of the company may not be reduced to less than one-fourth of its total amounts.

Section 1226 Notice Requirements to Reduce Number of Shares

When a company proposes to reduce its capital, it must publish once at least in a local paper and send to all creditors known to the company a notice of the particulars of the proposed reduction, requiring the creditors to present within thirty days from the date of such notice any objection they may have to such reduction. If no objection is raised within the period of thirty days, none is deemed to exist. If an objection is raised, the company cannot proceed with the reduction of its capital unless it has satisfied the claim or given security for it.

When a company proposes to reduce its capital, it must be published seven times at least in a local paper and send to all creditors known to the company a notice of the particulars of the proposed reduction, requiring the creditors to present within three months from the date of such notice any objection they may have to such reduction.

If no objection is raised within the period of three months, none is deemed to exist.

If no objection is raised, the company cannot proceed with the reduction of its capital unless it has satisfied the claim or given security for it.

Section 1227. Time Limit for Refund for Reduced Shares

If a creditor has, in consequence of his ignorance of the proposed reduction of capital, failed to give notice of his objection thereto, and such ignorance was in no way due to his fault, those shareholders of the company to whom has been refunded or remitted a portion of their shares remain, for a period of two years from the date of registration of such reduction, personally liable to such creditor to the extent of the amount refunded or remitted.

Section 1228. Registration of Increase or Reduction of Shares

The special resolution by which any increase or reduction of capital has been authorized must be registered by the company within fourteen days after its date.

(top)

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES
CHAPTER IV
LIMITED COMPANIES

Part 7: Debentures

Section 1229. Debentures may not be issued.

Secion 1230 to 1235 (Repealed)

Part 8: Dissolution

Section 1236. Dissolution of Limited Company

A limited company is dissolved:

  1. In the case, if any, provided by its regulations.
  2. If formed for a period of time, by the expiration of such period.
  3. If formed for a single undertaking, by the termination of such undertaking.
  4. By a special resolution to dissolve.
  5. By the company becoming bankrupt

Section 1237. Court Dissolution of Limited Company

A limited company may also be dissolved by the Court on the following grounds:

  1. If default is made in filing the statutory report or in holding the statutory meeting.
  2. If the company does not commence business within a year from the date of registration or suspends its business for a whole year.
  3. If the business of the company can only be carried on at a loss and there is no prospect of its fortunes, being retrieved.
  4. If the number of the shareholders is reduced to less than seven.

However, in the case of default in filing the statutory report or in holding the statutory meeting, the Court may, instead of dissolving the company, direct that the statutory report be filed or the statutory meeting be held as it may think fit.

(top)

Part 9: Amalgamation of Limited Companies

Section 1238. Amalgamation of Limited Company

A limited company may not amalgamate with another limited company Except by special resolution.

Section 1239. Special Resolution

The special resolution by which an amalgamation is decided must be registered by the company within fourteen days from its date.

Section 1240. Publishing Notice Requirements for Proposed Amalgamation

The company must publish seven times at least in a local paper and send to all creditors known to the company by registered letter a notice of the particulars of the proposed amalgamation requiring the creditors to present within six months after the date of the notice any objections they may have to it.

If no objection is raised during such period, none is deemed to exist.

If an objection is raised, the company cannot proceed with the amalgamation unless it has satisfied the claim or given security for it.

Section 1241. Registration of Amalgamated Company

When the amalgamation has been made, it must be registered within fourteen days by each amalgamated company and the limited company formed by the amalgamation must be registered as a new company.

Section 1242. Equivalency of Shares

The share capital of the new company must be equivalent to the total share capital of the amalgamated companies.

Section 1243. Rights and Liabilities of New Company

The new company is entitled to the rights and subject to the liabilities of the amalgamated companies.

(top)

Part 10: Notices

Section 1244. Duly Served Notice

A notice is deemed to be duly served by the company to a shareholder if it is delivered personally or sent by post to such shareholder at the address appearing in the register of shareholders.

Section 1245. Deemed Notice

Any notice sent by post in a letter properly addressed is deemed to have been served at the time when such letter would have been delivered in the ordinary course of post.

Part 11: Transformation of a Registered Partnership and a Limited Partnership to a Limited Company

Section 1246/1 Conversion of Partnership to LC

A registered partnership or limited partnership consisting of at least three partners may be converted into a limited company by consent of all partners and performance of the following:

  • Notification of the consent of partners to convert the partnership into a limited company to the Registrar in writing within fourteen days from the date of consent by all partners; and
  • Publication at least once in a local paper and sending to all creditors known to the partnership a notice of the particulars of the proposed conversion, requiring the creditors to present within thirty days from the date of such notice, any objection they may have to such conversion. If an objection is raised, the partnership cannot proceed with the conversion unless it has satisfied the claim or given security for it.

Section 1246/2 No Objection to Meeting

If no objection is raised or an objection is raised but the claim has been satisfied or security has been given, all partners shall hold a meeting to consent to and proceed with the following:

  • Prepare the memorandum of association and the articles of association of the company (if any);
  • Fix the amount of share capital of the company, which shall be equivalent to the amount of total contributions of all partners, and fix the number of shares of the company to be vested with each partner;
  • Fix the amount already paid in money on each share, which shall be at least twenty- five percent of the stated value of each share;
  • Fix the number of ordinary shares or preference shares to be issued and allotted to the partners and the nature and extent of the preferential rights accruing to the preference shares;
  • Appoint directors and fix their respective powers;
  • Appoint auditors; and
  • Carry out other activities as necessary for the conversion. In proceeding with the actions under the first paragraph, the provisions relating to a limited company regarding such respective actions shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1246/3 Transfer of Documents

The former managing partners shall deliver the businesses, property, accounts, documents and evidence of the partnership to the board of directors of the company within fourteen days after the consent by partners and the completion of actions under Section 1246/2. If any partner has not paid in at least twenty-five percent of the price of any share or has not transferred ownership of any property or produced any document or evidence of exercise of rights to the board of directors, the board of directors of the company shall issue a letter demanding that the partner pay in the share price, transfer the ownership, or produce the document or evidence of exercise of rights, as the case may be, for the board of directors within thirty days from the date of receipt of the demand letter.

Section 1246/4 BOD filing of Conversion

The board of directors of the company shall file with the Registrar an application to register the conversion into a limited company within fourteen days from the date of full compliance with Section 1246/3. In applying for registration of the conversion, the board of directors shall also submit to the Registrar, together with the application for registration, the minutes of partners’ meeting on consideration of consenting to and proceeding with the conversion of the partnership into a limited company under Section 1246/2, the memorandum of association, the articles of association, and the list of shareholders.

Section 1246/5 After conversion, loss of status of previous entity

After the conversion of the registered partnership or limited partnership into a limited company has been accepted for registration by the Registrar, the former registered partnership or limited partnership shall lose its status as a registered partnership or limited partnership under the Civil and Commercial Code and the Registrar shall make a note of such loss on the register.

Section 1246/6 Transfer of Property, Obligations, Rights, and Responsibilities of Partnership

After the registration for conversion of the registered partnership or limited partnership into a limited company, the company shall be vested with all the property, obligations, rights and responsibilities of the former registered partnership or limited partnership.

Section 1246/7 If LC cannot perform, creditor can go after Partners

If after the registration for conversion into a limited company, the company is unable to perform any obligation as vested from the converted partnership, the creditor of such obligation may enforce the performance of the obligation on the partners of the converted partnership to the extent that each partner is liable for the obligations of the partnership.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SPECIFIC CONTRACTS
TITLE XXII
PARTNERSHIPS AND COMPANIES

Chapter 5: Liquidation of Registered Partnership, Limited Partnerships and Limited Companies

Section 1247. Liquidation of Bankrupt Entity

The liquidation of a bankrupt registered partnership, limited partnership or limited company shall be made, as far as practicable, in accordance with the provisions of the Law of Bankruptcy for the time being in force.

The competent Minister shall issue Ministerial Regulations governing the liquidation of partnership and companies and determining the rate of fees for this purpose.

Section 1248. General Meeting if Required

When a general meeting is prescribed in this Chapter, it means:

  1. As to registered partnerships and limited partnerships, a meeting of all the partners, in which a majority of votes decides.
  2. As to limited companies, the general meeting provided by Section 1171.

Section 1249. Continuation of Business for Liquidation

A partnership or company is deemed to continue after its dissolution as far as it is necessary for the purpose of liquidation.

Section 1250. Liquidators Duties

The duties of the liquidators are to settle the affairs of the partnership or company, to pay its debts and to distribute its assets.

Section 1251. Dissolution cause by other than Bankruptcy

Upon dissolution of a partnership or company for any other cause than bankruptcy, the managing partners or directors become liquidators unless otherwise provided by the contract of partnership or by the regulations of the company.

If there are no persons to be liquidators under the foregoing provision, a liquidator or liquidators shall be appointed by the Court upon the application of the Public Prosecutor or any other interested person.

Section 1252. Continuation of Powers for Managing Partners or Directors

The managing partners or directors retained as liquidators the same respective powers which they had as managing partners or directors.

Section 1253. 14 Days after Dissolution

When fourteen days after the date of dissolution or in case of liquidators appointed by the Court, after the date of appointment, the liquidators must:

  1. Notify the public by two successive advertisement at least in a local paper that the partnership or company is dissolved and that its creditors must apply for payment to the liquidators, and
  2. Send a similar notice by registered letter to each creditors whose name appears in the books or documents of the partnership or company.

Section 1254. Registration of Dissolution

The dissolution of the partnership or company and the names of the liquidators must be registered within fourteen days after the date of dissolution by the liquidators.

Section 1255. Audited Balance Sheet

The liquidators must, as soon as possible, make a balance-sheet and have it examined and certified by the auditors, and must summon a general meeting.

Section 1256. General Meeting

The business of the general meeting is:

  1. To confirm the directors or managing partners as liquidators, or appoint other liquidators in their stead, and
  2. To adopt the balance-sheet.

The general meeting may direct the liquidators to make an inventory or to do whatever the meeting may deem advisable for the settlement of the affairs of the partnership or company.

Section 1257. Non-Court Appointed Liquidators

Liquidators not appointed by the Court may be removed and superseded by a unanimous vote of the partners or by a general meeting of the shareholders. Liquidators, whether appointed by the Court or not, may be removed and superseded by the Court on the request of one of the partners or of the shareholders representing one-twentieth part of the paid-up capital of the company.

Section 1258. Change of Liquidators must be registered within 14 days

Any change amongst the liquidators must be registered, within fourteen days after the date of change, by the liquidators.

Section 1259. Liquidator’s Power:

  1. To bring or defend any legal proceeding, civil or criminal, and to make compromise, in the name of the partnership or company.
  2. To carry on the business of the partnership or company, as far as may necessary for a beneficial settlement of the affairs.
  3. To sell the property of the partnership or company.
  4. To do all other acts as may be necessary for a beneficial settlement of the liquidation.

Section 1260.

No limitation of the power of the liquidators is valid as against third persons.

Section 1261. Liquidators must be sanctioned to work

Unless otherwise fixed by the general meeting or by the Court at the time of the appointment of the liquidators, no act of the liquidators is valid unless done by them jointly.

Section 1262. Resolution authorizing liquidator must be registered within 14 days

A resolution of a general meeting or a decision of the Court authorizing a liquidator or liquidators to act separately must be registered within fourteen days from its date.

Section 1263. Cost Incurred for Liquidation is Preferred to other debts

All costs, charges and expenses property incurred in the liquidation must be paid by the liquidators in preference to other debts.

Section 1264. Creditor Non-Application for Payment

If a creditor does not apply for payment, the liquidators must deposit the amount due to him as described by the provisions of the Code concerning Deposit in lieu of performance.

Section 1265. Liquidators may force partners to pay contributions

The liquidators may require the partners or shareholders to pay such part of their contributions or shares as may be still unpaid and such part must be paid at once, even if it was previously agreed by the contracts of partnership or the regulations of the company that it would be called for at a later period.

Section 1266. Liquidators can force company into bankruptcy

If the liquidators find that after the whole of the contributions or shares has been paid up, the assets insufficient to meet the liabilities, they must apply at once to the Court to have the partnership or company declared bankrupt.

Section 1267. Reports every three months

The liquidators must deposit every three months at the Registration Office a report of their activities, showing the situation of the accounts of the liquidation..Such report shall be upon gratuitously for inspection to the partners, shareholders or creditors.

Section 1268. After one year, a general meeting must be called

If the liquidators continues for more than one year, the liquidators must summon a general meeting at the end of each year from the beginning of the liquidation and must lay before this meeting a report of their activities and detailed account of the situation.

Section 1269. Only property that is not required to settle obligations can be divided

Only so much of the property of the partnership or company may be divided amongst the partners or shareholders as is not required for performing all the obligations of the partnership or company.

Section 1270. Final Accounting

As soon as the affairs of the partnership or company are fully liquidated, the liquidators shall make up an account of the liquidation showing how the liquidation has been conducted and the property of the partnership or company has been disposed of; and thereupon shall call a general meeting for the purpose of laying before it the account and giving any explanation thereof.

After the account is approved, the proceedings of the meeting must be registered within fourteen days from its date by the liquidators. Such registration is taken as being the end of the liquidation.

Section 1271. Retention of Documents

After the liquidation, the books, accounts and documents of the liquidated partnership or company shall be deposited within fourteen days provided by the foregoing section at the Registrar’s Office where they shall be kept for ten years after the end of the liquidation.

All such books, accounts and documents shall be gratuitously open for inspection by any interested person.

(top)

Section 1272. SOL for Claims

No action for payment of debts due from the partnership or company or from the partners, shareholders or liquidators as such can be entered later than two years after the end of the liquidation.

Section 1273.

The provisions of Sections 1172 to 1193 and 1207 apply to general meetings held during liquidation mutatis mutandis.

Chapter 6: Removal of Registered Partnerships, Limited Partnerships and Limited Companies from the Register Sections

Section 1273/1 Registration of Juristic Person

Where the Registrar has reasonable cause to believe that a registered partnership, a limited partnership or a company is not carrying on business or in operation, he shall send to the partnership or company by post with acknowledgement of receipt a letter inquiring whether the partnership or company is carrying on business or in operation and informing it that if an answer is not received within thirty days from the sending date thereof, a notice will be published in a newspaper with a view to striking the name of the partnership or company off the register. If the Registrar either receives an answer from the partnership or company to the effect that it is not carrying on business or in operation, or does not within thirty days after sending the letter receive any answer, he may publish once at least in one of the local newspapers, and send to the partnership or company by post with acknowledgement of receipt, a notice that at the expiration of ninety days from the sending date of that notice the name of the partnership or company mentioned therein will, unless cause is shown to the contrary, be struck off the register.

Section 1273/2 Dissolution of Juristic Person

If, in any case where a partnership or company has been dissolved and is in the process of liquidation, the Registrar has reasonable cause to believe either that no liquidator is acting or that the affairs of the partnership or company are fully wound up, and the liquidation returns have not been made by the liquidator or the registration of completion of liquidation process has not been applied for by the liquidator, the Registrar may send a letter by post with acknowledgement of receipt to the partnership or company and to the liquidator at his last known place of business demanding the appointment of an acting liquidator, submission of the returns or registration of the completion of liquidation, as the case may be, and informing them that if the action is not carried out within one hundred and eighty days from the sending date thereof, a notice will be published in a newspaper with a view to striking the name of the partnership or company off the register. If the partnership or company or the liquidator fails to take the action within the period of time prescribed in the foregoing paragraph, the Registrar shall publish once at least in a local newspaper and send by post with acknowledgement of receipt to the partnership or company and the liquidator notice that at the expiration of ninety days from the date of sending of that notice the name of the partnership or company mentioned therein will, unless cause is shown to the contrary, be struck off the register.

Section 1273/3 Striking names from the person listed in the partnership or company

At the expiration of the time mentioned in the notice under Section 1273/1 or Section 1273/2, the Registrar may, unless cause to the contrary is previously shown by the partnership or company or the liquidator, strike the name of the partnership or company off the register, and on the strike of its name off the register the partnership or company shall lose its status as a juristic person: provided that the liability of every managing partner, partner, director, managing officer and shareholders shall continue and may be enforced as if the partnership or company had not lost its status as a juristic person.

Section 1273/4 Court Application to Challenge Being Removed off the Register List

If a partnership, a partner, a company or any shareholder or creditor thereof feels unfairly aggrieved by the partnership or company having been struck off the register, the Court on the application of the partnership, partner, company or shareholder or creditor may, if satisfied that the partnership or company was at the time of the striking off carrying on business or in operation, or otherwise that it is just that the partnership or company be restored to the register, order the name of the company to be restored to the register, and thereupon the partnership or company shall be deemed to have continued in existence as if its name had not been struck off; and the Court may by the order give such directions and make such provisions as seem just for placing the partnership or company and all other persons in the same position as nearly as may be as if the name of the partnership or company had not been struck off. Any request for restoration of the name of the partnership or company to the register may not be made after the expiration of ten years from the day the name is struck off by the Registrar.”

TITLE XXIII: ASSOCIATIONS

Section 1274 – 1297 (Repealed)

Provisions of Associations are inserted in Book I (Part II) of the Civil and Commercial Code (Sections 78 – 109).

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section 1298. Source of Property Rights

Real rights may be created only by the virtue of this Code or other laws.

Section 1299. Property Transfers need to be registered

Subject to a provision of this Code or other laws, no acquisition by juristic act of immovable or of real right appertaining thereto is complete unless the juristic act is made in writing and the acquisition is registered by the competent official.

Where immovable property or real right appertaining thereto is acquired otherwise than by juristic act, the acquirer’s right cannot be dealt with through the register unless it has been registered, nor can it, without registration, be set against a third person who has, for value and in good faith, acquired it and registered his right.

Section 1300. Cancellation of Improper Registration

Where a transfer of immovable property or real right appertaining thereto has been registered to the prejudice of a person who was previously in a position to have his right registered, he may claim cancellation of such registration, provided that in no case cancellation be claimed against a transferee for value in good faith.

Section 1301. Change

The provisions of the two foregoing sections shall apply mutatis mutandis to modification, extinction and revival of real rights appertaining to immovable property.

Section 1302. Movable Property

The provisions of the three foregoing sections shall apply mutatis mutandis to ships or vessels of six tons and over, to steam-launches or motor-boats of five tons and over, to floating houses and to beasts of burden.

Section 1303. Multiple Claims – Person with Possession is Preferred

Where several persons claim to have acquired the same movable property under different titles, the person who is in possession of the property is preferred that he has acquired it for value and has obtained the possession in good faith.

This section does not apply to movable property specified in the foregoing section nor to lost property or property acquired through an offence.

Section 1304. State Property

The domain public of State includes every kind of State property which is in use for public interest or reserved for the common benefit, such as:

  1. waste land and land surrendered, abandoned or otherwise reverted to the State according to the land law;
  2. property for the common use of the people e.g., foreshores, water-ways, highways, lakes;
  3. property for special use to the State e.g., a fortress or other military buildings, public offices, warships, arms and ammunition.

Section 1305. Public Domain

Any property which forms part of the domain public of State is in-alienable except by virtue of a special law or Royal Decree.

Section 1306. No Easements on Public Property

No prescription can be set up against the State with regard to any property which forms part of its public domain.

Section 1307. No Seizure of State Property

No seizure of State property can be effected, whether such property forms part of its public domain or not.

(top)

PROPERTY
TITLE II
OWNERSHIP

Chapter 1: Acquisition of Ownership

Section 1308. River Deposits

Where land is formed by alluvion (river deposits), it becomes the property of the riparian owner.

Section 1309. Islands are State Property

Islands formed in a lake or water-way of in territorial waters, and beds of water-ways left dry, are the property of the State.

Section 1310. Good Faith Wrongful Construction of a Building

If a person has, in good faith, constructed a building upon another person’s land, the owner of the land becomes the owner of the building, but he must pay the constructor for any increase of value accruing to the land by reason of the building.

However, if the owner of the land can show that there was negligence on his part, he may refuse to take the building and require that it be removed by the constructor and the land put in its former condition, unless this cannot be done at reasonable costs, in which case he may require the constructor to buy the whole or part of the land at the market price.

Section 1311. Bad Faith Wrongful Construction of a Building

If a person has, in bad faith, constructed a building upon another person’s land, he must return the land after having put it in its former condition, unless the owner of the land chooses to have it returned in its present condition, in which case the owner of the land must pay at his option the price of the building or a sum representing the increased value of the land.

Section 1312. Good Faith Building Encroachment

If a person has, in good faith, constructed a building encroaching on another person’s land, the constructor is the owner of the building, subject to his paying the owner of the land for the use of such land and having his rights on the encroached land registered as servitude. The owner of the land may demand cancellation of the registration if subsequently the building is totally destroyed.

If the constructor of the building is in bad faith, the owner of the land may require that it be removed by the constructor and the land put in its former condition, at the expense of the latter.

Section 1313. Conditional Owner – Undue Enrichment

If the conditional owner of a piece of land has constructed a building on it and the land becomes afterwards the property of another person by effect of the condition, the provisions of this Code concerning Undue Enrichment shall apply.

Section 1314. Trees and Crops on Land – Harvesting

The provisions of Sections 1310, 1311 and 1313 apply mutatis mutandis to any kind of work which is fixed to land, and to the planting of trees or crops.

However, in case of paddy or other crops harvested one or more times a year, the owner of the land must either allow the person in good faith or the conditional owner who has made the planting to remain in the possession of the land till after the harvest on payment of a sum of money based on the rental value of the land, or take immediate possession of the land on payment of compensation to the other party.

Section 1315. Reimbursement for Benefit

When a person has constructed buildings, or has made any other work which is fixed to land, or has planted trees or crops, on his land with materials belonging to another person, he becomes the owner of the materials, but he must pay for their value.

Section 1316. Joint Ownership of Movables

If several movables belonging to different persons have been joined in such matter that they become component parts or indivisible, the different persons become co-owners of the composite thing, each person’s share being proportionate to the value of his thing at the time of its being joined with the other things.

If one of the things could be regarded as the principal thing, the owner becomes the sole owner of the composite thing, but he must pay the value of the other things to their respective owners.

Section 1317. Use of Another’s Materials

If a person uses materials belonging to another person to make a new thing, the latter person becomes the owner of such thing, irrespective of the question whether the materials can or cannot assume their former condition, but he must pay for the work.

However, if the value of the work greatly exceeds the value of the materials used, the worker shall become the owner of the thing which is the result of his work, but he must pay the value of the materials.

Section 1318. Ownership by Occupation

A person may acquire the ownership of an ownerless movable by occupation, unless the occupation is forbidden by law or is in violation of another person’s right to occupation of such movable.

Section 1319. Renouncing Ownership

A movable becomes ownerless if the owner gives up its possession with the intention of renouncing its ownership.

Section 1320. Wild Animals are Ownerless

Subject to special laws and regulations relating thereto, wild animals are ownerless so long as they have their freedom. Wild animals in zoological gardens and fishes in pounds or other enclosed private waters are not ownerless.

A captured wild animal becomes ownerless if it regains its freedom and the owners does not pursue it without delay or gives up the pursuit.

A tamed animal becomes ownerless if it gives up the habit of returning.

Section 1321. Catching a Wild Animal

Subject to special laws and regulations relating thereto, a person who catches a wild animal on waste lands or in public waters, or, without opposition of the owner, on private lands or in private waters, becomes its owner.

Section 1322. Caught by First Person Becomes Owner

If a wild animal which is wounded and pursued by one person is caught by another person or falls dead on another person’s land, the first person becomes its owner.

Section 1323. A person who finds lost property is bound: (give back property)

  1. to deliver it to the loser, the owner or any other person entitled to receive it, or
  2. to inform without delay to the loser, the owner or any other person entitled to receive it, or
  3. to deliver it within three days to the police or other competent official and inform them of all circumstances within his knowledge which may be material for the person who is entitled to receive it.

However, the procedure provided in sub-section 3 must be followed it the loser, owner or other person entitled to receive the property is unknown or does not take delivery of it.

In any case the property found must be kept with reasonable care until delivery.

Section 1324. Reward for the Finder of Lost Property

A finder of lost property may claim from the person entitled to receive it a reward of ten per cent of the value of the property up to thirty thousand baht, and five per cent on the additional value. However, if he delivers the property to the police or other competent official, two and a half per cent of the value of the property shall, in addition to the reward, be paid as a fee to the Government service concerned, but, in no case, shall such fee exceed one thousand baht.

The finder is not entitled to any reward if he does not comply with the provisions of the foregoing section.

Section 1325. One Year Statute of Limitations for person to claim property

If the finder of lost property has complied with the provisions of Section 1323 and the person entitled to receive it has not claimed it within one year from the day of find, the ownership vested in the finder.

However, if the unclaimed property is an antique object, the ownership vested in the State, but the finder is entitled to receive a reward of ten per cent of its value.

Section 1326. Property thrown into the Sea and Washed Ashore

The finding of property thrown into the sea or water-ways or washed ashore is governed by the laws and regulations relations thereto.

Section 1327. Property Used in a Crime

Subject to the provisions of the criminal law, the ownership of anything which has been used for committing, or has been acquired through, or is otherwise connected with, an offence, and placed under the care of a Government Department, is vested in the State if it has not been claimed by the owner within one year from the day of its being so placed or, in case of a criminal action having been entered in Court, from the day of final judgment. However, if the owner is unknown, the period shall be extended to five years.

If the property is perishable, on delay involves risks or expenses out of proportion to its value, the Government Department may, before the expiration of the periods, cause the property to be sold by public auction, provided that before the sale proper measures are taken for recording all such particulars as may enable the person entitled to receive the property to identify it and prove his rights thereto. After the sale, the net proceeds shall be substituted for the property.

Section 1328. Hidden or Buried Property

Where a movable of value which has been hidden or buried is found under such circumstances that no person can claim to be its owner, the ownership is vested in the State. The finder is bound to deliver it to the police or other competent official, in which case he is entitled to receive a reward of one-third of its value.

Section 1329. Acquiring Property in Good Faith

The right of a person who has acquired property for value and in good faith is not affected even if the act under which his transferor acquired the property was voidable and has been subsequently avoided.

Section 1330. Purchase from Public Auction

The right of a person who has in good faith purchased property at a sale by public auction under an order of the Court or of the Official Receiver in bankruptcy is not affected even if it is subsequently proved that the property did not belong to the defendant, judgment debtor or bankrupt.

Section 1331. Receiving Money in Good Faith for Property

The right of a person who has acquired money in good faith is not affected even if it is subsequently proved that it did not belong to the person from whom he acquired it.

Section 1332. Purchase from Public Auction

When a person has in good faith purchased property at a sale by public auction or in open market or from a trader dealing in such things, he shall not be bound to return it to the true owner unless the latter reimburses the purchase price.

Section 1333. Ownership through Prescription

Ownership may be acquired by prescription under the rules provided in Title III of this Book.

Section 1334. Abandoned Land

Waste land and land surrendered, abandoned or otherwise reverted to the State according to the land law may be acquired according to the said law.

(top)

Chapter 2: Extent and Exercise of Ownership

Section 1335. Ownership of Land extends to the Airspace and Below Ground

Subject to the provisions of this Code or other laws, the ownership of land extends above and below the surface.

Section 1336. Fruits of the Property

Within the limits of law, the owner of property has the right to use and dispose of it and acquires its fruits; he has the right to follow and recover it from any person not entitled to detain it, and has the right to prevent unlawful interference with it.

Section 1337. Injury caused by exercise of property rights

If a person in the exercise of his right causes to the owner of an immovable property greater injury or inconvenience than should naturally and reasonably be expected or anticipated, having regard to the nature and situation of such property, the owner is entitled, without prejudice to any claim for compensation, to have such injury or inconvenience abated.

Section 1338. Restrictions on Property Owner Rights

Restrictions imposed by law on the rights of an owner of immovable property need not be registered.

Such restrictions imposed by law on the rights of an owner of immovable property need not be registered.

Restrictions imposed in the public interest can neither be removed nor modified.

Section 1339. Rights to naturally flowing water

The owner of a piece of land is bound to take the water that flows naturally on to it from higher land.

Water that flows naturally on to lower land and is necessary to such land may be retained by the owner of the higher land only to such extent as is indispensable to his land.

Section 1340. Damages for Artificial Drainage

The owner of a piece of land is bound to take water coming to it from the higher land in consequence of the artificial drainage of the higher land, if before the drainage the water flowed naturally on to his land.

If any damage is suffered by reason of such artificial drainage, the owners of the lower lands may, without prejudice to any claim for compensation, require the owner of the higher land, at the latter’s expense, to carry the drainage right through the lower lands to a public waterway or drain.

Section 1341. Roof construction cannot place force water onto neighbor’s property

The owner of an immovable property must not construct roofs or other structures which cause rain water to fall upon the adjoining property.

Section 1342. Artificial Water Receptacles near Boundary Lines

No well, pond, cesspool or receptacle for manure or refuse may be dug within two meters of the boundary line.

No ditch or excavation for laying underground water-pipes or similar installations may be made nearer to the boundary line than one half of the depth of such ditch or excavation provided always that it may be made at a distance of one meter or more.

In any case when the works mentioned in the foregoing paragraphs are carried out near the boundary line, due care must be taken to prevent earth or sand from falling in, or water or filth from percolating through.

Section 1343. Accumulation of Soil near Boundary Lines

Land may not be excavated or overloaded in such manner as to endanger the stay of soil of an adjoining piece of land unless adequate measures are provided for preventing and injury.

Section 1344. Fences, Walls, Hedges

Fences walls, hedges or ditches, which serve as a boundary, are presumed to belong to the owners of the adjoining properties in common.

Section 1345. Replacement of Hedge or Ditch with a Fence

When a hedge, or ditch which is not used as a drain, belongs to the owners of two adjoining pieces of land in common, each of the owners is entitled to cut down the hedge or fill up the ditch to the boundary line provided he builds a wall or erects a fence along the boundary line.

Section 1346. Fruits of a Boundary Tree

A tree which stands upon a boundary line is presumed to belong to the owners of the adjoining pieces of land in common. Its fruits belong to such owners in equal shares as well as the timber itself if the tree is felled.

Either owner may require the removal of the tree, the cost of removal being borne by them equally. However, the neighbor who requires the removal shall bear the cost alone if the other waives his right to the tree. Removal may not be required if the tree serves as a boundary mark and cannot be replaced by any appropriate boundary mark.

Section 1347. Overhanging Branches of a Boundary Tree

The owner of a piece of land may cut off and keep roots of a tree or bush which have penetrated from the adjoining piece of land. He may also cut off and keep overhanging branches after giving the possessor of the adjoining piece of land reasonable notice to remove them, such notice not having been complied with.

Section 1348. Falling Fruits

Fruits falling naturally upon adjoining land are presumed to be fruits of such land.

Section 1349. Rights to Passage Way to Public Road for Land Lock Properties

If a piece of land is so surrounded by other pieces of land that it has no access to the public ways, the owner may pass over the surrounding land to reach a public way.

The same applies, if passage can only be had over a pond, marsh, or sea, or if there is a steep slope with a considerable difference of level between the land and the public way.

The place and the manner of the passage must be chosen as to meet the needs of the person entitled to passage and at the same time to cause as little damage as possible to the surrounding land. The person entitled to passage may, if necessary, construct a road for passage.

The person entitled to passage must pay compensation for any damage suffered by the land owner on account of the passage being established. Such compensation, except for damages arising from the construction of a road, may be made by annual payments.

Section 1350. Right of Way without Compensation if Property has been Partitioned

Where land has been so partitioned or partially transferred that a plot is left without access to a public way, the owner of such plot may claim right of way under the forgoing section only over the land which has been so partitioned or partially transferred.

In such case no compensation need to be paid.

Section 1351. Right to Access to Build or Repair Fence

The owner of a piece of land may, after reasonable notice, make use of adjoining land so far as necessary for the purpose of erection, or repairing, a fence, wall or building on or near his boundary line, but he may not enter the dwelling house or a neighbor without the latter’s consent.

If damage is caused, the neighbor may claim compensation.

Section 1352. Right to Access for Utility Purposes – Water Pipes, Electric Wires etc.

The owner of a piece of land is bound, subject to reasonable compensation being paid him, to allow the laying through his land of water-pipes, drainage pipes, electric wires or similar installations for use of the adjoining land if, without making use of his land they could not be laid or could be laid only at an excessive cost; but he may require that his interest be taken into consideration.

In exceptional cases where the installations are to be above ground, he may require that a reasonable proportion of his land, over which such installations are to be laid, shall be bought from him at a price which will cover the value of the land and compensation for any damage arising from sale.

Where circumstances are changed, he may require that the installations be removed to such different part of his land as may be suitable to his interests.

The cost of removal must be borne by the owner of the adjoining land. However, if the special circumstances of the case so require, the other land owner may be held liable for a reasonable proportion of the cost.

Section 1353. Grazing and Water Rights for Cattle

A person may lead his cattle into or through another person’s unenclosed land for grazing and watering; he may fetch water from a well or pound within such land; provided always that it is not a plantation and is not prepared for cultivation, sown or covered with a crop. The owner may however forbid such action.

Section 1354. Collection of Fruits by Custom

A person may, if permitted by local custom, enter a wood, forest or pasture land owned by another person to collect fuel or gather wild fruits, vegetables, mushrooms and the like, provided that the owner does not prohibit it.

Section 1355. Limited Rights for Landowners by a Water-Way

The owner of a piece of land along or through which a water-way passes is not entitled to draw more water than necessary for his reasonable needs to the prejudice of any other piece of land on the water-way.

(top)

Chapter 3: Co-Ownership

Section 1356. Co-Ownership

If a property belongs to several persons in common the provisions of this chapter apply unless otherwise provided by law.

Section 1357. Co-owners are presumed to have equal shares.

Section 1358. Co-owners are presumed to have the right to manage the property in common.

Matters of ordinary management are decided by the majority of the co-owners. However, each co-owner may do an act of ordinary management unless the majority has decided otherwise; but, in any case he may do acts of preservation.

All important matters of management must be decided by a majority of co-owners who must also represent at least half of the value of the property.

A change of object may be decided upon only by the consent of all the co-owners.

Section 1359. Right to Recover Property against Third Persons

Each co-owner may exercise, as against third persons, any right arising from ownership in respect of the whole property, subject however, in case of a claim for the recovery of the property, to the conditions specified in Section 302 of this Code.

Section 1360. Use of Property

Each co-owner is entitled to use the property in so far as such use is not incompatible with the rights of the other co-owners.

Section 1361. Right to Mortgage their own share of Property

Each co-owner may dispose of, mortgage, or create a charge on, his share.

The property itself may be disposed of, pledged, mortgaged or made subject to a charge only with the consent of all the co-owners.

However, if a co-owner has disposed of, pledged, mortgaged or created a charge on, the property without the consent of all the other co-owners, and he subsequently becomes the sole owner of it, such act shall become valid.

Section 1362. Obligations for Common Obligation

Each co-owner is under the obligation to the other co-owners to bear in proportion to his share the costs of management, taxation and expenses for the preservation of the property as well as for its common use.

Section 1363. Right to Partition

Each co-owner is entitled to demand partition of the property, unless he is debarred from doing so by a juristic act or in consequence of the permanent character of the purpose of the co-ownership.

The right to demand partition may not be excluded by a juristic act for a period exceeding ten years at a time.

A co-owner may not demand partition at an unreasonable moment.

Section 1364. Partition

Partition is effected by actually dividing the property, or by selling it and dividing the proceeds of sale, between the co-owners.

If the co-owners cannot agree as to the manner of effecting partition, the Court may, on the application of any of them, order the actual division of the property, and any inequality there may be in the shares allotted may be rectified by compensation in money. If such division is not possible or is likely to cause serious loss, the Court may order the sale of the property by private auction among the co-owners or by public auction.

Section 1365. Joint Liability to Third Person

If the co-owners are jointly liable to a third person for an obligation in respect of the common property, or for another obligation incurred for the purpose of fulfilling such obligation, each may, at the time of partition, require that performance be made out of the common property or secured therefrom.

If a co-owner is liable to another co-owner for an obligation arising out of co-ownership or for another obligation incurred for the purpose of fulfilling such obligation, the latter may, at the time of partition, require that performance be made out of the share of the common property allotted to his debtor or secured therefrom.

The above rights may be exercised against a transferee of a co-owner’s share or a successor to the same.

If sale of the common property is necessary, the provisions of the foregoing section shall apply.

Section 1366. Proportional Liabilities

Each co-owner has, in proportion to his share, the same liabilities as a seller in respect of the property which the other co-owners have received under the partition.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE III
POSSESSION

Section 1367. Possessory Right

A person acquires possessory right by holding a property with the intention of holding it for himself.

Section 1368. Agent

A person may acquire possessory right through another person holding for him.

Section 1369. Presumption of Possessory Right

A person who holds a property is presumed to hold it for himself.

Section 1370. Presumption of Good Faith

A possessor is presumed to possess in good faith, peacefully and openly.

Section 1371. Break in Possession Presumption

If it is proved that a person possessed the same property at two different times, it is presumed that his possession continued during the interval.

Section 1372. Right to Exercise over Property Possessed

It is presumed that a possessor has, in law, the right which he exercises over the property possessed.

Section 1373. Registration of Land

Where property is an immovable entered in the land registered, the person whose name is on the register is presumed to have possessory right over it.

Section 1374. Removal of Disturbance

Where a possessor is disturbed in his possession by unlawful interference, he is entitled to have the disturbance removed. If further disturbance is to be apprehended, the possessor may apply for an injunction.

An action for removal of disturbance must be entered within one year from the time of the disturbance.

Section 1375. Unlawful Deprivation of Property

Where a possessor is unlawfully deprived of possession, he is entitled to have it returned, unless the other party has over the property a better right which would entitle him to claim it back from the possessor.

An action for recovery of possession must be entered within one year from the time of dispossession.

Section 1376. Undue Enrichment

Where property is to be returned to the person entitled to recover it, the provisions of Section 412 to 418 of this Code concerning Undue Enrichment shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section1377. Abandonment

Possession comes to an end if the possessor abandons the intention to possess or no longer holds the property.

Possession does not come to an end if the possessor is prevented from holding the property by some cause which is temporary in its nature.

Section 1378. Transfer by Delivery

Transfer of possession is affected by delivery of the property possessed.

Section 1379. Transfer by Declaration

Where property is already held by the transferee or his representative, the transfer of possession may be effected by a declaration of intention.

Section 1380. Transfer by Intention

Transfer of possession is effected when the transferor, while continuing to hold the property, declares an intention to hold it thenceforward on behalf of the transferee.

If the property is held by his representative, the transfer of possession may be effected by the transferor directing such representative thenceforward to hold the property on behalf of the transferee.

Section 1381. Notice to Possessor by Representative

Where a person holds property as representative of the possessor, he may change the nature of his holding only by a notice to the possessor that he no longer intends to hold the property for such possessor or by becoming in good faith, through the act of a third person, possessor under a new title.

Section 1382. Open Ownership of Property

Where a person has, for an uninterrupted period of ten years in case of an immovable, or five years in case of a movable, peacefully and openly possessed a property belonging to another, with the intention to be its owner, he acquires the ownership of it.

Section 1383. Ownership of Property through Bad Faith or Offense

The ownership of property obtained through an offence may be acquired by the offender or a transferee in bad faith by prescription only after the expiration of the period provided for prescription of the offence or of the period fixed by the foregoing section whichever is longer.

Section 1384. Involuntary Loss of Property but Reclamation within One year

Possession shall not be deemed interrupted if the possessor involuntarily loses the holding of the property, and recovers it within one year from the date of the loss or by means of an action instituted with that time.

Section 1385. Rights of a Transferee

Where possession is transferred, the transferee may add the period of the transferor’s possession to that of his own; in which case any defect in the possession of the transferor may be set up against the transferee.

Section 1386. Change

The provisions of this Code concerning Prescription shall apply mutatis mutandis to acquisitive prescription to this Title.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE IV
SERVITUDE

Section 1387. Easements – Servitudes

An immovable property may be subjected to a servitude by virtue of which the owner of such property is bound, for the benefit of another immovable property, to suffer certain act affecting his property or to refrain from exercising certain rights inherent in his ownership.

Section 1388. Dominant Property cannot increase burden on Servient Property

The owner of the dominant property is not entitled to make any change, either on the servient or on the dominant property, which increases the burden of the servient property.

Section 1389. No additional burdens

Changes in the requirements of the owner of the dominant property do not entitle him to impose an additional burden on the servient property.

Section 1390. Servient Property cannot purposefully Diminish Utility of Servitude

The owner of the servient property must refrain from any act which will tend to diminish the utility of the servitude or to make it less convenient.

Section 1391. Dominant Property is entitled to preserve servitude

The owner of the dominant property is entitled, at his own expense, to do all that is necessary to preserve and make use of the servitude. He must, in doing so, cause as little damage as possible to the servient property.

He must at his own expense keep the work done in a state of good maintenance and repair. However, if the owner of the servient property benefits by the work, he must bear a share of the expenses in proportion to the benefit which he receives.

Section 1392. Servient Property can move place of Servitude as long as it is not less convenient to Dominant Property

Where servitude affects one part only of the servient property, the owner of that property may, by showing that the charge would be for his benefit and by undertaking to bear the cost of it, require that the servitude be removed to another part of his property, provided this would not be less convenient to the owner of the dominant property.

Section 1393. Servitude follows the transfer of the Dominant Property

Unless otherwise provided in the act creating it, a servitude follows the dominant property when the latter is disposed of or made subject to other rights.

A servitude cannot be disposed of or made subject to other rights apart from the dominant property. Section 1394. Servitude continues even if property is divided.

In case of a division of servient property, the servitude continues to be a burden on each part. However, if the servitude is not, and from nature of the case could not be, exercised over any particular part, the owner of such part may demand to be relieved from it.

Section. 1395. Division of Dominant Property

In case of a division of dominant property, the servitude continues to exist for the benefit of each part. However, if the servitude is not, and from the nature of the case could not be, exercised for the benefit of any particular part, the owner of the servient property may demand to be relieved from servitude with respect to such part.

Section 1396. Co-Owners of Dominant Property

Servitudes acquired or exercised by any of the co-owners of the dominant property is deemed to have been acquired or exercised by all co-owners.

Section 1397. Servitude is extinguished by Property Destruction

Servitude is extinguished by the total destruction of the servient or dominant property.

Section 1398. If Servient and Dominant Properties are owned by Same Owner

If servient and dominant properties are vested in one and the same owner, such owner may have the registration of servitude cancelled; until such cancellation the servitude continues to exist as regards to third persons.

Section 1399. Non Usage of Servitude

Servitude is extinguished by non-usage for ten years.

Section 1400. Servitude extinguish if it ceases to be a benefit

Servitude is extinguished if it has ceased to benefit the dominant property; but it revives if the condition of things becomes such that the servitude can be enjoyed again, provided that the period of prescription specified in the foregoing section has not elapsed.

Section 1401. Servitude may be acquired by prescription.

The provisions concerning prescription as described in Title III of this Book shall apply mutatis mutandis.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE V
HABITATION (Foreigners Quasi-Ownership)

Section 1402. Arsai

A person who has been granted a right of habitation (arsai) in a building is entitled to occupy such building as a dwelling place without paying rent.

Section 1403. Period of Arsai

A right of habitation may be created either for a period of time or for the life of the grantee.

If no time has been fixed, such right may be terminated at any time by giving reasonable notice to the grantee.

If it is granted for a period of time, the period may not exceed thirty years; if a longer period is stipulated, it shall be reduced to thirty years. The grant may be renewed for a period not exceeding thirty years from the time of renewal.

Section 1404. Arsai is not Transferable

The right of habitation is not transferable even by way of inheritance.

Section 1405. Arsai is Limited to only the Grantee and Members of Household

Unless the right of habitation is expressly limited to be for the benefit of the grantee personally, the members of his family and his household may dwell with him.

Section 1406. Arsai right to natural fruits of the land

Unless expressly forbidden by the grantor, the grantee may take such natural fruits or products of the land as are necessary for the needs of his household.

Section 1407. Grantor not required to maintain property

The grantor is not bound to maintain the property in a good state of repair.

The grantee cannot claim reimbursement of expenses made by him for improvements to the property.

Section 1408. End of Arsai

When the right of habitation comes to an end the grantee must return the property to the grantor.

Section 1409.

The provisions of this Code concerning Duties and Liabilities of the Hirer, as specified in Sections 552, 555, 558, 562 and 563 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE VI
SUPERFICIES

Section 1410. Right of Superficies

The owner of a piece of land may create a right of superficies in favor of another person by giving him the right to own, upon or under the land, buildings, structures or plantations.

Section 1411. Superficies Transferable

Unless otherwise provided in the act creating it, the right of superficies is transferable and transmissible by way of inheritance.

Section 1412. Time Period of for Superficies

A right of superficies may be created either for a period of time or for life of the owner of the land or the superficiary.

If it is created for a period of time, the provisions of Section 1403 paragraph 3 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1413. If no time period, reasonable notice of termination is required

If no period of time has been fixed, the right of superficies may be terminated at any time by any partner giving reasonable notice to the other. But when rent is to be paid, either one year’s previous notice must be given or rent for one year paid.

Section 1414. Termination for non-compliance

If the superficiary fails to comply with essential conditions specified in the act creating superficies or, when rent is to be paid, he fails to pay it for two consecutive years, his right of superficies may be terminated.

Section 1415. Destruction of Property

The right of superficies is not extinguished by destruction of the buildings, structures or plantations even if caused by force majeure.

Section 1416. Taking away of Property

When the right of superficies is extinguished, the superficiary may take away his buildings, structures or plantations, provided he restores the land to its former condition.

If instead of permitting the removal of the buildings, structures or plantations, the owner of the land notifies his intention to buy the property at market value, the superficiary may not refuse the offer except on reasonable ground.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE VII
USUFRUCT

Section 1417. USUFRUCT – Right to enjoy use and fruits of another’s property

An immovable property may be subjected to a usufruct by virtue of which the usufructuary is entitled to the possession, use and enjoyment of the property.

He has the right of management of the property.

The usufruct of a forest, mine or quarry entitles the usufructuary to the exploitation of the forest, mine or quarry.

Section 1418. If no time limit, Usufruct is presumed to be Lifetime.

A usufruct may be created either for a period of time or for the life of the usufructuary. If no time has been fixed, it is presumed that the usufruct is for the life of the usufructuary.

Section 1419. Destruction of Property

If property is destroyed without compensation being paid, the owner is not bound to restore it; but, if he does so to any extent, the usufruct revives to that extent.

If any compensation is paid, the owner or the usufructuary must restore the property so far as it is impossible to do so, having regard to the amount of the compensation received, and the usufruct revives to that extent; but, if restoration is impossible, the usufruct come to an end and the compensation must be divided between the owner and the usufructuary in proportion to the damages suffered by them respectively.

The same rules apply mutatis mutandis in case of expropriation as well as in case of partial destruction of the property or of partial impossibility to restore the property.

Section 1420. End of Usufructuary

When usufruct comes to an end, the usufructuary must return the property to the owner.

The usufructuary is liable for the destruction or depreciation in value of the property, unless he proves that the damage was not caused by his fault.

He must replace anything which he has wrongfully consumed.

He is not bound to give compensation for depreciation in value caused by reasonable use.

Section 1421. Ordinary Care of Property

The usufructuary must, in the exercise of his rights, take as must care of the property as a person of ordinary prudence would take of his own property.

Section 1422. Transfer of Usufructuary

Unless otherwise provided in the act creating the usufruct, the usufructuary may transfer the exercise of his right to the third person. In such case the owner of the property may sue the transferee direct.

Section 1423. Objection to Unlawful or Unreasonable Use

The owner may object to any unlawful or unreasonable use of the property.

If the owner proves that his rights are in peril, he may demand security from the usufructuary, except in the case of donor who has reserved to himself the usufruct of the property given.

If the usufructuary fails to give security within a reasonable time fixed for the purpose, or if, in spite of the owner’s objection he continues to make use of the property unlawfully or unreasonably, the Court may appoint a Receiver to manage the property in his stead. Upon security being given the Court may release the Receiver so appointed.

Section 1424. Maintaining Property

The usufructuary is bound to keep the substance of the property unaltered, and is responsible for ordinary maintenance and pretty repairs.

If important repairs or measures are necessary for the preservation of the property, the usufructuary must forthwith inform the owner thereof and permit them to be carried out. In case of default by the owner, the usufructuary may have the work carried out at the owner’s expense.

Section 1425. Extraordinary Expenses

All extraordinary expense must be borne by the owner, but in order to meet these or expenses coming under the foregoing section he may realize part of the property unless the usufructuary is willing to advance the necessary funds without charging interest.

Section 1426. Expenses for Management of Property

The usufructuary shall, for the duration of the usufruct, bear expenses for the management of the property, pay taxes and duties, and be responsible for interests payable on debts charged upon it.

Section 1427. Insurance

If required by the owner, the usufructuary is bound to ensure the property against loss for the benefit of the owner; and if the property is already insures he is bound to renew such insurance when due He must pay the premiums of the insurance for the duration of his usufruct.

Section 1428. Statute of Limitations

No action by the owner against the usufructuary or his transferee in connection with the usufruct or vice versa may be entered later than one year after the usufruct comes to an end. But in an action by the owner who could not have known of the end of the usufruct, the prescription of one year shall run from the time when he knew or ought to have known of it.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

PROPERTY
TITLE VIII
CHARGE ON IMMOVABLE PROPERTY

Section 1429. Charge for Use

An immovable property may be subject to a charge entitling the beneficiary to a periodical performance out of such property or to a specified use and enjoyment thereof.

Section 1430. Time Period for each Use

A charge on immovable property may be created either for a period of time or for the life of the beneficiary.

If no time has been fixed, it is presumed that the charge is for the life of the beneficiary.

If it is created for a period of time, the provisions of Section 1403 paragraph 3 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1431. Charge cannot be transferable

Unless otherwise provided in the act creating it, a charge on immovable property is not transferable even by way of inheritance.

Section 1432. Failure to comply with terms of charge

If the beneficiary fails to comply with any essential condition specified in the act creating the charge, his right may be terminated.

Section 1433. Owner’s non-compliance

If the owner of the property does not perform his obligations under the charge, the beneficiary may, in addition to the remedies for non-performance, apply to the Court to appoint a Receiver to manage the property and perform the obligations for the owner, or order the property to be sold by auction and the beneficiary be paid out of the owner together with the value of the charge.

The Court may, upon security being given by the owner, refuse to make an order for the appointment of a receiver or for an auction, or release a Receiver already appointed.

Section 1434.

Sections 1388 to 1395 and 1397 to 1400 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the charge on immovable property.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

FAMILY
TITLE I
MARRIAGE

Chapter 1: Betrothal (Engagement)

Section 1435. Minimum Age for Marriage

A betrothal can be effected only when the man and the women have completed seventeenth year of age.

The betrothal contrary to the provision of paragraph one is void.

Section 1436. Consent Required if Party is a Minor

If a minor will conclude a betrothal, the consent of the following persons is required:

  1. his or her parents, in case both of his her father and mother are still alive;
  2. his or her parent, in case his or her father or mother died, or is in condition of state of being unable to give consent, or is under the circumstances that make the minor unable to ask for such consent;
  3. his or her adopter, in case the minor is an adopted child
  4. his or her guardian, in case there is no person giving consent under (1), (2) and (3), or such person is deprived of parental power.

A betrothal concluded by the minor without the said consent is voidable.

Section 1437. Khongman and Sinsod

Betrothal is not valid until the man gives or transfers the property which is Khongman to the woman as evidence that the woman after the betrothal has taken place.

The Khongman shall become the property of the woman after the betrothal has taken place. Sinsod is property given on the part of the man to the parents, adopter of guardian of the woman, as the case may be, in return of the woman agreeing to marry. If the marriage does not take place causing mainly from the woman or on account of any circumstances that make the woman responsible therefore and make the marriage unsuitable for the man or make the man unable to marry that woman, the man may claim the return of the Sinsod.

The provisions of Section 412 to Section 418 of this Code on undue enrichment shall apply to the return of the Khongman or Sinsod under this Chapter, mutatis mutandis.

Section 1438 No Compulsory Performance for Marriage

Betrothal does not give rise to an action for compulsory performance of the marriage. An agreement to pay a penalty in case of breach of the betrothal agreement is void.

Section 1439. Breach of Agreement to Marry

After the betrothal has taken place if either party commits a breach of the betrothal agreement, such party shall be liable to make compensation. In case the woman commits a breach of the betrothal agreement, the Khongman shall also be returned to the man.

Section 1440. Compensation for Breach

Compensation may be claimed as follows:

  1. for injury caused to the body or reputation of the man or woman;
  2. for appropriate expenses or debt incurred in good faith by the betrothed , his or her parents or a person acting in the capacity of his or her parents in preparation for the marriage;
  3. for damage suffered by the man or woman through having take appropriate measures affecting his or her property or other affairs relating to his or her occupation or earning in expectation of the marriage.

In case where the woman is entitled to the compensation, the Court may decide that the Khongman which has become her property is the whole or a part of compensation she will receive, or the Court may order for payment of the compensation without regard to Khongman that has become property of the woman.

Section 1441. Death before Marriage

Where one of the betrothal dies before the marriage, there shall be no claim for compensation. As for the Khongman or Sinsod, it need not be returned by the woman or on the part of the woman, irrespective if the death of either party.

Section 1442. Event that Makes Woman unsuitable for Marriage

In case where there is an essential event happening to the betrothed woman that make the marriage to the woman unsuitable, the man is entitled to renounce the betrothal agreement and the woman shall return the Khongman to the man.

Section 1443. Event that Makes Man unsuitable for Marriage

In case where there is an essential event happening to the betrothed man that makes marriage to the man unsuitable, the woman is entitled to renounce the betrothal agreement and the Khongman need not to be returned to the man.

Section 1444. Gross Misconduct

If the ground that makes the one betrothed renounce the betrothal agreement in the gross misconduct if the other taken place after the conclusion of betrothal, the betrothed who had committed the gross misconduct shall be liable to make compensation to the other who has exercised his or her right to renounce the betrothal agreement as if the former had committed a breach of the betrothal agreement.

Section 1445. Adultery during Engagement

A man who is betrothed to a woman may, after the betrothal agreement having been renounced under the Section 1442, claim compensation from any man who has sexual intercourse with the woman and has known or should have known of her betrothal.

Section 1446. Compensation against Man for Forced Sex Advances

A man who is betrothed may, without requiring him to renounce the betrothal agreement, claim compensation from any man who has had sexual intercourse or attempted to have sexual intercourse with the woman against her will, and the fact that the woman had been betrothed has been known or ought to have known to him.

Section 1447. Compensation decided by Court

The Court shall determine the compensation claimed under this Chapter according to the circumstances.

The claim under this Chapter, except to one in Section 1440 (2), cannot be transferred or inherited unless such claim has been acknowledged in writing or the action for compensation has been entered by the injured person.

Section 1447/1. Six Months Statute of Limitations

The prescription for the claim for compensation under Section 1439 shall be six months from the date of the breach of the betrothal agreement.

The prescription for the claim for compensation under Section 1444 shall be six months from the day when the commission of gross misconduct which is the cause of renunciation of the betrothal agreement is known or should have known to the other betrothed, but no later than five years from the date of the said commission.

The prescription for the claim for compensation under Section 1445 and Section 1446 shall be six months from the day when the betrothed man knows or should have known the commission of any other man which is the cause of the claim and the person bound to make the compensation is known, but not later than five years from the date of such commission.

Section 1447/2.

The prescription for the claim for return of the Khongman under section 1439 shall be six months from the date of the breach of the betrothal agreement.

The prescription for the return of the Khongman under Section 1442 shall be six months from the date of denunciation of the betrothal agreement.

(top)

Chapter 2: Conditions of Marriage

Section 1448. Minimum Age of Marriage

A marriage can take place only when the man and woman have completed their seventeenth year of age. But the Court may, in case of having appropriate reason, allow them to marry before attaining such age.

Section 1449. Insane or Incompetent Person

A marriage cannot take place if either the man or the woman is an insane person or adjudged incompetent.

Section 1450. Blood Relations

A marriage cannot take place if the man and woman are blood relations in the direct ascendant or descendant line, or brother or sister of full or half blood. The said relationship shall be in accordance with blood relation without regard to its legitimacy.

Section 1451. Adopted

An adopter cannot marry the adopted.

Section 1452. Currently Married

A marriage cannot take place if the man or woman is already the spouse of another person.

Section 1453. 310 Days Waiting Period

In case of the woman whose husband died or whose marriage has become terminated, the marriage can only take place if not less than three hundred and ten days have elapsed since the termination of her previous marriage; unless

  1. a child has been born during such period;
  2. the divorced couple remarry;
  3. there is a certificate issued by a qualified doctor who is a lawful physical practitioner in medicine showing that the woman is not pregnant;
  4. there is an order of the Court allowing the woman to marry.

Section 1454. Marriage of Minor

In case of marriage of a minor, the provisions of Section 1436 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1455. Consent for Marriage by Minors

Giving consent to the marriage may be made:

  1. by affixing signature of the person giving consent in the Register at the time of registration of the marriage;
  2. by a consent document stating the names of the parties to the marriage and signed by the person giving consent;
  3. by verbal declaration before at least two witnesses in case of necessity.

The consent having been given cannot be revoked.

Section 1456. If no person to consent, minors can file an application with the court

In case where there is no person having the power to give consent under Section 1454, or if the person refuses to give consent or is in the position of being unable to give consent, or the minor cannot, in such circumstances, ask for the consent, the minor may file an application with the Court for giving consent to the marriage.

Section 1457. Registration

Marriage under this Code shall be effected only on registration being made.

Section 1458. Agreement to be married

A marriage can take place only if the man and woman agree to take each other as husband and wife, and such agreement must be declared publicly before the Registrar in order to have it recorded by the Registrar.

Section 1459. Marriage in Foreign Country is legal in Thailand

A marriage in foreign country between Thai people or between a Thai people and a foreigner may be effected according to the form prescribed by Thai law or by the law of the country where it takes place.

If the spouses desire to have the marriage registered according to Thai law, the registration shall be effected by a Thai Diplomatic or Consular Officer.

Section 1460. Special Circumstance which make Marriage Registration impossible

In case where there exists special circumstances that make the marriage registration by the Registrar unable because either or both of the man and woman were in imminent danger of death or in the state of armed conflict or war, if a declaration of intention to marry has been made by the man and woman before a person of sui juris living there, who would have noted down as an evidence such intention, and if the registration of marriage between the man and woman was effected thereafter not later than ninety days as from the date of first possible opportunity to apply for registration of marriage with production of the evidence of the intention in order to have the date and place of declaration of intention to marry and the special circumstances recorded by the Registrar in the Marriage Register, the day on which declaration of intention to marry has been made to the said person shall be deemed as the date of registration of marriage.

The provisions of this Section shall not apply to the marriage that is void if it should take place on the date of declaration of intention.

(top)

Chapter 3: Relationship of Husband and Wife

Section 1461. Husband and Wife Relationship

Husband and wife shall cohabit as husband and wife.

Husband and wife shall maintain and support each other according to his or her ability and condition in life.

Section 1462. Danger of Cohabitation

Where the physical or mental health or happiness of either spouse is greatly imperiled by continuance of cohabitation, the spouse so imperiled may apply to the Court for authorization to live apart while the danger persists; and in such case, the Court may order such amount of maintenance to be furnished by one of the spouses to the other as may be proper according to the circumstances.

Section 1463. Incompetency

If one of the spouses is adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent, the other becomes guardian or curator by operation of law. But on application of any interested person or of Public Prosecutor, the Court may on substantial grounds, appoint another person as guardian or curator.

Section 1464. Insanity

If one of the spouse becomes insane, irrespective of whether he or she has been adjudged incompetent or not, and the other fails to give proper maintenance to the insane spouse under Section 1461 paragraph two, does or fails to do anything to the extent that it plunges the insane spouse into the position which is likely endangering the latter’s body or mind, or causing any undue loss to the latter’s property, the persons as specified in Section 28 or the guardian may enter an action against the other claiming maintenance for the insane spouse, or apply for any order of the Court to protect the insane spouse.

If, in case of entering the action for maintenance under paragraph one, no order has yet been given to effect the insane spouse to become incapacitated person, an application shall be made 10 the Court in the same case for an order effecting such insane spouse to be an incapacitated person and to appoint the applicant himself or herself as the guardian. If such order effecting the incapacitated person on the insane spouse has been given, an application for removal of the old guardian and appointment of a new one may be made.

In applying for any order of the Court for protecting the insane spouse without claiming maintenance, the applicant may not request the Court to order effecting the insane spouse to be an incapacitated person or to change the guardian. If the measures for protection as requested, in the opinion of the Court, requires an appointment or change of the guardian, the Court shall firstly give an order effecting the carrying out of the similar activities as provided in paragraph two, and then give a protection order as it is deemed suitable.

Section 1464/1

During the Court trial under Section 1464, the Court may, upon request, determine any temporary measures concerning the maintenance or protection of the insane spouse as it is deemed suitable. If it is a case of emergency, the provisions on the request in case of emergency under the Civil Procedure Code shall apply.

(top)

Chapter 4: Property of Husband and Wife

Section 1465. Property

Where the husband and wife have not, previous to their marriage, concluded a special agreement concerning their properties, the relations between them as regards to their properties shall be governed by the provisions of this Chapter.

Any clause in the prenuptial agreement contrary to public order or good morals, or provided that the relations between them as regards such properties are to be governed by foreign law shall be void.

Section 1466. Void Prenuptial Agreement

The prenuptial agreement is void if not entered in the Marriage Register at the time of marriage registration terms of the prenuptial; or if not made in writing and signed by both spouses and by at least two witnesses and entered in the Marriage Register at the time of marriage registration stating that the prenuptial is thereto annexed.

Section 1467. No Alteration of Prenuptial Agreement

After marriage the prenuptial agreement cannot be altered except by authorization of the Court. When there is final order of the Court to effect the alteration of cancellation of the prenuptial agreement, the Court shall notify the Marriage Registrar of the matter in order to have it entered in the Marriage Register.

Section 1468. Prenuptial Agreements have no effect on Good Faith Third Parties

Clauses in the prenuptial agreement shall have no effect as regards the rights of third persons acting in good faith irrespective of whether they be altered or cancelled by the order of the Court.

Section 1469. Agreements can be Voided

Any agreement concluded between husband and wife during marriage may be voided by either of them at any time during marriage or within one year from the day of dissolution of marriage; provided that the right of third persons acting in good faith are not affected thereby.

Section 1470. Marital Property

Properties of husband and wife except in so far as they are set aside as Sin Suan Tua, are Sin Somros.

Section 1471. Separate Property

Sin Suan Tua (Separate Property) consists of:

  1. property belonging to either spouse before marriage
  2. property for personal use, dress or ornament suitable for station in life, or tools necessary for carrying on the profession of either spouse
  3. property acquired by either spouse during marriage through a will or gift
  4. Khongman (Engagement Property).

Section 1472. Separate Property exchanged for other property

As regards to Sin Suan Tua, if it has been exchanged to other property, other property has been bought or money has been acquired from selling it, such other property or money acquired shall be Sin Suan Tua.

Where the Sin Suan Tua has been totally or partly destroyed but replaced by other property or the money, such other property shall be Sin Suan Tua.

Section 1473. Each spouse is manager of his or her Sin Suan Tua.

Section 1474. Marital Property

Sin Somros consists of:

  1. property acquired during marriage;
  2. property acquired by either spouse during marriage through a will of gift made in writing if it is declared by such will or document of gift to be Sin Somros (Marital Assets);
  3. fruits of Sin Suan Tua.

In case of doubt as to whether a property in Sin Somros or not shall be presumed to be Sin Somros.

Section 1475. Changing Separate Property into Marital Property

Where any Sin Somros is property of the kind mentioned in Section 456 of this Code or has documentary title, either husband or wife may apply for having his or her name entered in the documents as co-owners.

Section 1476. Managing Marital Property

In managing the Sin Somros in the following cases, the husband and wife have to be joint manager, or one spouse has to obtain consent from the other:

  1. Selling, exchanging, sale with the right of redemption, letting out property on hire-purchase, mortgaging, releasing mortgage to mortgagor or transferring the right of mortgage on immovable property or on mortgageable movable property.
  2. Creating or distinguishing the whole or a part of the servitude, right of inhabitation, right of superficies, usufruct or charge on immovable property.
  3. Letting immovable property for more than three years.
  4. Lending money
  5. Making a gift unless it is a gift for charitable, social or moral purposes and is suitable to the family condition.
  6. Making a compromise.
  7. Submitting a dispute to arbitration.
  8. Putting up the property as guarantee or security with a competent official or the Court.

The management of the Sin Somros in any case other than those provided in paragraph one can be made only by one spouse without having to obtain consent from the other.

Section 1476/1. Prenuptial Agreement

The husband and wife can manage the Sin Somros, differently, in whole or in part, from provisions of Section 1476, provided that the prenuptial agreement under Section 1465 and Section 1466 has been made. In such case, the management of the Sin Somros shall be made in accordance with the ante-nuptial agreement.

In case the specifications of the management of the Sin Somros in he ante-nuptial agreement are only part in difference to the provisions of Section 1476, the management of the Sin Somros other than those specified in the ante-nuptial contract shall be made in accordance with Section 1476.

Section 1477. Litigation of Marital Property

Either spouse is entitled to litigate, defend, take legal proceedings concerning maintenance of the Sin Somros or for the benefit of the Sin Somros. Debts incurred by the said litigation, defense and legal proceedings shall be regarded as the obligation to be performed jointly by the spouses.

Section 1478. Litigation for Consent

Where one spouse has to give consent or to affix a signature together with the other in the management of the property, but unreasonably refuses to give such consent or to affix such signature, or is not in a position to give such consent, the latter may apply to the Court for an order granting the necessary permission.

Section 1479. Consent Requirements

Where an act by either spouse requires the consent of the other spouse, and if such act is required by law to be made in writing or registered by the competent official, such consent must be given in writing.

Section 1480. Acting on Marital Property without Consent

In the management of the Sin Somros which has to be made jointly or has to obtain the consent from the other spouse under Section 1476, if either spouse has entered into any juristic act alone or without consent of the other, the latter may apply in Court for revoking such juristic act, unless it has been ratified by the other spouse, or the third person was at the time of entering into such juristic act, acting in good faith and make the counter-payment.

The litigation for revocation of the juristic act by the Court under paragraph one cannot be made later than one year from the day when such cause as being the ground for the revocation is known, or later than ten years since the juristic act was done.

Section 1481. Unfair Disposal of Marital Property

Neither spouse is entitled to dispose of the Sin Somros by will in favor of the other persons to an extent exceeding his or her own portion thereof.

Section 1482. Sole Management of Marital Property

In case either spouse is the sole manager of the Sin Somros, the other spouse is nevertheless entitled to manage household affairs or provide for the necessaries of the family, and the expenses therefore would bind the Sin Somros และ Sin Suan Tua of both parties.

If such management of household affairs or provision for the necessaries of the family by the husband or wife results in the undue loss, the other spouse may apply to the Court to forbid or limit his or her power.

Section 1483. Unnecessary Acts

In case either spouse is the sole manager of the Sin Somros, if the manager is going to commit or is committing any act in the management of the Sin Somros which would appear to result in undue loss, the other spouse may apply to the Court for an order forbidding commission of such act.

Section 1484. Duties of the Manager of Marital Property

If either spouse who is the manager of Sin Somros:

  1. causes undue loss to it;
  2. fails to support the other spouse;
  3. becomes insolvent or incurs debts to an amount exceeding one half of the Sin Somros;
  4. hinders the management of Sin Somros by the other spouse without reasonable ground;
  5. is found to have circumstances that will ruin the Sin Somros;

The other spouse may apply to the Court for an order authorizing him or her to be the sole manager or dividing the Sin Somros.

In case there is an application is made under paragraph one, the Court may determine temporary protective measures in the management of the Sin Somros. If that is the case of emergency, the provisions on the request in case of emergency under the Civil Procedure Code shall apply.

Section 1484/1. Revocation of Limits to Management Powers

In case where there has been an order of the Court forbidding or limiting the power of either spouse to manage the Sin Somros, if the cause which was the ground for the Court order or the circumstances have later changed, either spouse may apply to the Court revocation or change of the order forbidding or limiting the power to manage the Sin Somros. The Court in this effect may give any order which is deemed suitable.

Section 1485. Court Appointment to Manage Marital Property

The husband or wife may apply to the Court for authorizing him or her to be the manager of any particular Sin Somros or participate in the management, if such management or participation will bring about more benefit.

Section 1486. Bankruptcy Judgment

When the Court has pronounced a final judgment or given an order under Section 1482 paragraph two, Section 1483, Section 1484, Section 1484/1 or Section 1485 in favor of the applicant, or Section 1491, Section 1492/2 or Section 1598/17, or the husband and wife has been relieved of becoming bankrupt, the Court shall notify the marriage Registrar of the matter in order to have it entered in the Marriage Registrar.

Section 1487. Seizure of Property

No spouse can seize attach any property of the other during the marriage, except the seizure or attachment made in the case which has entered for the purpose of exercising his or her duty or for maintaining rights between husband and wife as specially provided in this Code or as specially provided by this Code allowing one spouse to sue the other, or for allowance due for maintenance and cost under the judgment of the Court.

Section 1488. Personal Liability to Perform

Where either spouse is personally liable to perform an obligation incurred before or during marriage, such performance shall be first made out of his or her Sin Suan Tua; if the obligation is not performed in full, it shall be satisfied out of his or her portion of the Sin Somros.

Section 1489. Collection of Debt from both Marital and Separate Property

Where both spouses are common debtors, the performance shall be made out of the Sin Somros and the Sin Suan Tua of both spouses.

Section 1490.

Debts that both spouses are jointly liable to perform, shall include the following debts incurred by either spouse during marriage:

  1. debts incurred in connection with management of household affairs and providing for the necessaries of the family, or maintenance, medical expenses of the household and for proper education of the children;
  2. debts incurred in connection with the Sin Somros;
  3. debts incurred in connection with a business carried on by the spouses in common;
  4. debts incurred by either spouse only for his or her own benefit but ratified by the other.

Section 1491. Bankruptcy of a Spouse

If either spouse is adjudged bankrupt, the Sin Somros is divided by operation of law as from the date of adjudication.

Section 1492. Division of Marital Property

After the Sin Somros has been divided under Section 1484 paragraph two, Section 1491 or Section 1598/17 paragraph two, the portion so divided becomes Sin Suan Tua of each spouse. Any property obtained after the division by either spouse shall be Sin Suan Tua of that spouse and not be regarded as Sin Somros. And the property acquired thereafter by the spouse through a will or gift made in writing under Section 1474 (2) shall become Sin Suan Tua of the husband and wife equally.

Fruits of the Sin Suan Tua accrued after the division of the Sin Somros shall be Sin Suan Tua.

Section 1492/1. Court Order Division of Marital Property

In case the division of the Sin Somros is made by the order of the Court, the revocation of the division shall be made upon the request of either spouse and the Court has given the order to that effect. If either spouse raises an objection to such request, the Court cannot give an order for the revocation of the division of the Sin Somros unless the cause for division of the Sin Somros has ceased to exist.

After the division of the Sin Somros under paragraph one having been revoked, or suspended due to the husband or wife having been relieved from being bankrupt, the property which is the Sin Suan Tua on the date of the order of the Court, or on the date of his or her relieving from being bankrupt shall remain the same as Sin Suan Tua.

Section 1493. Liability for Household Expenses

In case where the Sin Somros has been disposed of, both spouses are liable to pay for the household expenses in proportion to the amount of their respective Sin Suan Tua.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 5: Void of Marriage

Section 1494. Void Marriage

The marriage will be void only as provided in this Chapter.

Section 1495. Insane, Blood Relations, Already Married, By Force – Marriage is Void

The marriage which is made against Section 1449, Section 1450, Section 1452 and Section 1458 shall be void.

Section 1496. Void Marriages by Court Judgment submitted by Family Relations

It is only a judgment of the Court that effects the void of the marriage which is made against Section 1449, Section 1450 and Section 1458.

The spouses, parents or descendants of the spouse may apply for a judgment of the Court effecting the void of the marriage. If there is none of the said persons, any interested person may request the Public Prosecutor to apply to the Court for such judgment.

Section 1497. Any Interested Party can file a Court case

Any interested person may allege or apply for a judgment of the Court effecting that the marriage made against Section 1452 is void.

Section 1497/1. Final Judgment needs to be registered

In case there is a final judgment of the Court effecting the void of any marriage, the Court shall notify the Marriage Registrar of the matter in order to have it entered in the Marriage Register.

Section 1498. Void of marriage will not create property relation

In case of marriage has been adjudged void, the property possessed or acquired by either party before or after the marriage as well as the fruits thereof remain as that party’s property. As for the property jointly earned, they shall divided equally unless the Court deems it proper and order otherwise by taking into consideration the obligation in the family and earnings of both parties as well as their station in life, including all other circumstances.

Section 1499. Effect of Void Marriages on Rights

The marriage adjudged void as being against Section 1449, Section 1450 or Section 1458 shall not prejudice the right acquired through such marriage before pronouncing the final judgment effecting the void of the marriage by the party who has married in good faith.

The marriage adjudged void as being against Section 1452 shall not prejudice the right acquired through such marriage before the cause that the maker the marriage void is known to the man or woman. But the said marriage shall not make one spouse become statutory heir of the other and have the right of inheritance to the other spouse.

In case of the marriage adjudged void as being against Section 1449, Section 1450, Section 1458 or Section 1452, if one party only acted in good faith, such party may claim compensation. However, if such marriage makes the party in good faith become destitute deriving insufficient income out of his or her property or business which used to be carried on before pronouncing the final judgment to effect the void of the marriage, or before the void of his or her marriage becoming known, as the case may be, that party can also claim living allowance, and the provisions of Section 1526 paragraph one and Section 1528 shall apply to the claim for living allowances in this case, mutatis mutandis.

The prescription for claiming compensation or living allowances under paragraph three shall be two years from the date of pronouncing the final judgment to effect the void of the marriage in case of the marriage made against Section 1449, Section 1450 or Section 1448, or from the day when the void of his or her marriage becoming known in the case of the marriage made against Section 1452.

Section 1499/1. Parental Power after Void Marriage

In case of the marriage adjudged void, the agreement between the spouses as to which party to exercise the parental power over any child, or either party or both of them to be responsible for the amount of contribution of the maintenance of the child shall be made in writing. If the agreement cannot be reached, the Court shall make decision on the matter. In making such decision, if there are grounds for depriving that spouse of parental power under Section 1582, the Court may give an order depriving that spouse of the same and appoint a third person as a guardian by taking into consideration the happiness and interest of the child, and the provisions of Section 1521 shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

Section 1500. No Prejudice against Good Faith Third Parties

The marriage adjudged is void shall not prejudice the rights acquired by third person acting in good faith before entering the void of the marriage into the Marriage Register under Section 1497/1.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 6: Termination of Marriage

Section 1501. Termination of Married

Marriage is terminated by death, divorce or being cancelled by the Court.

Section 1502. Void by Court Judgment

A voidable marriage terminates upon cancellation decided by judgment of the Court.

Section 1503. Application for Cancellation of Marriage

An application to the Court for cancellation of a marriage on the ground of its voidability shall be made only in the case where the spouses have not complied with Section 1448, Section 1505, Section 1506, Section 1507, and Section 1509.

Section 1504. Interested Persons – Age and Pregnancy

An interested person other than the parents or guardian who have given their consent to the marriage is entitled to apply for cancellation of the marriage on the ground of its voidability.

If the court has not cancelled the marriage until both man and woman have completed the age required under Section 1448 or if the woman has become pregnant before such completion, the marriage shall be deemed to be valid from the time it was made.

Section 1505. Mistaken Identity

A marriage which is made on account of mistake as to the identity of the other spouse shall be deemed to be voidable.

The right to apply for cancellation of the marriage on account of mistake as to the identity of the spouse shall be terminated after the lapse of ninety days from the date of marriage.

Section 1506. Fraud

A marriage is voidable if it is made by the spouses on account of fraud to such an extent that without it the marriage would not have been made.

The provisions of paragraph one shall not apply to the case not apply to the case where the other spouse has not known the fraud committed by a third person.

The right to apply for cancellation of the marriage on account of fraud shall be terminated after the lapse of ninety days from the day on which the spouse has known or should have known of the fraud, or after the lapse of one year from the date marriage.

Section 1507. Durress

A marriage is voidable if it is made by the spouses on account of duress to such an extent that without it the marriage would not have been made.

The right to apply for cancellation of the marriage on account of duress shall be terminated after the lapse of one year from the day on which the spouse is free from duress.

Section 1508. Right to File because of Mistaken Identity, Fraud, or Duress

Where the marriage is voidable on account of mistake as to the identity of the spouse, fraud or duress, only the spouse who mistook the identity of the other, or was induced by fraud or duress to contract the marriage may apply for the cancellation of such marriage.

In case where the person entitled to apply for the cancellation of the marriage has been adjudged incompetent, the person who may apply to the Court for an order effecting an insane person to be an incapacitated person under Section 29, may also apply for the cancellation of such marriage. Where the person entitled to apply for the cancellation of the marriage is an insane person not yet adjudged incompetent, the said person may apply for the cancellation of such marriage but must apply concurrently to the Court for an order effecting him to be an incapacitated person. If the Court gives an order revoking the application for an order effecting him to be an incapacitated person, the Court shall also order revoking the application made by the said person for the cancellation of the marriage.

The order of the Court revoking the application made by the person for cancellation of the marriage under paragraph two does not affect the right of the spouse to apply for the cancellation of the marriage; provided that the spouse exercise his or her right within the remaining period of time. If the remaining period of time is less than six months as from the day on which the order of the Court revoking the application made by the said person for cancellation of the marriage is given, or if there remains no such period, the period of time shall correspondingly be extended to the completion of six months as from the day on which the order of the Court revoking the application made by the said person for the cancellation of the marriage is given.

Section 1509. No Consent

The marriage made without consent of the persons mentioned in Section 1454 is voidable.

Section 1510. Right to Void Marriage because of No Consent

Where the marriage is voidable on account of having been made without consent of the persons mentioned in Section 1454, only the person who can give the consent under Section 1454 may apply for the cancellation of the marriage.

The right to apply for the cancellation of the marriage under this Section is extinguished when the spouse has completed the age of twentieth year or when the woman has become pregnant.

The action for the cancellation of the marriage under this Section is barred by prescription after one year from the day where the marriage is known.

Section 1511. Rights of Good Faith Third Parties

The marriage which is cancelled by judgment of the Court shall be deemed to have terminated on the day when the judgment becomes final; provided, however, that it may not be set up to the prejudice of the rights of third persons acting in good faith unless the cancellation of the marriage has been registered.

Section 1512. Necessary Changes

The provisions concerning the result of divorce by judgment of the Court shall apply to the result of cancellation of the marriage mutatis mutandis (the necessary changes having been made).

Section 1513. Compensation for Innocent Party

If it appears that the spouse sued on cancellation of the marriage has known of the ground of the voidability, such spouse is required to make compensation for the damage to the body, reputation or property of the other arising from such marriage, and the provisions of Section 1525 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

If the other spouse becomes destitute due to the cancellation of the marriage under paragraph one and derives insufficient income out of his or her property of business which used to be carried on during the marriage, the spouse against whom the action has been brought is also required to be liable to living allowances as provided in section 1526.

Section 1514. Methods of Divorce

Divorce may be effected only by mutual consent or by judgment of the Court.

Divorce effected by mutual consent must be made in writing and certified by the signatures of at least two witnesses.

Section 1515. Divorce by Consent

Where marriage has been registered as provided by this Code, divorce by mutual consent is valid only if the registration thereof is effected by both the husband and wife.

Section 1516. Grounds for Divorce

Grounds of action for divorce are as follows:

  1. the husband has given maintenance to or honored such other woman as his wife, or the wife has committed adultery, the other spouse may enter a claim for divorce;
  2. one spouse is guilty of misconduct, notwithstanding whether such misconduct is a criminal offence or not, if it causes the other:
    1. to be seriously ashamed;
    2. to be insulted of hated or account of continuance of being husband or wife of the spouse having committed the misconduct; or
    3. to sustain excessive injury or trouble where the condition, position and cohabitation as husband and wife are taken into consideration; the latter may enter a claim for divorce;
  3. one spouse has caused serious harm or torture to the body or mind of the other, or has seriously insulted the other or his or her ascendants, the latter may enter a claim for divorce;
  4. one spouse has deserted the other for more than one year, the latter may enter a claim for divorce;
    1. (4/1) one spouse had been sentenced by a final judgment of the Court and has been imprisoned for more than one year in the offence committed without any participation, consent or in the knowledge of the other, and the cohabitation as husband and wife will cause the other party sustain excessive injury or trouble, the latter may enter a claim for divorce;
    2. (4/2) The husband and wife voluntarily live separately because of being unable to cohabit peacefully for more than three years, or live separately for more than three years by the order of the Court, either spouse may enter a claim for divorce;
  5. one spouse has been adjudged to have disappeared, or as left his or her domicile or residence for more than three years and being uncertain whether he or she is living or dead;
  6. one spouse has failed to give proper maintenance and support to the other, or committed acts seriously adverse to the relationship of husband and wife to such an extent that the other has been in excessive trouble where the condition, position and cohabitation as husband and wife are taking into consideration, the latter may enter a claim for divorce;
  7. one spouse has been an insane person for more than three years continuously and such insanity is hardly curable so that the continuance of marriage cannot be expected, the other may enter a claim for divorce;
  8. one spouse has broken a bond of good behavior executed by him or her, the other spouse may enter a claim for divorce;
  9. one spouse is suffering from a communicable and dangerous disease which is incurable and may cause injury to the other, the latter may file a claim for divorce;
  10. one spouse has a physical disadvantage so as to be permanently unable to cohabit as husband and wife, the other may enter a claim for divorce.

Section 1517. Consent to Action Voids Claim for Divorce Ground

No action for divorce may be instituted by the husband or wife, as the case may be if such spouse has consented to or connived at the acts under Section 1516 (1) and (2) upon which the action for divorce is based.

If the ground of action for divorce under Section 1516 (10) has resulted from the act of the other spouse, the action for divorce based upon such ground may not be instituted by such other spouse.

Where the action for divorce based upon the ground under section 1516 (8) has been instituted, the Court may not pronounce judgment to effect the divorce if the bahavior of the husband or wife that causes the bond to have been executed is a minor cause or of no importance in relation to peaceful cohabitation as husband and wife.

Section 1518. Divorce Action Terminated if Spouse Forgives

The right to institute an action for divorce would be terminated if the spouse entitled thereto has committed any act showing his or her forgiveness to the act done by the other that has caused the right to institute the action for divorce. (Forgiveness stops a divorce.)

Section 1519. Insanity

In case where one spouse is an insane person and if there gives rise to the ground of action for divorce irrespective of whether it arises before or after the insanity, the person entitled to apply to the Court for an order effecting the instance person to be an incapacitated person under Section 28* shall have the power to enter an action against the other spouse for divorce and liquidation of the property. In such a case if no order of the Court effecting the insane spouse to be an incapacitated person has yet been given, the said person shall apply to the Court in the same case for an order effecting the insane spouse to be an incapacitated person.

The said person may, if deemed suitable, also apply to the Court for giving the order under Section 1526 and Section 1530.

In case where the spouse alleged to be an insane person has not yet been adjudged incompetent, and if the Court deems that such spouse should not be judged incompetent, the case shall then be dismissed. If the spouse is deemed suitable to be adjudged incompetent but an order to effect the divorce should not yet be given as yet, the Court shall adjudge the spouse to be an incapacitated person and may not give order concerning the guardian or appointing other person to be guardian under Section 1463 while the application for divorce will be dismissed, and the Court may in this connection give an order determining living allowances. In case where the spouse is deemed to be insane and should be adjudged incompetent by the Court and the application for divorce should also be granted, the Court shall issue an order n the judgment effecting such spouse to be an incapacitated person, appointing a guardian and allowing the divorce.

In case there the Court deems that the ground upon which the claim for divorce is based is not proper to the condition of the incapacitated spouse who is going to divorce the other spouse, or it is not proper under such circumstances that divorce should be allowed, the Court may not pronounce the judgment to effect the divorce.

Section 1520. Divorce by Mutual Consent

In case of divorce by mutual consent, the spouses shall make an agreement n writing for the exercise of parental power over each of the children. In the absence of such agreement or an agreement thereon cannot be reached, the matter shall be decided by the Court.

In case of divorce by judgment of the Court, the Court trying the divorce case shall also order that the parental power over each of the children belongs to any party. If, in such trial, it is deemed proper to deprive that spouse of the parental power under Section 1582, the Court may give an order depriving that spouse of the same and appointing a third person as a guardian, by taking into consideration the happiness and interest of the child.

Section 1521. Happiness and Interest of the Child

If it appears that the person exercising parental power of the guardian under Section 1520 behaves himself or herself improperly or there is a change of circumstances after the appointment, the Court has the power to give an order appointing a new guardian by taking into consideration the happiness and interest of the child.

Section 1522. Child Support

In case of divorce by mutual consent, an arrangement shall be made and contained in the agreement of divorce as to who, both of the spouses or either spouse, will contribute to the maintenance of the children and how much is the contribution.

In case of divorce by judgment of the Court or in case the agreement of divorce contains no provisions concerning the maintenance of the children, the Court shall determine it.

Section 1523. Spousal Compensation

In case of divorce by judgment of the Court on the ground as provided in Section 1516 (1), the husband or wife is entitled to compensation from the husband or wife and other woman or adulterer, as the case may be.

The husband is entitled to claim compensation from any person who has wrongfully taken liberties with his wife in an adulterous manner, and the wife is entitled to claim compensation from other woman who has openly shown her adulterous relations with the former’s husband. However, the husband or wife is not entitled to claim compensation if he or she has consented to or connived at the act done by other party under Section 1516 (1) or allowed other person to act as provided in paragraph two.

Section 1524. Fault with Intention

If the ground of action for divorce under Section 1516 (3), (4) or (6) has arisen through an act of the party at fault with the intention to make the other party so intolerable that action for divorce has to be entered, the other party is entitled to compensation from the party at fault.

Section 1525. Determining Compensation

The compensation under Section 1523 and Section 1524 shall be decided by the Court according to the circumstances, and the Court may give an order for a single payment thereof or payment in installments as may be deemed suitable by the Court.

In case where the person who has to make the Compensation is a spouse of the other party, the share of the property received by the former from the liquidation of the Sin Somros on account of divorce shall also be taken into consideration.

Section 1526. Considering the Ability to Pay by One Party

In a case of divorce, if the ground for divorce has derived from the guilt of only one party, and the divorce will make the other become destitute deriving insufficient income out of his or her property or business which used to be carried on during the marriage, the latter is entitled to apply for the living allowances to be paid by the party at fault. The Court may decide whether the living allowances be granted or not by taking the ability of the grantor and the condition in life of the receiver into consideration, and the provisions of Section 1598/39, Section 1598/40 and Section 1598/41 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

The right to claim the living allowances is extinguished if it is not raised in the plaint or counter-claim in the action for divorce.

Section 1527. Support of Insane or Diseased Spouse

If a divorce is effected on the ground of insanity under Section 1516 (7) or on the ground of suffering from a communicable and dangerous disease under Section 1516 (9), the other spouse shall furnish living allowances to the spouse who is insane or is suffering from the disease, according to Section 1526, mutatis mutandis.

Section 1528. Remarriage of Supported Spouse

If the party receiving living allowances remarries, the right to receive living allowances is extinguished.

Section 1529. Statute of Limitations for Certain Grounds of Divorce

Rights of action based upon any of the grounds provided in Section 1516 (1) Adultery, (2) Misconduct, (3) Physical Abuse or (6) Support, or Section 1523 are extinguished after one year when the fact which can be alleged by the claimant has been known or should have been known to him or her.

Grounds upon which a claim for divorce can no longer be based may still be proved in support of another claim for divorce based upon other grounds.

Section 1530. Temporary Provisional Orders

Where an action for divorce is pending, the Court may, on application of either party, make any provisional order which it thinks proper such as those concerning the Sin Somros, the lodging, the maintenance of the spouses and the custody and maintenance of children.

Section 1531. Finalize time for Divorce

In case where a marriage has been registered according to law, divorce by mutual consent takes effect from the time of registration.

Divorce by judgment of the Court takes effect on and from the time when the judgment becomes final; however, such judgment may not be set up to the prejudice to the rights of third persons acting in good faith unless the divorce has been registered.

Section 1532. Liquidation

After divorce, the property of the husband and wife shall be subject to liquidation.

But as between the spouses,

  1. in case of divorce by mutual consent, the liquidation shall apply to the property of the husband and wife as it was on the date of registration of divorce;
  2. in case of divorce by judgment, the liquidation shall apply to the property of the husband and wife as it was on the day when the action for divorce was entered in Court.

Section 1533. Division of Marital Property

Upon divorce, the Sin Somros shall be divided equally between man and woman.

Section 1534. Compensation for Misuse of Marital Property

Where either spouse has made disposal of the Sin Somros for his or her exclusive benefit, or has made disposal thereof with an intention to cause injury to the other, or has made disposal thereof without the consent of the other in the case where such disposal is required by law to have consent of the other, or has wilfully destroyed it, it shall, for the purpose of division of the Sin Somros under Section 1533, be regarded as if such property had still remained. If the share of the Sin Somros that the other will receive is not complete to what he or she should have received, the party at fault is required to make up for the arrears from his or her share of the Sin Somros or his or her Sin Suan Tua.

Section 1535. Division of Debts

Upon termination of the marriage, the man and woman shall be liable for common debts equally.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

FAMILY
TITLE II
PARENT AND CHILD

Part 1: Parentage

Section 1536. Husband Presumed to be Father

A child born of a woman during wedlock or within three hundred and ten days after the termination of the marriage is presumed to be the legitimate child of the husband or the man which used to be the husband, as the case may be.

The provisions of paragraph one shall apply to a child born of a woman before the marriage has been announced void by the final judgment of the Court, or within three hundred and ten days as from the date of such final judgment.

Section 1537. New Husband presumed to be the father

In case where the woman had made the new marriage and gave birth to a child within three hundred and ten days as from the day of termination of the marriage, the child shall be presumed to be the legitimate child of the new husband, and no presumption under Section 1536 saying that the child is the legitimate child of the former husband shall apply; provided that there is a judgment pronouncing that the child is not the legitimate child of the new husband.

Section 1538. Dates for Presumption of Fatherhood

In case where the man or woman had made the marriage against Section 1452, a child born during such marriage shall be presumed to be the legitimate child of the husband who has last marriage entered into the Marriage Register.

In case where the woman had made the marriage against Section 1452, the presumption in Section 1536 shall apply; provided that there is a final judgment pronouncing that the child is not legitimate child of the husband who has the last marriage entered into the Marriage Register.

The provisions of paragraph one shall apply to the child born within three hundred and ten days from the date of the final judgment pronouncing the void of the marriage made against Section 1452.

Section 1539. Joint Repudiation of Fatherhood

In case where the child is presumed to be the legitimate child of the husband or the man who used to be the husband under Section 1536, Section 1537 or Section 1537 or Section 1537 or Section 1538, the husband or the man who used to be the husband may repudiate the child by entering an action in Court against the child and the mother jointly, and providing that he did not cohabit with the mother of the child during the period of conception, that is to say, the period extending from the one hundred and eightieth day to the three hundred and ten day inclusive, prior to the birth of the child, or that he could not have been the father of the child on other grounds of impossibility.

The action may be brought against only the child if at the time of entering the action the mother of the child is not alive. Where the child is not alive irrespective of whether the mother of the child is alive or not, the Court may be requested to declare that the child is not his legitimate child. In case where the mother of the child or the heir of the child is still alive, the Court shall send a copy of the request to the said person and may, if it thinks proper, send also a copy of the request to the Public Prosecutor for consideration of proceeding the case on behalf of the child.

Section 1540. (Repealed)

Section 1541. Husband cannot repudiate fatherhood once he enters his name on Birth Register

An action for repudiation of a child cannot be entered by the husband or the man used to be the husband if it appears that the latter causes to have the birth of the child entered in the Birth Register as his legitimate child or arranges or agrees to have it entered in the Birth Register.

Section 1542. No Action for Repudiation after the Child is 10 years old

An action for repudiation of a child shall be entered by the man who is or used to be the husband within one year after the birth of the child. In any case no such action can be entered later than ten years after the birth of the child.

In case where there is a judgment pronouncing that the child is not the legitimate child of the new husband under Section 1537 or of the husband in the last marriage under Section 1538, if the husband of the man who used to be the husband and is presumed by Section 1536 to be the father of the child, he shall enter the action within one year since the final judgment became known to him.

Section 1543. Man’s Death During Process of Repudiation

In case where the man being or used to be the husband who has entered an action for repudiation of the child, died before the case becoming final, a person who has the right of inheritance together with the child or a person whose right of inheritance would be deprived on account of the birth of the child, may file a motion to substitute himself or may be summoned to substitute for the deceased.

Section 1544. Inheritance and Repudiation of Parenthood

An action for repudiation of a child can be entered by a person who has the right of inheritance together with the child or by a person whose right of inheritance would be deprived on account of the birth of the child in the following cases:

  1. the man who is or used to be the husband died before the expiration of the period within which the action could have been entered by him;
  2. the child was born after the death of the man who is or used to be the husband. The action for repudiation of the child under (1) must be entered within six months since the death of the man being or having ever been the husband becoming known to that person. In any case no such action can be entered later than ten years after the birth of the child.

The provisions of Section 1539 shall apply to the entering of an action for repudiation of the child, mutatis mutandis.

Section 1545. Child’s Action to Repudiate Parenthood

A child may request the Public Prosecutor to enter an action under Section 1536 for repudiation to be legitimate child of the husband of his or her mother if it becomes known to the child that he or she is not an inherited child of the husband of the mother.

In entering the action under paragraph one, if it becomes known to the child before he or she becoming sui juris that he or she is not the legitimate child of the husband of his or her mother, no action can be entered by the Public Prosecutor after one year as from the date of his or her becoming sui juris. If it becomes known to the child after his or her becoming sui juris, no action can be entered by the Public Prosecutor later than one year since the day when the facts come to his or her knowledge.

Section 1546. Presumption that the Woman Giving Birth is the Mother

A child born of a woman who is not married to a man is deemed to be the legitimate child of such woman.

Section 1547. Unmarried Parents

A child born of the parents who are not married to each other is legitimate by the subsequent marriage of the parents, or by the registration made on application by the father, or by a judgment of the Court.

Section 1548. Legitimation by Unmarried Father

When legitimation is applied for by the father, the child and the mother must give consent to the applicant.

In case where the child and the mother do not appear before the Registrar for giving the consent, the Registrar shall notify the child and the mother of the father’s application for registration. If the child or the mother raises no objection or does not give the consent within sixty days after the acceptance of the notification by the child or mother, it is presumed that the child or the mother does not give consent. The period of time shall be extended to one hundred and eighty days in case where the child or the mother has been outside Thailand.

In case where the child or the mother raises an objection that the applicant is not the father, or does not give the consent, or is unable to give the consent, the registration for legitimation must be effected by a judgment of the Court.

After the Court had pronounced a judgment effecting the registration of the legitimation and the judgment has been produced to the registrar for registration, the Registrar shall effect the registration.

Section 1549. Notification of Court Application for Legitimation

When the registrar has notified the child and the mother of the application of legitimation under Section 1548, notwithstanding whether the child and the mother will object to the application under Section 1548 or not, the child or the mother may, within a period of not more than ninety days since the notification reached the child or mother, notify the Registrar to make a record that the applicant is not a suitable person for exercising partly or wholly the parental power.

Although the registration of legitimation under Section 1548 had been made, if there has been a notification of the child and the mother under paragraph one, the child’s father will not be able to exercise partly or wholly such parental power as had been notified by the child or the mother until the court will pronounce a judgment effecting the child’s father to exercise partly or wholly the parental power, or a period of ninety days had elapsed since the registrar was notified by the Child or the mother of the unsuitability on the party of the applicant for registration of legitimation to be the person unsuitable for exercising a part of the whole of the parental power.

In case the court pronounces a judgment that the applicant for registration of legitimation is not the suitable person for exercising a part or the whole of the parental power or be the guardian.

Section 1550. (Repealed)

Section 1551. Objection to the Application for Legitimation

In case where there is an objection to the applicant for registration of legitimation on account of not being the child’s father, if the applicant for registration of legitimation has brought an action to the court for a judgment effecting him to be the child’s father. The child or mother may apply to the court in the same case for an order to the effect that the applicant for registration of legitimation is not a suitable person for exercising a part or the whole of the parental power even though he is the real father of the child. In such case, the provisions of paragraph three of Section 1599 shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

Section 1552. If not mother, court can appoint guardian

In case the child has no mother or has mother but the latter has been deprived partly or wholly of her parental power and the other person has been appointed by the Court to be guardian partly or wholly before the registration of legitimation.

The father who causes the registration of legitimation having been entered may, if he thinks that for the benefit of the child, he should be the person exercising the parental power partly or wholly, apply to the court for an order effecting the deprivation of a part of the whole of guardianship from the guardian opinion of the court, exercise the parental power for bring about more happiness and interest to the child. The court may give an order effecting the deprivation of a part or the whole of guardianship from the guardian and making the father to be the person exercising the parental power.

Section 1553. (Repealed)

Section 1554. Within 3 months, can file for Cancelation of Legitimation

Any interested person may, within three months from the time when the registration of legitimation comes to his knowledge, apply to the court for cancellation of the registration on the ground that the person at whose instance the legitimation has been registered is not the father of the child. In any case, no such action may be entered after the lapse of ten years since the date of registration.

Section 1555. An action for legitimation may be entered only in the following cases:

  1. Where there is a rape, abduction or illegal confinement of the mother during the period when conception could have taken place;
  2. Where there has been elopement or seduction of the mother during the period where conception could have been taken place;
  3. Where there is a document emanation from the father and acknowledging the child as his own;
  4. Where it appears in the birth register that the child is a son or daughter of the man who notified of the birth, or such notification was made with the knowledge of the man;
  5. Where there has been open cohabitation of the father and the mother during the period where conception could have been taken place;
  6. Where the father had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period when conception could have been taken, and there are grounds to believe that he or she is not the child of another man;
  7. Where there has been a continuous common repute of being a legitimate child. There status resulting from continuous common repute of being a legitimate child is established by means of facts showing the relationship of father and child, as evidenced by the child’s connection with the family to which he claims to belong, such as the fact that the father has provided the child’s education or maintenance, or that he has allowed the child to use his family name or other facts.

In any case, if the man is found unable to be a father, the case shall be dismissed.

Section 1556. Action for Legitimation by Representative of the Child under 15

The action for legitimation may be brought by the legal representative of the child if the child is a minor of not yet completed his fifteenth years of age. In case there is no legal representative or the legal representative cannot perform his duties, a closed relative or the public prosecutor may apply to the court for appointing a representative ad litem to bring the action on behalf of the child.

After attaining the age of fifteenth years old complete, the child has to bring the action himself and need not obtain consent of the legal representative.

After attaining the age of sui juris, the action has to be entered within one year from the day of becoming sui juris.

In case the child is dead during the time has right to bring an action for legitimation, his descendant may enter an action for legitimation. Should the descendant know the ground of the action for legitimation before the death of the child, the action would have to be entered by the former within one year from the death of the child should the ground of the action for legitimation become known to the descendant after the death of the child. However, the action would have to be entered within one year as from the day; the said ground came to his knowledge; provided that is cannot be entered after ten years have elapsed since the death of the child.

The provision of paragraph one and paragraph two shall apply to the action of legitimation entered by the minor descendant mutatis mutandis.

Section 1557. Legitimation under Section 1547 shall take effect:

  1. From the day of marriage in case of subsequent marriage of the parents;
  2. From the day of registration in case where the registration of legitimation is made by the father;
  3. From the day of final judgment in case of legitimation pronounced by the court, provided that it may be set up to the prejudice of the rights of third persons acting in good faith, unless it has been registered according to the judgment.

Section 1558. Legitimation of the Deceased

As regards the action for legitimation of the deceased having been entered within the period of prescription for claim for inheritance, if the court adjudges the child to be legitimate he is entitled to inheritance as a statutory heir. In case where the estate has been divided the provisions of this Code concerning Undue Enrichment shall be applied mutatis mutandis.

Section 1559. Legitimation cannot be revoked after registration

After registration of legitimation has been made, it cannot be revoked.

Section 1560. Child of the Marriage is Legitimate

The child born during marriage is deemed to be legitimate, even though the marriage has been subsequently cancelled.

(top)

Chapter 2: Rights and Duties of Parent and Child

Section 1561. Family Name

A child has the right to use the family name of the father. In case the father is unknown, a child has the right to use the family name of the mother.

Section 1562. Lawsuit Against Ascendants

No person can enter an action, either civil or criminal, against his ascendants, unless the case is taken up by the Public Prosecutor upon application of such person or a close relative of such person.

Section 1563. Children have to support Parents

Children are bound to maintain their parents.

Section 1564. Parents have to support Children

Parents are bound to maintain their children and to provide proper education for them during their minority.

When the children are sui juris, parents are bound to maintain them only when they are infirm and unable to earn their living.

Section 1565. Maintenance of the Children

As regards the applications for maintenance of the children or for any other form of maintenances to be given to children, it may be taken up by the father or the mother except the case to be taken up by the Public Prosecutor according to Section 1562.

Section 1566. Unless Sui Juris, Child is Subject to Parental Control

A child is subject to parental power as long as he is not sui juris.

The parental power is exercised by the father or the mother in any of the following cases:

  1. the mother or the father is dead;
  2. It is uncertain whether the mother or the father is living or dead;
  3. the mother or the father has been adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent;
  4. the mother or the father is placed in a hospital by reason of mental infirmity;
  5. the parental power has been granted to the mother or the father by an order of the court;
  6. the mother or the father have come to such agreement as provided by the law that it can be made.

Section 1567. Rights of Parental Control

A person exercising parental power (natural guardian) has the right:

  1. to determine the child’s place of residence;
  2. to punish the child in a reasonable manner for disciplinary purposes;
  3. to require the child to do such work as may be reasonable to his ability and condition in life;
  4. to demand the return of the child from any person who unlawfully detains him.

Section 1568. Step Parents

Where a person who already has a child marries another person the parental power over such child is exercised by the former person.

Section 1569. Custodian of incompetent Child

A person exercising parental power is the legal representative of the child. If the child is adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent, the person exercising parental power shall be the custodian or curator, as the case may be.

Section 1569/1. Temporary Revocation of Parental Power

In case where the minor has been adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent and other person who is not the one exercising the parental power or the guardian has been appointed as the guardian by the order of the Court, such order shall effect the revocation of the person exercising the parental power or guardian, at the moment.

In case where the person being sui juris and having no spouse has been adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent, the parents or the father or the mother shall be the guardian or curator, as the case may be, unless the Court shall order otherwise.

Section 1570. Legal Notice to Children

Notifications made by or to the person exercising parental power according to Section 1566 or Section 1568 are deemed to notifications made by or to the child.

Section 1571. Management of Property

Parental power includes the management of the property of the child and such management shall be exercised with the same care as that of a person of ordinary prudence.

Section 1572. Obligations attributed to the child is not allowed

A person exercising parental power cannot, without the consent of the child, create an obligation the subject of which is personal to the child.

Section 1573. Income of the Child

If the child has an income, it shall in the first place be used for his maintenance and education; any residue thereof shall be kept by the person exercising parental power and be returned to the child. But, if the person exercising parental power has no income sufficient for living to his condition in life, that income may be expended in a reasonable measure by the person exercising parental power, unless it is an income derived from gift or legacy subject to the condition that it shall not be for the benefit of the person exercising parental power.

Section 1574. Property of a Minor

A person exercising parental power cannot enter into any of the following juristic acts with regard to the property of the minor except with permission of the Court:

  1. selling, exchanging, sale with right of redemption, letting out property on hire-purchase, mortgaging, releasing mortgage to mortgagor or transferring the right of mortgage on immovable property or on mortgageable movable property;
  2. extinguishing the whole or a part of real right of the minor on immovable property;
  3. creating servitude, right of inhabitation, right of superficies, usufruct or any charge on immovable property;
  4. disposing of the whole or a part of the claim the purpose of which is to create real right on immovable property or on mortgageable property, or the claim the purpose of which is to have a real right on such property of the minor relieved;
  5. letting immovable property for more than three years;
  6. creating any commitments the purpose of which is to achieve the objective as provided in (1), (2) and (3);
  7. making a loan of money;
  8. making a gift, except out of the income of the minor on the minor’s behalf for charitable, social or moral purposes, and suitable to the minor’s condition in life;
  9. accepting a gift subject to any condition or charge, or refusing a gift;
  10. giving guarantee by any means whatsoever which may cause the minor to be compelled to perform an obligation or to enter into other juristic act, as requiring the minor to perform an obligation to other person or on behalf of other person;
  11. making benefit out of the property other than those provided in Section 1598/4 (1), (2) or (3) making a compromise;
  12. submitting a dispute to arbitration.

Section 1575. Conflict between Guardian and the Child

Where in regard to any act, the interests of a person exercising parental power or the interests of a spouse or children of a person exercising parental power conflict with those of the minor, the former must obtain the permission of the court in order to perform such act, failing such act shall be void.

Section 1576. Parental Interests

The interests of a person exercising parental power or the interests of a spouse or children of a person exercising parental power in Section 1575 shall include interest in the following businesses:

  1. Interests in the business that the said person performs with an ordinary partnership of which that person is a partner.
  2. Interests in the business that the said person performs with a limited partnership of which that person is a partner with unlimited liability.

Section 1577. Trustee

A person may transfer by legacy or gift a property to a minor, subject to its being managed, up to the time of majority, by a person other than the person exercising parental power.

Such manager must be named by the transferor, in default, or by court and his management shall be subjected to Section 56, Section 57 and Section 60.

Section 1578. Majority

When parental power ceases as the minor is sui juris, the person who exercised parental power must hand over to the child for certification, without delay, the property so managed and render to him a written account thereof, and if there is any document relating thereto, it shall be handed over at the same time as the account.

If the parental power ceases other than those mentioned in paragraph one, the property, account and document relating to management of the property shall be handed over to the person exercising parental power, if any, or to the guardian, as the case may be, for certification.

Section 1579. Property of a Dead Parent

In case where one spouse is dead and the other who has a child born within wedlock intends to make a new marriage, if the latter has possessed the property properly separated for the child, the property may be handed over to the child when the child can manage it, or the property may be kept and handed over to the child at the proper time. If it is the property specified in Section 456 or has a documentary title, the child’s name shall be entered in the document as the co-owner, and that the marriage cannot take place unless the aforesaid management has been completed.

If the is reasonable ground, the Court may give an order allowing the said spouse to make the marriage first. But the Court must specify in the order that the spouse must complete the separation or the property and a making of an inventory as provided in paragraph one within a specified period of time after the marriage.

In case the marriage is made in contravention of paragraph one, or in case the spouse does not comply with the order of the Court given under paragraph two, the Court may on its knowledge of the fact or on application of the minor’s relative or of the Public Prosecutor, give an order depriving the spouse of the parental power or directing any person to make the inventory and to have the child’s name entered as co-owner in the said document instead, and any expenses incurred thereby shall be borne by the spouse.

For the purpose of this Section, the adopted of the deceased spouse and of the living spouse shall be deemed to be a child borne of the spouse.

Section 1580. Accounting of Property

The minor having been sui juris, the person exercising the parental right or the guardian can make a certificate to the management of the minor’s property after the property, account and documents as provided in Section 1587 have been obtained.

Section 1581. Statute of Limitations for Action for Improper Management

An action relating to the management of property between the minor and the person exercising parental power cannot be entered later than one year from the time of the cessation of the right of management.

If the parental power ceases while the child is a minor, the period mentioned in paragraph one is computed from the time when the child becomes sui juris or has a new legal representative.

Section 1582. Incompetency of Guardian

When the person exercising parental power is adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent, or abuses his or her parental power as regards the child’s person, or is guilty of gross misconduct, the Court may, of its own motion or on the application of a close relative of the child or of the Public Prosecutor, order the deprivation of the parental power either partly or wholly.

If the person exercising parental power is bankrupt or likely to endanger the minor’s property by mismanagement, the Court may, upon the same proceedings as mentioned in the paragraph one, order the deprivation of the right of management.

Section 1583. Cessation of Incompetency

If the causes mentioned in the forgoing Section have ceased to exist, a person who has been partly or wholly deprived of parental power may recover it by permission of the Court on application made by him or by a relative of the minor.

Section 1584. Deprived of Parental Power must still provide support to child

A person who has been deprived partly or wholly of parental power is not thereby relieved from the duty to furnish maintenance to the minor according to law.

Section 1584/1. Parental Visitation and Contact

The father or mother would be entitled to contact his or her child, as may be suitable to the circumstances, irrespective of whether who is the person exercising the parental power or the guardian.

(top)

Chapter 3: Guardianship

Section 1585. Guardianship

A person who is not sui juris and has no parents, or whose parents are deprived of their parental power, may be provided with a guardian during minority.

In case where the person exercising the parental power has been deprived of a part of the parental power under paragraph one of Section 1582, the Court may appoint a guardian to exercise the part of the parental power, or may, in case of the deprivation of the right of management from the person exercising the parental power having been effected under paragraph two of Section 1582, appoint the guardian for management of the property.

Section 1586. Appointment of Guardian by the Court

The guardian under Section 1585 shall be appointed by the order of the Court on application of a relative of the minor, the Public Prosecutor or of the person whose name has been specified in the will by the last surviving parent.

Subject to Section 1590, the Court shall, in case there is a testamentary disposition on the appointment of a guardian, appoint the guardian accordingly unless the will is not effective or the person specified in the will is prohibited to be guardian under Section 1587.

Section 1587. Who cannot be appointed a Guardian

Any person sui juris may be appointed a guardian, except the following:

  1. person adjudged incompetent or quasi incompetent;
  2. person who is bankrupt;
  3. person who is unfit to take charge of the person or property of the minor;
  4. person having or having had a lawsuit against the minor, ascendants or brothers and sisters of full blood or brothers and sisters of half-blood of the minor;
  5. person having been excluded by name in writing from guardianship by the deceased parent.

Section 1588. Revocation of Guardianship

If it appears that the person appointed as the guardian by the Court is at the time of appointment a prohibited person under Section 1587, the Court shall, upon the Court’s own knowledge or on application of an interested person or of the Public Prosecutor, revoke the order of appointment of that person and shall give such order concerning the guardian as the Court thinks fit.

The revocation of the order of appointment of the guardian under paragraph one does not affect the right of the third person acting in good faith unless in the case of revocation of the order of appointment the prohibited person under Section 1587(1) or (2), the act done by the guardian are not binding the minor whether the third person acted in good faith or not.

Section 1589. (Repealed)

Section 1590. Only one Guardian at a time

There can be only one guardian at the time; however, in case where there is a testamentary deposition directing that several guardians be appointed or there is an application by the person with proper reasons, several guardians may be appointed as the Court considers necessary. In case several guardians are appointed, the Court may order the guardians to act either jointly or in accordance with the power specially conferred upon each of them.

Section 1591. Beginning of Guardianship

The status of guardian commences from the day when the notification of his appointment by the Court is known to him.

Section 1592. Inventory of Ward’s Property

The guardian must without delay make an inventory of the ward’s property within three months from the date when the appointment by the Court is known to him, but this period of time may be extended on application made by the guardian to the Court before the expiration of the three months.

The inventory shall be made in presence of at least two witnesses who must be sui juris and be relatives of the ward, but if no relative can be found, other persons may be witnesses thereto.

Section 1593. Submission of Inventory to the Court

Within ten days after the completion of the inventory, the guardian shall submit one certified copy thereof to the Court, and the Court may require him to give supplementary information or to produce documents in order to show that the inventory is correct.

If the Court does not give an order otherwise within fifteen days after delivery of the inventory or the day of producing of supplementary information or documents, as the case may be, the inventory is deemed acceptable by the Court.

Section 1594. Noncompliance with Inventory Requirement

If the guardian does not comply with the provisions concerning the making of the inventory or the submission of a complete and correct inventory as described in Section 1592 or Section 1593, or does not comply with the order of the Court given under Section 1593, or the Court is dissatisfied with such inventory on the grounds of gross negligence, dishonesty or obvious inefficiency of the guardian, the Court may discharge the guardian.

Section 1595. Only Urgent Necessary Acts until Inventory Completed

Before the inventory has been Section 1595. Before the inventory has been accepted by the Court, a guardian may do nothing but urgent necessary acts, but such acts cannot be set up against third persons acting in good faith and for value.

Section 1596. Conflict of Interests between Guardian and Ward

If an obligation exists in favor of the guardian against the ward or in favor of the ward against the guardian, the guardian must give notice thereof to the Court before commencing the inventory.

If the guardian knows that an obligation exists in his favor against the ward and does not give notice thereof to the Court, such obligation is extinguished.

If the guardian knows that an obligation exists against him in favor of the ward and does not give notice thereof to the Court, the Court may discharge him.

Section 1597. Court Request to Review Ward’s Property

The Court may, of its own motion or on application of any interested person or of the Public Prosecutor, order a guardian

  1. To furnish proper security for the management as well as for the return of the ward’s property
  2. To give information as to the condition of the ward’s property.

Section 1598. Ward acquires valuable property

Where, during the guardianship the ward acquires a valuable property by succession or gift, Section 1592 to Section 1597 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1598/1. Annual Accounting

The guardian shall render account to the Court concerning the property once a year as from the day when he becomes guardian. However, the Court may, after the account of the first year has been rendered, order that the account be rendered at a longer interval than one year.

Section 1598/2. Guardian has same rights and duties as parents

The guardian has the same rights and duties as a person exercising parental power as provided in Section 1564 paragraph one and Section 1567.

Section 1598/3. Guardian is the Legal Representative of the Ward

A guardian is the legal representative of the ward, Section 1570, Section 1571, Section 1572, Section 1574, Section 1575, Section 1576 and 1577 shall apply to the guardian and ward mutatis mutandis.

Section 1598/4. Use of Ward’s Income for Maintenance and Education

A guardian may dispose only of such part of the income of the ward as is necessary for the maintenance and education of the latter. The residue shall be invested only:

  1. in bonds issued by the Thai Government or in bonds guaranteed by the Thai Government;
  2. in taking sale with the right of redemption or in mortgage of immovable property of first rank, the amount of which must not exceed half of the market value of such property;
  3. in fixed deposit in a bank established by law or authorized to carry in business in the Kingdom;
  4. in any other investment which may specially authorized by the Court.

Section 1598/5. After Ward is 15 years old, Guardian must consult with Ward

After the ward has reached discretion and his age is not less than fifteen years complete, the guardian must, in all important transactions, consult him first, so far as it is possible to do so. The fact that the ward has give consent does not exonerate the guardian from liability.

Section 1598/6. Termination of Guardianship by Death of Ward or Sui Juris

Guardianship is terminated by death of the ward or by the ward becoming sui juris.

Section 1598/7. Guardian Terminated

The functions of the guardian are terminated when the guardian

  1. is death
  2. resigns by permission of the Court
  3. becomes incompetent or quasi incompetent
  4. becomes bankrupt
  5. is revoked by the order of the Court.

1598/ 8. Court Discharge of Guardian

The guardian shall be discharged by the Court on the following grounds:

  1. The guardian fails to perform his duties.
  2. The guardian is guilty of gross negligence in performing his duties.
  3. The guardian abuses his functions.
  4. The guardian is guilty of such misconduct as to make unworthy of the post.
  5. The guardian is so inefficient in his duties that the ward’s interest is likely to be imperiled.
  6. There as an occurrence as provided in Sections 1587 (3), (4) or (5).

Section 1598/9. Application by Discharge by Ward or Ward’s Relative

An application for discharge of a guardian under Section 1598/8 may be made by the ward himself if his age is not less than fifteen years complete or by a relative of the ward or by the Public Prosecutor.

Section 1598/10. Temporary Guardian during Court Proceedings

When an application for the discharge of a guardian is pending in Court, the Court may appoint in his stead a temporary manager of the property of the ward.

Section 1598/11. After Termination, transfer of property

When the guardian or the functions of the guardian are terminated, the guardian or his heir must without delay hand over to the ward, his heir or the new guardian the property managed; and, within six months, he must render an account of management, and if there is any document relating thereto, it shall be handed over at the same time as the account, but this period of time may be extended by the Court on application of the guardian or his heir.

Section 1580 and Section 1581 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1598/12. Interest on the property

Interest shall be paid on the amount of money which either the guardian or the ward has to repay to the other, from the time when the account of guardianship is delivered.

If the guardian has disposed of the ward’s money otherwise that for the benefit of the latter, he shall pay interest thereon from the day when he disposed of such money.

Section 1598/13. Ward’s Rights over the Guardian’s Property

The ward has preferential right over the whole property of the guardian for the performance of the obligation due to him.

This preferential right shall rank as (6) after the other general preferential rights specified in Section 253 of this Code.

Section 1598/14. Guardian Is Not Entitled To Receive Remuneration, Except in the following cases:

  1. it is provided in the will that the guardian is entitled to the remuneration, in which case the guardian shall receive the remuneration at such amount as provided in the will;
  2. in case no remuneration is provided in the will, but there is no restriction as to the guardian to receive the remuneration, the guardian may apply subsequently to the Court for determining the remuneration, and the Court may or may not determine it;
  3. in case no appointment of the guardian is provided in the will and there is no restriction as to the guardian to receive the remuneration, the remuneration of the guardian may be determined by the Court in the order appointing the guardian, or, if not being determined, the guardian may apply subsequently to the Court for having it determined, and the Court may or may not determine it.

In determining the remuneration, the Court shall take the circumstances, income and condition of life of the guardian in consideration.

If the guardian or the ward can prove that the circumstances, income or condition in life of the guardian or of the ward has changed after the commencement of the guardianship, the Court may give an order effecting the payment, suspension, reduction, increase or recovery of payment of the remuneration, as the case may be; and, this shall also apply to the case where there are provisions in the will restricting the guardian to receive remuneration.

Section 1598/15. Guardianship over Spouse

If the Court adjudges the husband or wife incompetent and makes the wife or the husband guardian, the provisions concerning the right and duty of the person exercising parental power shall apply mutatis mutandis, except the right under Section 1567 (2) and (3).

Section 1598/16. Management of the Spouse’s Personal Property

The spouse who is the guardian of the other spouse having been adjudged incompetent by the Court has the power to manage the Sin Suan Tua (personal property) of the latter and has the power to manage solely Sin Somros (common marital property). But management of Sin Suan Tua และ Sin Somros as specified in paragraph one of Section 1476 cannot be made by that spouse except with the permission of the Court.

Section 1598/17. Adult Parent Guardian if Spouse is deemed unfit to be Guardian

Where the husband or wife has been adjudged incompetent and the other spouse has been considered not proper to be the custodian and whereby his or her father or mother or an outsider had to be appointed the custodian, the custodian shall, in this case, be a joint manager of the Sin Somros with the other spouse, but the Court may order otherwise, if there are vital circumstances with may endanger the incapacitated person.

However, the other spouse has the right to apply to the Court for an order dividing the Sin Somros if there exists circumstances as provided in paragraph one.

Section 1598/18. Child becomes Sui Juris

In case where the parents are the guardian of the child who is not sui juris the provisions concerning power and duties of the person exercising parental power shall apply mutatis mutandis. But, if the child become sui juris, the provisions concerning power and duties of the guardian shall apply mutatis mutandis, except the right under Section 1567 (2) and (3).

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 4: Adoption

Section 1598/19. Qualifications to Adopt

A person who is not less than twenty five years old may adopt another, provided he is at least fifteen years older than the adopted person.

Section 1598/20. Adoption of Someone over 15 years old

If the person to be adopted is not less than fifteen years of age, the adoption can take place only with the consent of the adopted person.

Section 1598/21. Adoption of a Minor

If the person to be adopted is the minor, the adoption can take place only with the consent of his parents, but if one of his parents died or has been deprived of his or her parental powers, consent thereto has to be given by his father or mother who has parental power.

If there is no person to give consent under paragraph one or the father or mother, or parents cannot express his or her consent thereto or refuses to give his or her consent, and the refusal has been made unreasonably and has adversely affected the health, progress and welfare of the minor, the mother or father, the person intending to be the adopter or the Public Prosecutor may apply to the Court for an order allowing the adoption in lieu of giving consent thereto under paragraph one.

Section 1598/22. Abandoned Adoptee

In case the minor to be adopted has been deserted and been under supervision of an institution for child welfare under the law on child welfare and protection, the institution shall give consent on behalf of his parents. If the institution refuses to give such consent, the provisions of paragraph two of Section 1598/21 shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

Section 1598/23. Institutionalized Adoptee

In case the minor to be adopted has not been deserted but has been under supervision of an institution for child welfare under the law on child welfare and protection, the parents or one of the parents, in case the other died or whose parental power has been deprived, may make a letter of power entrusting the said institution to give consent to the adoption, and the provisions of Section 1598/22 shall apply, mutatis mutandis.

The letter of power under paragraph one cannot be revoked as long as the minor is supported and maintained by that institution.

Section 1598/24. Supervised Adoptee

The person who has the power to give consent to the adoption on behalf of the institution under Section 1598/22 or Section 1598/23 may adopt the minor being under supervision and support of the institution as his own adopted child if the Court has granted the application made by the said person in lieu of giving consent thereto by the institution.

Section 1598/25. Married Adoptee

A married person who is to adopt or is to be adopted, must obtain consent of his or her spouse. If his or her spouse cannot express the consent or has left the domicile or residence and no news of him has ever been received for not less than one year, the application for the Court’s permission in lieu of the consent by the spouse must be made.

Section 1598/26. Adopted Child Adoptee

A minor who is an adopted child of any person cannot concurrently be an adopted of another person except an adopted of the spouse of the adopter.

If one spouse will adopt the minor who has already been the adopted child of the other as his or her adopted child, the consent thereto must be obtained from the latter, and Section 1598/21 shall not apply.

Section 1598/27. Registration Required

Adoption is valid upon registration being effected according to law. If the person to be adopted is a minor, it has to comply firstly with the law on the adoption of the child.

Section 1598/28. Natural Parent Loses Rights After Adoptions

An adopted child acquires the status of a legitimate child of the adopter, but none of his rights and duties in the family to which he belongs by birth are prejudiced thereby. In such, the natural parent lose parental power, if any, from the time when the child is adopted.

The provisions of Title 2 of this book shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1598/29. Adopter does have a right to inherit Adoptee’s estate

Adoption does not creates to the adopter the right of a statutory heir to the inheritance of the adopted.

Section 1598/30. If Adoptee dies without a spouse or descendants

If the adopted dies without a spouse or descendant before the adopter, the adopter is entitled to claim from the estate of the adopted the properties which were given to the adopted by the adopter and which still exist in kind after the liquidation of the estate.

No action for claiming the right under paragraph one shall be entered later that one year as from the day when the adopter has known or ought to have known the death of the adopted, or later than ten years as from the death of the adopted.

Section 1598/31. After Adoptee become Sui Juris

If the adopted has become sui juris, the dissolution of adoption may be made at any time by mutual consent of the adopted.

If the adopted is not yet sui juris, the dissolution of adoption shall take place after the consent of the parents has been obtained, and Section 1598/20 and Section 1598/21 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

In case where the adoption has been effected under paragraph two of Section 1598/21, Section 1598/22, Section 1598/24 or paragraph two of Section 1598/26, if the adopted is not yet sui juris, the dissolution of adoption shall be effected only by the order of the Court upon application of an interested person or of the Public Prosecutor.

The dissolution is valid only upon registration being effected according to law.

Section 1598/32. Adoptions dissolved if in Contravention of Marriage Laws

The adoption will become dissolved if the marriage is made in contravention of Section 1451.

Section 1598/33. Action for Dissolution of Adoption:

  1. if one party is guilty of serious misconduct whether it be a criminal offence or not, which causes the other very much ashamed or being hated, or sustaining excessive injury or trouble, the latter may claim dissolution
  2. if one party has seriously insulted or held in serious contempt the other or his ascendants, the latter may claim dissolution, and if the said commission has been done against the spouse of the adopter by the adopted, the adopter may claim dissolution;
  3. if one party has committed any act of violence against the other, his ascendants or his spouse which causes grave danger to the body or mind and constitutes offence criminally punishable, the latter may claim dissolution;
  4. if one party does not maintain the other, the latter may claim dissolution;
  5. if one party has wilfully deserted the other for more than one year, the latter may claim dissolution;
  6. if one party has been sentenced to imprisonment exceeding three years, except an offence committed through negligence, the other may claim dissolution;
  7. if the adopter fails to comply with his parental duties and such failure constitutes a wrongful act or non-compliance with Section 1564, Section 1571, Section 1573, Section 1574 or Section 1575 which caused or would have caused serious injury to the adopted, the adopted may claim dissolution;
  8. if the adopter has been deprived partly or wholly of his parental power, and the grounds for such deprivation bears circumstantial evidence showing that the adopter is not the proper person to be adopter further, the adopted may claim dissolution;
  9. (Repealed)

Section 1598/34. Statute of Limitations for Dissolution Action

No action for dissolution of adoption shall be entered later than one year from the day when the claimant has known or ought to have known of the fact constituting the ground for dissolution, or later that ten years from the time of the occurrence of such fact.

Section 1598/35. Age of Adoptee for Dissolution

If the adopted is under fifteen years old, the action for dissolution of adoption shall be entered on his or her behalf by the inborn parents. As regards the adopted being more than fifteen years old, he or she can enter the action without having to obtain consent from any person.

The Public Prosecutor may, in case under paragraph one, enter the action on behalf of the adopted.

Section 1598/36. Time for Dissolution

Dissolution pronounced by the Court takes effect on and from the time when the judgment becomes final. However, it may not be set up to the prejudice of the rights of third persons acting in good faith unless it has been registered.

Section 1598/37. If dissolution or death of adopter before Sui Juris

Upon death of a child adopter or a dissolution of a child adoption, the natural parents shall, in the case of the adopted child not yet becoming sui juris, recover the parental power from the date of the death of the child adopter or from the date of the child adoption dissolution registration under Section 1598/1 or from the date on which the final judgment affecting such child adoption dissolution has been pronounced by the Court unless the Court has otherwise expediently decided.

In case where a guardian of an adopted child has been appointed prior to the death of a child adopter or prior to the child adoption dissolution, such guardian’s existing power and duties shall continue unless the child’s natural parents have otherwise petitioned the Court and that the Court has issued an order restoring the parental power upon such petitioners.

A change in the person exercising the parental power under paragraph one or the guardian under paragraph two above shall not prejudice the rights of the third person acquired in good faith prior to the child adoption registration dissolution.

The Public Prosecutor shall be the person empowered to submit a petition to the Court in order to have the Court issue an order otherwise in accordance with paragraph one above.

(top)

MARRIAGE
TITLE III
MAINTENANCE (ALIMONY)

Section 1598/38. Spousal and Child Maintenance

Maintenance may be claimed between husband and wife or parent and child when the party entitled to maintenance has not been furnished with the maintenance or has been furnished with the maintenance insufficient to his condition in life.

How much and to what extend the maintenance would be granted or not will be decided by the Court, by taking account of the ability of the person bound to furnish the maintenance, the condition in life of the receiver and the circumstances of the case.

Section 1598/39. Alternations to the Amount of Maintenance

When any interested person can show that there has been a change in circumstances or in the means or condition in life of the parties, the Court may make alteration of the maintenance by cancelling, reducing, increasing or re-establishing the amount of maintenance.

In case the Court gives an order not granting the maintenance only on account of one party not being in the position to furnish the maintenance at the moment, the Court may be requested to alter its order given in that case if the circumstances, means or conditions on life of the other have changed and the claimant, after having taken account of the circumstances, his means and condition in life, should be furnished with the maintenance.

Section 1598/40. Payment of Maintenance

Maintenance shall be furnished by periodical payments in money unless the parties agree to pay otherwise or in some other manners. However, in absence of such agreement and for special reason, the Court may, upon application of any party and it is deemed proper, determine the maintenance to be furnished otherwise or in some other manners and whether the payment to be made in money. In case of claim for maintenance of a child, if there are special reasons and deemed proper, the Court may determine the maintenance to be furnished by any means other than those agreed by the parties, or other than what has been applied for by any party such as to send the child to an educational or vocational institution and the expenses incurred thereby are to be borne by the person bound to furnish the maintenance.

Section 1598/41. Right to Maintenance cannot be renounced or transferred

The right to maintenance cannot be renounced, attached or transferred and is not subject to execution.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SUCCESSION
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Chapter 1: State Planning – Devolution of an Estate

Section 1599. Intestate

When a person dies, his estate devolves on the heirs.

An heir may lose his right to the succession only under the provisions of this Code or other laws.

Section 1600. Property, Rights, duties, and liabilities of the Deceased

Subject to the provisions of this Code, the estate of a deceased includes his properties of every kind, as well as his rights, duties and liabilities, except those which by law or by their nature are purely personal to him.

Section 1601. No liability from the Heirs on Debts of the Deceased

An heir shall not be liable in excess of the property devolving on him.

Section 1602. Death Provisions

When a person is deemed to have died under the provisions of Section 62* of this Code shall, the estate devolves on the heirs.

If it is proved that such person is living or that he died at a time different from that specified in the adjudication of disappearance, the provisions of Section 63* of this Code shall apply as regards his heirs.

Section 1603. Devolution by Right or Will

An estate devolves on the heirs by statutory right or by will.

Heirs who are so entitled by law are called ‘statutory heirs’.

Heirs who are entitled by will are called ‘legatees’.

[*Amended by section 15 Act Promulgating the Revised Provisions of Book I of the Civil and Commercial Code B.E. 2535]

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 2: Heirship

Section 1604. Right to be an Heir

A natural person can be an heir only when he has, at the time of the de cujes death, personality or is capable of rights under Section 15 of this Code.

For the purpose of this section, a child shall be deemed to have been en ventre sa mere at the time of such death if he is born or alive within three hundred and ten days after such time.

Section 1605. Fraud by an Heir

An heir who, fraudulently or with the knowledge that he prejudices any other heirs, diverts or conceal property up to or in excess of his share in the succession, shall be absolutely excluded from the succession; if he diverts or conceals less than his share in the succession, he shall be excluded from the succession up to the extent of the part so diverted or concealed.

This section does not apply to a legatee to whom a specific property has been bequeathed, in so far as his right to receive such property is concerned.

Section 1606. Excluded Heirs

The following are excluded from succession as being unworthy:

  1. the person who is convicted by a final judgment of having wrongfully and intentionally caused the death or attempted to cause the death of the de cujus or of a person having prior right to the succession;
  2. the person who, having prosecuted the de cujes for having committed an offence punishable with death, has himself been convicted by a final judgment for bringing a false charge or for fabricating false evidence.
  3. the person who, having knowledge that the de cujes was murdered, did not give information thereof for the purpose of bringing the offender to punishment; but this does not apply if he has not completed sixteen years of age, or if he is unsound mind so as to be unable to distinguish between right and wrong, or if the murderer is his spouse or any of his direct ascendants or descendants;
  4. the person who, by fraud or duress, has caused the de cujes to make, revoke or change partly or wholly a will concerning the estate or has prevented him from so doing;
  5. the person who, has partly or wholly forged, destroyed or concealed a will.

The de cujes may remove the exclusion due to unworthiness by a pardon in writing.

Section 1607. Effects of Exclusion are Personal

The effects of exclusion from the succession are personal. The descendants of the excluded heir succeed as if such heir were dead, not in regards to the devolved property, the excluded heir has no right of management and enjoyment as specified in Book V title II Chapter III of this Code. In such case Section 1548 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 3: Disinheritance

Section 1608. Disinheritance

A de cujus may disinherit any of his statutory heirs only by an express declaration of intention,

  1. by will
  2. by writing deposited with the competent official.

The identity of the disinherited heir must be clearly stated.

However, when a person has distributed all his estate by will, all his statutory heirs who are not beneficiaries under the will are deemed to be disinherited.

Section 1609. Disinheritance may be Revoked

A declaration of disinheritance may be revoked.

If the disinheritance has been made by will, the revocation may be made only by will; but if the disinheritance has been made in writing deposited with the competent official, such revocation may be made either from prescribed in Section 1608 (1) or (2).

(top)

Chapter 4: Renunciation of an Estate and Miscellaneous Provisions

Section 1610. Devolution to a Minor or Unsound Person

When an estate devolves on a minor, or a person of unsound mind, or on a person incapable of managing his own affairs within the meaning of Section 32* of this Code, and such person has not already had a legal representative or custodian or curator, the court shall appoint a guardian, custodian or curator as the case may be, on application of any interested person or of the Public Prosecutor.

[* Amended by Section 15 Act Promulgation the Revised Provisions of Book I of the Civil and Commercial Code (B.E. 2535)]

Section 1611. Minor or a Person of Unsound Mind cannot renounce inheritance

An heir who is a minor, a person of unsound mind, or a person incapable of managing his own affairs within the meaning of 32* this Code, cannot, except with the consent of his parents, guardian, custodian or curator as the case may be and with the approval of the Court, do the following acts:

  1. renounce and inheritance or refuse legacy
  2. accept an inheritance or legacy encumbered with a charge or condition.

[* Amended by Section 15 Act Promulgation the Revised Provisions of Book I of the Civil and Commercial Code (B.E. 2535)]

Section 1612. Renunciation of an Inheritance

Renunciation of an inheritance or refusal of a legacy shall be made by an express declaration of intention in writing deposited with the competent official, or by a contract of compromise.

Section 1613. No Conditional Renunciation or Revocation of a Renunciation

Renunciation of an inheritance or refusal of a legacy cannot be merely for a part or made subject to a condition or time clause.

Renunciation of an inheritance or refusal of a legacy cannot be revoked.

Section 1614. Renunciation Prejudicing a Third Party Creditor

If an heir in any way renounces an inheritance or refuses a legacy with the knowledge that in so doing he prejudices his creditor, the creditor is entitled to claim cancellation of such renunciation or refusal; but this does not apply if the person enriched by such act did not know, at the time of the renunciation or refusal, of the facts which would make it prejudicial to the creditor; provided, however, that the case of renunciation or refusal made gratuitously, the knowledge on the part of the heir alone is sufficient.

After cancellation of the renunciation or refusal, the creditor may apply to the Court for authorization to accept the inheritance or legacy in the stead and by the right to such heir.

In such case, after payment to the creditor of such heir, the remainder, if any, of his share in the estate shall accrue to his descendants or to the other heirs of the de cujus as the case may be.

Section 1615. Renunciation of an inheritance goes back to the time of the death

The renunciation of an inheritance or refusal of a legacy by an heir relates back, as regards its effect, to the time of the death of the de cujus.

When renunciation is made by any statutory heir, his descendants, provided they are not persons in whose name a valid renunciation has been made on behalf by their parents, guardians or custodians as the case may be, shall succeed under their own rights and shall be entitled to the portion equal to the share which would have devolved on the renouncer.

Section 1616. After Renunciation, Renouncer has no right to the management of property

If the descendants of the renouncer have acquired inheritance as provided in Section 1615, as regards the property so inherited by his descendants, the renouncer has no right of management and enjoyment as specified in Book V Title II Chapter III of this Code, and Section 1548 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1617. Descendants of Renouncer not subject to Legacy

If any person refuses a legacy, neither such person nor his descendants are entitled to receive the legacy so refused.

Section 1618. Part of Renouncer Legacy Distributed to other Heirs

If a renunciation is made by a statutory heir who has no descendant to inherit or if a refusal is made by a legatee, the part of the estate so renounced or refused shall be distributed to the other heirs of the de cujus.

Section 1619. Limits on Right to Renunciation

A person cannot renounce or otherwise dispose of the rights which he may contingently have to the succession of a living person.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SUCCESSION
TITLE II
STATUTORY RIGHT OF INHERITANCE

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 1620. Dying Intestate

Where a person dies without having made a will, or if having made a will, his will has no effect, the whole of his estate shall be distributed among his statutory heirs according to the law.

Where a person dies having made a will which disposes of or has effect for a part only of his estate, the part which has not been disposed of or is not affected by the will shall be distributed among his statutory heirs according to the law.

Section 1620. Statutory Heirs

Where a person dies without having made a will, or if having made a will, his will has no effect, the whole of his estate shall be distributed among his statutory heirs according to the law.

Where a person dies having made a will which disposes of or has effect for a part only of his estate, the part which has not been disposed of or is not affected by the will shall be distributed among his statutory heirs according to the law.

Section 1621. Statutory Share

Unless otherwise provided by the testator in his will, although a statutory heir may have received any property under the will, such heir is still entitled to avail himself of his statutory right of inheritance up to the extent of his statutory share from the estate which has not been disposed of by the will.

Section 1622. Buddhist Monk cannot inherit

A Buddhist monk cannot claim inheritance as a statutory heir, unless he leaves the monkhood and enforces his claim within the period of prescription specified in Section 1754.

However, a Buddhist monk can be a legatee.

Section 1623. Property of a Monk acquired during Monkhood

Any property acquired by a Buddhist monk during his monkhood shall become, upon his death, property of the monastery which is his domicile, unless he has disposed of it during his life or by will.

Section 1624. Property of Monk acquired prior to Monkhood

Property belonging to a person before he entered the Buddhist monkhood shall not become property of the monastery, and shall devolve on his statutory heirs, or may be disposed of him by any way whatsoever according to the law.

Section 1625. Deceased while Married

If the deceased was married, the liquidation of property and the distribution of the estate between the deceased and the surviving spouse shall be as follows:

  1. as regards the share in the property of husband and wife, the provisions of this Code concerning divorce by mutual consent as supplemented by Sections 1637 and 1638 and especially Section 1513 to 1517 of this Code shall apply; however, such liquidation shall take effect as from the date of dissolution of the marriage by death;
  2. as regards the share in the estate of the deceased, the provisions of this Book other than Sections 1637 and 1638 shall apply.

Section 1626. After liquidation to surviving spouse

After Section 1625 (1) has been complied with, the division of the estate between the statutory heirs shall be as follows:

  1. the estate will be divided between the several classes and degrees of heirs as provided in Chapter II of this Title;
  2. the proportion accruing to each class and degree shall be divided between the heirs of such class and degree, as provided in Chapter III of this Title.

Section 1627. Legitimated Child

An illegitimate child who has been legitimated by his father and an adopted child are deemed to be descendants in the same way as legitimate children within the meaning of this Code.

Section 1628. Separated Spouses

Spouses who are living apart under desertion or separation do not lose the statutory right of inheritance to one another as long as divorce between them has not taken place according to the law.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

Chapter 2: Division into Portions Between Several Classes and Degrees of Statutory Heirs

Section 1629. Classes of Statutory Heirs

There are only six classes of statutory heir and subject to the provisions of Section 1630 paragraph 2, each class is entitled to inherit in the following order:

  1. descendants;
  2. parents;
  3. brothers and sisters of full blood;
  4. brothers and sisters of half blood;
  5. grandparents;
  6. uncles and aunts.

The surviving spouse is also a statutory heir, subject to the special provisions of Section 1635.

Section 1630. No right of lower class of heirs to inherit

So long as there are any heirs surviving or represented in a class as specified in Section 1629 as the case may be, the heir of the lower class has no right at all to the estate of the deceased.

However, the forgoing paragraph does not apply in the particular case where there is any descendant surviving or represented as the case may be, and also the parents or one of them are still surviving; in such case each parent is entitled to the same share as an heir in the degree of children.

Section 1631. Right of Representation

As between descendants of different degrees, only the children of the de cujus who are entitled to inherit. The descendants of lower degree may receive the inheritance only by the right of representation.

(top)

Chapter 3: Division into Shares Between the Statutory Heirs in Each Class and Degree

Section 1632. Distribution of Inheritance

Subject to the provisions of Section 1629 last paragraph, the distribution of inheritance to the statutory heirs in the several classes of relatives shall be in accordance with the provisions in Part I of this Chapter.

Section 1633. Same Class = Equal Shares

The statutory heirs of the same class in any of the classes as specified in Section 1629 are entitled to equal shares. If there is only one statutory heir in such class, he is entitled to the whole portion.

Section 1634. Per Stirpes

As between the descendants entitled by way of representative to the division per stirpes as provided in Chapter IV of Title II, the divisions shall be as follows:

  1. If there are descendants of different degrees, only the children of the deceased who are the nearest in degree are entitled to receive the inheritance. The descendants of lower degree may receive the inheritance only by virtue of the right of representation;
  2. descendants in the same degree are entitled to equal parts
  3. if in one degree there is only one descendants such descendant is entitled to the whole share.

(top)

Chapter 3: Division into Shares Between the Statutory Heirs in Each Class and Degree

Part 2: Spouses

Section 1635. Surviving Spouse

The surviving spouse is entitled to the inheritance of the deceased in the class and according to the division as hereunder provided:

  1. if there is an heir according to Section 1629 (1) surviving or having representatives as the case may be, such surviving spouse is entitled to the same share as an heir in the degree of children;
  2. if there is an heir according to Section 1629 (3) and such heir is surviving or has representatives, or if in default of an heir according to Section 1629 (1), there is an heir according to Section 1629 (2) as the case may be, such surviving spouse is entitled to one half of the inheritance;
  3. if there is an heir according to Section 1629 (4) or (6) and such heir is surviving or has representatives, or if there is an heir according to Section 1629 (5) as the case may be, such surviving spouse is entitled to two-thirds of the inheritance;
  4. if there is no heir as specified in Section 1629, such surviving spouse is entitled to the whole inheritance.

Section 1636. Multiple Wives

If the de cujus has left several wives surviving who acquired their legal status before the enforcement of the Civil and Commercial Code Book V, all those wives are jointly entitled to inherit in the class and according to the division as provided in Section1635. However, as between themselves each secondary wife is entitled to inherit one half of the share which the principal wife is entitled.

Section 1637. Beneficiary of Life Insurance

If any surviving spouse is the beneficiary of an insurance on life, such surviving spouse is entitled to receive the whole sum agreed with the insurer. But he or she shall be bound to compensate either the Sin Derm or the Sin Somros of the other spouse, as the case may be, by restoring such sums paid as premiums as may be proved to have been in excess of the amount of money which could be paid as premiums by the deceased having regard to the latter’s income or usual station in life.

The amount of premiums to be restored under the forgoing provisions shall in no case be more than the sum paid by the insurer.

Section 1638. Annuity

Where both spouses have invested money in a contract whereby an annuity is payable to both of them during their joint lives and afterwards to the survivor for life, the latter shall be bound to compensate either the Sin Derm or the Sin Somros of the other spouse as the case may be, in so much as such Sin Derm or Sin Somros has been used for such investment. Such compensation to the Sin Derm or Sin Somros shall be equal in the amount to the extra sum required by the grantor of the annuity is order to continue to pay the annuity to the surviving spouse.

(top)

Chapter 4: Representation for the Purpose of Receiving Inheritance

Section 1639. Representative Heirs

If any person who would have been an heir according to Section 1629 (1), (3), (4) or (6) is dead or has been excluded before death of the de cujus, his descendants, if any, shall represent him for the purpose of receiving inheritance. If any of his descendants is dead or has been excluded in the same manner, the descendants of such descendants shall represent him for the purpose of receiving inheritance and the representation shall take place in this way as regards the share of each person consecutively to the end of the stirpes.

Section 1640. Juristic Person

Where a person is deemed to have died according to the provisions of Section 65 of this Code, there may be representation for the purpose of receiving inheritance.

Section 1641. Exclusion before Death

If any person who would have been an heir according to Section 1629 (2) or (5) is dead or has been excluded before the death of the de cujus, the whole share shall devolve to the other surviving heirs, if any, of the same class and no representation shall take place.

Section 1642. Representation only for Statutory Heirs

Representation for the purpose of receiving inheritance shall take place only among statutory heirs.

Section 1643. Right of Representation only for Direct Descendants

The right of representation for the purpose of receiving inheritance belongs only to the direct descendants, the ascendants having no such right.

Section 1644. Right to be a Representative

A descendant may represent for the purpose of receiving inheritance only if he has complete right to the inheritance.

Section 1645. Renunciation can still be Representative

Renunciation of inheritance of a person does not preclude the renouncer from representing such person in inheriting from another person.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SUCCESSION
TITLE III
WILLS

Chapter 1: General Provisions

Section 1646. Declaration of Intention

Any person may, in contemplation of death, make a declaration of intention by will concerning dispositions as to his property or other matters which shall take effect according to the law after his death.

Section 1647. Will

The declaration of intention in contemplation of death shall be the latest one in imperative term provided by will.

Section 1648. Will must conform to this Chapter

A will must be made according to the forms prescribed in Chapter II of this Title.

Section 1649. Administrator of Estate

The administrator of an estate appointed by the deceased shall have the power and duty to arrange for the funeral of the deceased unless another person has been specially appointed by the deceased for that purpose.

If there is no administrator, or no person appointed by the deceased to arrange for the funeral, or no person entrusted by the heirs to arrange for the funeral, the person who has received the greatest amount of property by will or by statutory right shall have the power and duty to arrange for the funeral unless the Court on application of any interested person, thinks fit to appoint another person for that purpose.

Section 1650. Funeral Expenses

Expenses creating an obligation in favor of a person arranging for the funeral may be claimed according to the preferential right as specified in Section 253 (2) of this Code.

If the funeral is delayed for any reason whatsoever, any person empowered under the foregoing section shall reserve a reasonable amount of money out of the assets of the estate for this purpose. Where the amount to be reserved cannot be agreed upon, or where an objection is raised, any interested person may apply to the Court.

In any case, the expenses or the money for the arrangement of the funeral may be reserved only up to the amount suitable to the social station in life of the deceased, and provided that the rights of the creditors of the deceased are not prejudiced thereby.

Section 1651. Will with Appointment of Controller

Subject to the provisions of Title IV:

  1. where a person is entitled, under a testamentary disposition, to the whole of the de cujus’ estate or to a fraction or a residuary part thereof which is not specifically separated from the mass of the estate, such person is said to be a legatee under a general title has the same rights and liabilities as a statutory heir;
  2. where a person is entitled, under a testamentary disposition, only to a specific property identified in particular or specifically separated from the mass of the estate, such person is said to be a legatee under a particular title and has only rights and liabilities pertaining to such property.

In case of doubt, a legatee is presumed to be a legatee under a particular title.

Section 1652. Ward cannot create a Legacy for his Guardian

A ward cannot make a legacy in favor of his guardian or in favor of the spouse, ascendant or descendant or brother or sister of his guardian until rendering of the account of the guardianship provided by Section 1577 and following of this Code is completed.

Section 1653. Writer or Witness of a Will cannot be a Legatee

The writer of the will or a witness thereof cannot be a legatee under such will.

The forgoing paragraph shall also apply to the spouse of such writer of witness.

The competent official recording the statement made by witnesses under Section 1663 is deemed to be a writer within the meaning of this section.

Section 1654. Capacity of Testator and Legatee

The capacity of the testator must be considered only as at the time when the will is made.

The capacity of the legatee must be considered only as at the time when the testator dies.

(top)

Chapter 2: Forms of Wills

Section 1655. Forms of Wills

A will may be made only in any one of the forms prescribed in this Chapter.

Section 1656. Requirements of a Will

A will may be made in the following form, that is to say, it must be made in writing, dated at the time of making of will and signed by the testator before at least two witnesses present at the same time who shall then and there sign their names certifying the signature of the testator.

No erasure, addition or other alternation in such will is valid unless made in the same form as prescribed by this section.

Section 1657. Holographic Wills

A will may be made by a holographic document, that is to say the testator must write with his own hand the whole text of the document, the date and his signature.

No erasure, addition or other alteration in such will is valid unless made by the testator’s own hand and signed by him.

The provision of Section 9 of this Code shall not apply to a will made under this section.

Section 1658. Will by Public Document

A will may be made by a public document, that is to say:

  1. the testator must declare to the Kromakarn Amphoe* before at least two other persons as witness present at the same time what dispositions he wishes to be included in this will;
  2. the Kromakarn Amphoe must note down such declaration of the testator and read it to the latter and to the witnesses;
  3. the testator and the witnesses must sign their names after having ascertained that the statement noted down by the Kromakarn Amphoe corresponds with the declaration made by the testator;
  4. the statement noted down by the Kromakarn Amphoe shall be dated and signed by such official who shall certify under his hand and seal that the will has been made in compliance with the foregoing Subsections 1 to 3.

No erasure, addition or other alternation in such will is valid unless signed by the testator, the witness and the Kromakarn Amphoe.

[* According to Section 40 of the Act on the Administrative Organization of the State, B.E. 2495, all powers and duties relating to the official service are determined by law to belong to Kromakarn Amphoe are vested in Nai Amphoe.]

Section 1659. Will outside of Amphoe Office

A will made by a public document may, upon request, be made outside the Amphoe Office.

Section 1660. Secret Will

A will may be made by a secret document, that is to say:

  1. the testator must sign his name on the document;
  2. he must close up the documents and sign his name on the document;
  3. he must produce the closed document before the Kromakarn Amphoe (public officer) and at least two other persons as witnesses and declare to all of them that it contains his testamentary dispositions; and if the testator has not written with his own hand the whole text of the document he must state the name and domicile of the writer;
  4. after the Kromakarn Amphoe has noted down upon the cover of the document the declaration of the testator and the date of the production and has affixed his seal thereupon, the Kromakarn Amphoe, the testator and the witness must sign their names thereon.

No erasure, addition or other alternation in such will is valid unless signed by the testator.

Section 1661. Deaf-Mute or Unable to Speak

If a person, who is deaf-mute or unable to speak, desires to make his will by a secret document, he must instead of making the declaration required in Section 1660 (3) write with his own land, in the presence of the Kromakarn Amphoe and of the witnesses, on the cover of the document, a statement that the enclosed document is his will and add the name and the domicile of the writer of the document, if any.

Instead of nothing down the declaration of the testator on the cover, the Kromakarn Amphoe shall certify thereon that the testator has complied with the requirements of the foregoing paragraph.

Section 1662. Public Wills cannot be disclosed during life of Testator

A will made by a public document or by a secret document shall not be divulged by the Kromakarn Amphoe to any other person during the lifetime of the testator, and the Kromakarn Amphoe is bound to hand over such will to the testator whenever the latter shall require him to do so.

If the will has been made by a public document the Kromakarn Amphoe shall, before handing over such will, make a copy thereof under his signature and seal. Such copy may not be divulged to any other person during the life of testator.

Section 1663. Will under Imminent Danger

When under exceptional circumstances such as imminent danger of death, or during an epidemic or war, a person is prevented from making his will in any other if the prescribed forms, he may be make an oral will.

For this purpose, he must declare his intention regarding the dispositions of the will before at least two witnesses present at the same time.

Such witnesses must without delay appear for the Kromakarn Amphoe and state before him the dispositions which the testator has declared to them orally, as well as the date, place and exceptional circumstances under which the will was made.

The Kromakarn Amphoe shall note down the statement of the witnesses and such two witnesses shall sign the statement or, failing that, may make an equivalent to signature only by affixing a finger-print certified by the signatures of two witnesses.

Section 1664. Will under Imminent Danger valid only one month after Testator is no longer in Danger

A will made under the forgoing section loses its validity one month after the time when the testator has again been placed in a position to make a will in any other of the prescribed forms.

Section 1665. Signature of Testator

When the signature of the testator is required under Section 1656, 1658, 1660, the only equivalent to signature is the affixing of a finger-print certified by the signatures of two witnesses at the same time.

Section 1666. Witness No Required under Section 1656, 1658, 1660

The provisions of Section 9 paragraphs 2* of this Code shall not apply to witnesses whose signatures are required under Section 1656, 1658, 1660.

[Amended by Section 15 of Act Promulgating the Revised Provisions of Book I of the Civil and Commercial Code B.E. 2535.]

Section 1667. Thai Will in Foreign Country

In the event of a Thai subject making his will in a foreign territory, such will may be made either according to the form prescribed by the law of the country where it is made or according to the form prescribed by Thai law.

When the will is made according to the form prescribed by Thai law, the powers and duties of the Kromakarn Amphoe under Section 1658, 1660, 1661, 1662, 1663 shall be exercised by:

  1. the Thai Diplomatic or Consular Officer acting within the scope of his authority, or
  2. any authority competent under foreign law for making authentic record of a statement.

Section 1668. No Need to Disclose Will Contents to Witnesses

Unless otherwise provided by law, the testator need not disclose to the witness the contents of his will.

Section 1669. Soldiers during an Armed Conflict or War

During the time when the country is engaged in armed conflict or is in the state of war, a person serving in armed forces or acting in connection therewith may make a will according to the form prescribed in Section 1658, Section 1660 or Section 1663; and in such case the military officer or official of commissioned rank shall have the same powers and duties as those of the Kromakarn Amphoe.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to the person serving in armed forces or acting in connection therewith, who, while performing the duties for his country, makes a will in a foreign country which is engaged in armed conflict or is in the state of war; and in such cases the military officer or official commissioned rank shall have the same powers and duties as those of the Thai Diplomatic or Consular Officer.

If the testator under the two foregoing paragraphs is sick or wounded and is admitted to a hospital, the physician of that hospital shall also have the same powers and duties as those of the Kromakarn Amphoe, Thai Diplomatic or Consular Officer, as the case may be.

Section 1670. Cannot be Witness

The following persons cannot witness at the making of a will:

  1. persons not sui juris
  2. persons of unsound mind or persons adjudged quasi-incompetent;
  3. persons who are deaf or dumb or blind

Section 1671. Other Persons than Testator is Writer of Will

Where a person other than the testator is the writer of a will, such persons must sign his name thereon and add the statement that he is the writer.

If such person is also a witness, a statement that he is a witness must be written down after his signature in the same manner as is done by any other witness.

Section 1672. Power to Modify Rules and Fees

The Minister of Interior, Defense and Foreign Affairs shall have the powers and duties, in so far as they are respectively concerned, to issue Ministerial Regulations for carrying out the provisions of this Book and for fixing the rates and fees in connection therewith.

(top)

Chapter 3: Effects and Interpretation of Wills

Section 1673. Effect of Death

Rights and duties under a will take effect from the death of the testator, unless a condition or time clause has been provided by the testator for its taking effect thereafter.

Section 1674. Condition Precedent

If a testamentary disposition is subject to a condition and the condition has been fulfilled before the death of the testator; if the condition is precedent, such disposition takes effect at the death of the testator; if the condition is subsequent, the disposition has no effect.

If the condition precedent is fulfilled after the death of the testator, the testamentary disposition takes effect at the death of the testator but ceases to have effect when the condition is fulfilled.

However, if the testator has declared in the will that, in the case provided by the two foregoing paragraphs the effect of the fulfillment of the condition shall relate back to the time of his death, such declaration of intention shall prevail.

Section 1675. Appointment of an Administrator

Where a legacy is subject to a condition precedent, the beneficiary under such testamentary disposition may apply to the Court for the appointment of an administrator of the property bequeathed up to the time when the condition will be fulfilled or when such fulfillment will become impossible.

If the Court thinks fit, such applicant himself may be appointed administrator of the property, and a proper security may be required from him.

Section 1676. Creation of a Foundation

A will may be made charging a person to create a foundation or directly determining the appropriation of property for any purpose in accordance with the provisions of Section 110 of this Code.

Section 1677. Who is Responsible for Creating a Foundation

Where there is a will creating a foundation under the foregoing section it shall be the duty of the heir or administrator, as the case may be, to apply to the Government for authorization to constitute it as a juristic person according to Section 114 of this Code unless it is otherwise provided by will.

If the authorization by the Government has not been applied for by the aforesaid person, the application may be made by any interested person, or by the Public Prosecutor.

[Amended by Section 15 of the Act Promulgation the Revised Provisions of Book I of the Civil Code B.E. 2535.]

Section 1678. Juristic Person

When a foundation created by will has been constituted as a juristic person, the properties appropriated to its purpose by the testator are deemed to vest in such juristic person from the time when the will takes effect unless it is otherwise provided by will.

Section 1679. Unable to Create Foundation

Where the foundation cannot be organized in accordance with its object, the properties shall devolve as may have been provided by the will.

In the absence of such provision, the Court shall, on application by the heir, the administrator, the Public Prosecutor or any interested person, appropriate the properties to such other juristic persons whose purpose appears to be the nearest possible to the intention of the testator.

If such appropriate cannot be made or if the foundation cannot come into existence on account of its being contrary to law or against public order or good morals, such testamentary disposition becomes ineffective.

Section 1680. Creditors of Testator

The creditors of the testators are entitled to claim cancellation of any testamentary disposition creating a foundation, only in so far as they are prejudiced thereby.

Section 1681. Destroyed Property

If the property forming the subject of the legacy has been lost, destroyed or damaged, and in consequence of such circumstances a substitute or a claim for compensation for such property has been acquired, the legatee may claim delivery of the substitute received or may himself claim the compensation as the case may be.

Section 1682. Legacy by the Release of a Claim

Where a legacy is made by way of a release or a transfer or a claim, such legacy shall be effective only up to the amount still outstanding at the time of the death of the testator, unless otherwise provided by the will.

Any document evidencing the claim released or transferred shall be delivered to the legatee; and the provisions of Sections 303 to 313 and 340 of this Code shall apply mutatis mutandis; provided that if any act or proceedings were to have been carried out by the testator under those sections, the person who has to execute the legacy, or the legatee, may carry them out in his place.

Section 1683. Legacy to a Creditor

A legacy made by the testator to any of his creditors is presumed not to be made in payment of the debt due to such creditor.

Section 1684. Interpretation of a Clause

Where a clause in a will can be interpreted in several senses, the sense which best assures the observance of the intention of the testator shall be preferred.

Section 1685. Legatee

Where the testator has made a legacy by describing the legatee in such a manner that he can be identified and there are several persons answering to the description of the legatee so made by the testator, in case of doubt all such persons are deemed to be entitled to equal shares.

(top)

Chapter 4: Wills with Appointment of Controller of Property

Section 1686. Trust

Trust created whether directly or indirectly by will or by any juristic act producing effect during lifetime or after death shall have no effect whatever.

Section 1687. Disposal of Property to a Minor

If the testator desires to dispose of his property in favor of a minor or of a person adjudged incompetent or quasi-incompetent or of a person admitted into a hospital for unsoundness of mind but wishes to entrust the custody and management thereof to a person other than the parents, guardian, custodian or curator, he must appoint a controller of property by will.

Such appointment of a controller of property cannot be made for a longer period than the minority or the adjudication of incompetency or quasi-incompetency or the duration of the admittance into hospital as the case may be.

Section 1688. Registered Controller

No appointment of the controller of property in regard to an immovable property or any real right appertaining thereto is complete unless it has been registered by the competent official.

The same provision applies as regards ships of five tons and over, floating houses and beasts of burden.1

[ 1 The second paragraph of Section 1688 has been amended by Section 15 of the Civil and Commercial Code Amendment Act (no.14), B.E. 2548.]

Section 1689. Who can be appointed a Controller

With the exception of such persons as are specified in Section 1557 of this Code, any juristic or natural person of full capacity may be appointed a controller of property.

Section 1690. Appointment of Controller

A controller of property may be appointed by:

  1. the testator himself
  2. a person nominated for the purpose in the will

Section 1691. Controller can appoint another controller

Unless otherwise provided in the will by the testator, a controller of property may appoint by will another person to act in his stead.

Section 1692. Rights and Duties of Controller

Unless otherwise provided in the will by the testator, the controller of property shall have, as regards the property entrusted to him, the same rights and duties as the guardian within the meaning of Book V of this Code.

(top)

Chapter 5: Revocation and Lapse of a Will or Clause in a Will

Section 1693. Revocation of the Will

A testator may at any time revoke his will wholly or partly.

Section 1694. Needs to be revoked as Prescribed by Law

If a former will is to be revoked wholly or partly by a latter will, the revocation is valid only when the latter will is made in any of the forms prescribed by law.

Section 1695. Revocation by Intentional Destruction

Where a will is embodied in one document only, the testator can revoke it wholly or partly by intentional destruction or cancellation.

Where the will is embodied in several duplicates, such revocation shall not be complete unless it is effected in all the duplicates.

Section 1696. Testamentary Disposition

A testamentary disposition is revoked if the testator has intentionally made a valid transfer of the property which is the subject of the will.

The same rule applies if the testator has intentionally destroyed such property.

Section 1697. Conflicting Intentions

Unless the testator has otherwise made a declaration of intention in his will, if it appears that a former and a latter will conflict, the former is deemed to have been revoked by the latter only as to the parts in which their provisions conflict.

Section 1698. Testamentary Lapses

A testamentary disposition lapses:

  1. if the legatee dies before the testator;
  2. if the testamentary disposition is to take effect on a condition being fulfilled and the legatee dies before its fulfillment, or it becomes certain that the condition cannot be fulfilled;
  3. the legatee refuses legacy
  4. if the whole property bequeathed is, without the intention of the testator, lost or destroyed during his lifetime and the testator has not acquired a substitute or a claim for compensation for the loss of such property.

Section 1699. Non-Effect of Will

If a will or a clause in a will as regards any property has no effect for any reason whatsoever, such property devolves on the statutory heirs or the State as the case may be.

(top)

Chapter 6: Nullity of a Will or of Clause in a Will

Section 1700. Inalienability Clause

Subject to the provisions of this Chapter, a person may, be an act producing effect during lifetime or after death, dispose of any property under a stipulation that such property shall be inalienable by the beneficiary under such disposition, provided that the stipulator appoints some person, other than the beneficiary under such disposition, who shall become absolutely entitled to such property in case of violation of the inalienability clause.

The person appointed must be capable or rights at the same time when the act disposing of such property takes effect.

If there is no such appointment, the inalienability clause shall be deemed non-existent.

Section 1701. Period for Inalienability Clause

The inalienability clause stipulated under the foregoing section may be either be for a period of time or for the life of the beneficiary.

If no period has been fixed, the period of inalienability shall be deemed to last for the life of the beneficiary if the beneficiary is a natural person, or thirty years if the beneficiary is a juristic person.

If the period of inalienability is specified, such period cannot exceed thirty years; if a longer period is specified, it shall be reduced to thirty years.

Section 1702. Inalienability Clause – Movable Property

Any inalienability clause concerning movable property whose ownership is not subject to registration shall be deemed non-existent.

No inalienability clause concerning immovable property or any real right appertaining thereto is complete unless it is made in writing and registered by the competent official.

(*1) The provisions of the foregoing paragraph applies as regards ships of five tons and over, floating houses and beast of burden.

[* The third paragraph of Section 1702 has been by Section 16 of Civil and Commercial Code Amendment Act, (no.14), B.E. 2548.]

Section 1703. Minimum age for Will

A will made by a person who has not completed his fifteenth year of age is void.

Section 1704. Required Competency

A will made by a person adjudged incompetent is void.

A will made by a person, who is alleged to be of unsound mind but not adjudged incompetent, may be annulled only if it is proved that at the time of making the will the testator was actually of unsound mind.

Section 1705. Contrary to Law

A will or clause in a will is void if it is contrary to the provisions of Section 1652, 1653, 1656, 1657, 1658, 1660, 1661, or 1663.

Section 1706. Void Dispositions

A testamentary disposition is void:

  1. if it appoints a legatee upon the condition that the latter shall dispose also by will of his own property in favor of the testator or of a third person;
  2. if it refers to a person whose identity cannot be ascertained; however a legacy under a particular title may be made in favor of a person to be chosen by a certain person out of several other persons or out of any group of persons specified by the testator;
  3. if the property bequeathed is so insufficient described that it cannot ascertained or if the amount of a legacy is left to the discretion of a certain person.

Section 1707. Disposition to Party to transfer to a Third Party is Void

If a testamentary disposition appoints a legatee upon the condition that the latter shall dispose of the property bequeathed in favor of a third person, such condition shall be deemed non-existent.

Section 1708. Cancellation of Will as a Result of Distress

After the death of the testator, any interested person may apply to the Court to have a will cancelled on account of duress; but if the testator continues to live for more than one year after he has ceased to be under the influence of the duress, such application cannot be made.

Section 1709. Cancellation of Will as a Result of Mistake

After the death of the testator, any interested person may apply to the Court to have a will cancelled on account of mistake or fraud only when the mistake or fraud is such that without it the will would not have been made.

The foregoing paragraph shall apply even if the fraud has been committed by a person who is not a beneficiary under the will.

However, a will made under the influence of mistake or fraud is operative if the testator fails to revoke it within one year after discovering the mistake or fraud.

Section 1710. Statute of Limitations for Cancellation of Will

No action for cancellation of a testamentary disposition can be entered later than:

  1. three months after the death of the testator if the ground for cancellation was known to the plaintiff during the lifetime of the testator, or
  2. three months after the plaintiff has acquired knowledge of such ground in any other case.

However, if such testamentary disposition affecting the interest of the plaintiff is unknown to him, even though the ground for cancellation was known to him, the period of three months shall run from the moment when such disposition is known or ought to have been known to the plaintiff.

In any case, such action cannot be entered later than ten years after the death of the testator.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

SUCCESSION
ADMINISTRATOR OF AN ESTATE
TITLE IV
ADMINISTRATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF AN ESTATE

Chapter 1: Administrator of an Estate

Section 1711. Administrators of Estate

The administrators of an estate shall include persons appointed by will or by order of the Court.

Section 1712. Appointment

An administrator of the estate by will may be appointed:

  1. By the testator himself; or
  2. By the person nominated for the purpose in the will

Section 1713. Application for Appointment

Any heir or any interested person or the Public Prosecutor may apply to the Court to appoint an administrator of the estate in the following cases:

  1. If on the death of the de cujus any statutory heir or legatee is not found or is abroad or is a minor;
  2. If the administrator of the estate or the heir is unable or unwilling to carry on or is impeded in carrying on the administration or distribution of the estate
  3. If a testamentary disposition appointing an administrator of the estate has no effect for any reason whatsoever

Such appointment shall be made by the Court in accordance with the provisions of the will, if any. Failing such provision the Court may make the appointment for the benefit of the estate, having regard to the circumstances and taking into consideration the intention of the de cujus as the Court may think fit.

Section 1714. Inventory

Where an administrator of the estate is appointed by the Court for a particular purpose, he is not bound to make an inventory of the estate unless the inventory is required for such purpose or by an order of the Court.

Section 1715. Appointment by Testator

A testator may appoint one or more persons to be administrators of his estate.

Unless otherwise provided by will, if several persons have been appointed administrators and, because some of them are unable or unwilling to act, there remains only one, the latter is solely entitled to act as administrator; if there remain several administrators, it is presumed that they cannot act separately.

Section 1716. Beginning of an Administrator

The functions of an administrator appointed by the Court begin from the day when the order of the Court is heard or is deemed to have been heard.

Section 1717. Right to Refuse Appointment

At any time within one year from the death of the de cujus but after fifteen days from such death, any heir or interested person may give notice requiring any person appointed administrator by will to declare whether he accepts or refuses the administratorship.

If the person so notified does not declare his acceptance within one month from the receipt of such notice, he is deemed to have refused. However, acceptance cannot be made after one year from the death of the de cujus unless by permission of the Court.

Section 1718. Cannot be Administrator

The following persons cannot be administrators of an estate:

  1. Persons not sui juris;
  2. Persons of unsound mind or adjudged quasi-incompetent;
  3. Persons adjudged bankrupt by the Court

(top)

Chapter 1: Administrator of an Estate

Section 1719. Acts in Compliance with Expressed or Implied Order of Will

The administrator of an estate has the right and duty to do all such acts as may be necessary for complying with the expressed or implied order in the will and for the general administration or distribution of the estate.

Section 1720. Liability to the Heirs

The administrator of an estate shall be liable to the heirs as provided by Sections 809, 812, 819 and 823 of this Code mutatis mutandis; and as regards third persons Section 831 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1721. No Right to Remuneration out of Estate

An administrator of an estate is not entitled to receive remuneration out of the estate unless permitted by the will or by the majority of the heirs.

Section 1722. No Juristic Acts contrary to interest of the Estate

The administrator of an estate cannot, unless permitted by the will or the Court, enter into any juristic act wherein he has an interest adverse to the interest of the estate.

Section 1723. Personal Actions required by Administrator

The administrator of an estate must act personally unless he can act by an agent through express or implied authority under will or by order of the Court or by requirement of the circumstances for the benefit of the estate.

Section 1724. Heirs bound to third persons by Administrator’s Actions

The heirs are bound to third persons by acts which the administrator has done within the scope of his authority by virtue of his administratorship.

They are not bound by any juristic act entered into by the administrator with a third person if such juristic act was entered into for consideration of any property or other advantages given for his personal benefit or so promised to him by such person unless the heirs have given their consent.

Section 1725. Notice to Interested person of Dispositions

The administrator of an estate shall take proper steps to seek for the interested person and shall notify them within a reasonable time of the testamentary dispositions concerning them.

(top)

Section 1726. Multiple Administrators

If there are several administrators of an estate, the performance of their duties shall be decided by a majority of votes unless otherwise provided by the will. In case of a tie, on application of any interested person, the decision shall be given by the Court.

Section 1727. Application to Discharge Administrator

Any interested person may, prior to the completion of the distribution of the estate, apply to the Court for the discharge of an administrator for reason of neglect of his duties or any other reasonable cause.

Even after having assumed his functions, the administrator may resign for any reasonable cause subject, however, to the permission of the Court.

Section 1728. Inventory of Estate

The administrator of an estate must begin making an inventory of the estate within 15 days:

  1. from the death of the de cujus if, at such time, the administrator has knowledge of his appointment under the will entrusted by the Court.
  2. from the date when the administrator has knowledge of his appointment under the will entrusted to him, or
  3. from the date of his acceptance of administratorship in any other case.

Section 1729. Time Period to Complete Inventory

The administrator of an estate must have the inventory of the estate finished within one month from the time prescribed in Section 1728; but this period of time may be extended by permission of the Court on application made by the administrator before the expiration of the month.

The inventory shall be made in the presence of at least two witnesses who must be persons interested in the estate.

Persons who cannot be witnesses at the making of the will under Section 1670 cannot be witnesses for the making of any inventory under the provisions of this Code.

Section 1730. Will Appointed vs. Court Appointed Administrators

Between the heir and the administrator appointed by will, and between the Court and the administrator appointed by the Court, Sections 1563, 1564, paragraphs 1 and 2 and Section 1565 of this Code shall apply mutatis mutandis.

Section 1731. Inventory Not Completed

If no inventory is made by the administrator in due time and form or if the inventory is found unsatisfactory by the Court on the grounds of gross negligence, dishonesty or obvious incapability of the administrator, the administrator may be discharged by the Court.

Section 1732. Time period to complete duties

The administrator of an estate shall perform his duties and complete the account of management and distribution within 1 year from the dates specified in the Sections 1728, unless the period of time is otherwise fixed by the testator, by a majority of the heirs or by the Court.

Section 1733. No release from liabilities until accounting has been delivered to heirs

No approval, release from liabilities or any other agreement concerning the account of management provided in Section 1732, shall be valid unless such account has been delivered to the heirs together with any document relating thereto not less than five years after the termination of the administratorship.

(top)

Chapter 2: Realization of Assets, Payment of Debts and Distribution of an Estate

Section 1734. Payment of Creditors

The creditors of an estate are entitled to be paid only out of the property of an estate.

Section 1735. Disclosure of All Properties and Debts

The heir is bound to disclose to the administrator all the properties and debts of the deceased known to him.

Section 1736. Satisfaction of Creditors and Legatees

So long as all the known creditors of the estate or legatees have not been satisfied by the performance or distribution, the succession is deemed to be under management.

During such period the administrator is entitled as such to do the necessary acts of management such as to enter actions or to submit answers in Court and so on. He shall take all necessary steps to collect the debts due to estate within the shortest possible time. After the creditors of the estate have been satisfied he shall divide the estate.

Section 1737. Summoning Administrator for a Claim

A creditor of the estate may enforce his claim against any heir. However, where there is an administrator of the estate, he must be summoned by the creditor to appear in the action.

Section 1738. Enforcement of Payment of a Claim

Before the division of the estate the creditor of the estate may enforce full payment of his claim from the estate. In such case each heir may, up to the time of division inclusively, require that the performance be made out of the de cujus’ estate or secured there from.

After the division of the estate, any other place this is found other than then this is copied, the creditor may claim performance from any heir up to the extent of the property received by him. In such case an heir who has made performance to the creditor in excess of his proportionate share in the obligation has a right of recourse against other heirs.

Section 1739. Preferential Rights of Claims

Without prejudice to the creditors having special preferential rights under the provisions of this Code or other law and to the creditors secured by pledge or mortgage, the debt due by the estate shall be paid in the following order and in accordance with the provisions of this Code concerning preferential rights:

  1. expenses incurred for the common benefit of the estate;
  2. expenses incurred for the funeral of the de cujus;
  3. taxes and rates due by the estate;
  4. wages due by the de cujus to any clerk, servant or workman;
  5. supplies of daily necessaries made to the de cujus;
  6. remuneration to the administrator.

Section 1740. Appropriated Property for Payment of Debts

Unless otherwise provided by the de cujus or by law, his property shall be appropriated to the payment of debts in the following order:

  1. property other than immovable property
  2. immovable property expressly appropriated to that purpose by will, if any;
  3. immovable property to which the statutory heirs are entitled as such;
  4. immovable property bequeathed to a person upon the condition that he shall pay the debts of the de cujus;
  5. immovable property bequeathed under general title as provided by Section 1651;
  6. any specific property bequeathed under a particular title as provided by Section 1651.

Any property appropriated under the foregoing provisions shall be sold by way of public auction, but any heir may prevent such sale by paying, to the extent required for the satisfaction of the creditors, the value of the whole or part of the property as may be determined by an appraiser appointed by the Court.

Section 1741. Creditor Raising Objections to an Auction or Appraisement

Any creditor of the estate may, at his own expense, raise an objection to the auction or appraisement of the property specified in the foregoing section. If, notwithstanding such objection having been raised by the creditor, an auction or appraisement is effected the auction or appraisement cannot be set up against the creditor who has raised such objection.

Section 1742. Creditor Designated as Beneficiary of Insurance

If, during the lifetime of the deceased, a creditor has been designated as the beneficiary of an insurance on the life in payment of a debt due to him, he is entitled to receive the whole sum agreed with the insurer. He shall have to return to the estate of the deceased the amount of the premiums only if proved by other creditors:

  1. That by paying his debt in such manner, the deceased and such creditor have acted in contravention of the provisions of Section 237 of this Code; and
  2. That such premiums were out of proportion to the income or station in life of the deceased. In no case shall the amount of premiums to be returned in such manner exceed the sum paid by the insurer.

Section 1743. Execution of Legacies

A statutory heir or a legatee under a general title is not bound to execute legacies under a particular title for more than the amount of property received by him.

Section 1744. Delivery before Death without notice to Creditors

The administrator is not bound to deliver the estate or any part thereof to the heirs before one year has elapsed from the death of the de cujus, unless all the known creditors of the estate and legatees have been satisfied by the performance and distribution.

(top)

Chapter 3: Partition of an Estate

Section 1745. Before Partition

Until the partition of the estate is completed, the rights and duties of the co-heirs as regards the estate are in common, and Section 1356 to Section 1366 of this Code shall be applied in so far as they are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Book. Section 1746 Subject to the provisions of laws or clauses in the will, if any, co-heirs are presumed to have equal shares in the undivided estate.

Section 1747. Gifts during the Lifetime of De Cujus

Where an heir has, during the lifetime of the de cujus, received from the latter any property or other advantage by gift or by other acts under gratuitous title, the rights of such heir in the partition of the estate shall in no way be prejudiced thereby.

Section 1748. Claim for Partition after Period of Prescription

Any heir in possession of the undivided estate is entitled to claim partition thereof even after the lapse of the period of prescription as specified in Section 1754. The right to demand partition as provided in the foregoing paragraph may not be excluded by a juristic act for a period exceeding ten years at a time.

Section 1749. Actions for Partition

When an action for partition of an estate is entered in court, every person claiming to be an heir entitled to such estate may intervene in the action.

The court can neither call in to participate in the partition other heirs than the parties or the intervener in the action, nor reserve a part of the estate for such other heirs.

Section 1750. Types of Partitions

Partition of the estate may be made by the heirs severally taking possession of the property or by selling the estate and dividing the proceeds of sale between the co-heirs.

Section 1751. Eviction from a Partition

After the partition of an estate, if any heir is by reason of eviction deprived of the whole or a part of the property allotted to him under the partition, the other heirs are bound to compensate him.

Such obligation ceases if there is an agreement to the contrary, or if the eviction results from the fault of the heir evicted or from a cause arising after the partition.

The heir evicted shall be compensated by the other heirs in proportion to their shares, less the quota corresponding to that of the heir evicted; if any of the heirs bound to make compensation is insolvent. The other heirs shall be liable for the part of the insolvent heir in the same proportion less the quota corresponding to that of the compensated heir.

The provisions of the foregoing paragraphs shall not be applied to a legatee under a particular title.

Section 1752. Statute of Limitations for Eviction Actions

No action for liability on account of eviction under Section 1751 can be entered later than three months after the date of eviction.

(top)

SUCCESSION
ADMINISTRATOR OF AN ESTATE

Title V: Vacant Estates

Section 1753 Devolution to the State

Subject to the rights of the creditor of the estate, where on the death of a person, there is no statutory heir or legatee or creation of foundation under a will, the estate devolves on the state.

Title VI: Prescription

Section 1754 Statute of Limitations for Action on Inheritance

An action concerning inheritance cannot be entered later than one year after the death of the de cujus or after the time when the statutory heir knows or ought to have known of such death.

An action concerning a legacy cannot be entered later than one year after the time when the legatee knows or ought to have known of the rights to which he is entitled under a will. Subject to the provisions of Section 193/17 of this Code, a creditor having against the de cujus a claim which is subject to a prescription longer than one year is barred from bringing an action after one year from the time when he knows or ought to have known of the death of the de cujus.

In no case shall claims under the foregoing paragraphs be entered later than ten years after the death of the de cujus.

Section 1755. Who can file Action

The prescription of one year can be set up only by an heir or a person entitled to exercise the rights of an heir or by an administrator of the estate.

(top)

Note: English translations of the original Thai law texts are prepared for reference purposes only.
Only the Thai script versions, as published in the royal Thai government gazette (ราชกิจจานุเบกษา), shall have legal force in Thailand.

th
เป็นความลับและไม่มีข้อผูกมัด

ปรึกษากฎหมายฟรี

In English, Chinese, Russian and Thai.

We are here to give you 30-minutes of free consultation. Our attorneys will:

  • ให้คำแนะนำเบื้องต้น
  • ทำการประเมินเรื่องของคุณ
  • ช่วยคุณตัดสินใจว่าจะทำอย่างไรต่อไปเพื่อให้ได้ผลลัพธ์ที่เหมาะสม

คุณยังสามารถติดต่อเราผ่านปุ่มแชทบนไซต์ของเราซึ่งเชื่อมต่อโดยตรงกับบัญชี WhatsApp และ Facebook Messenger ของเรา

Have more questions?

If you have more questions after our first consultation, we are happy to assist you further. Our consultation rates are as follows:

First consultationFREE
Subsequent consultations5,000 THB / hour